PROGRAMME PROJECT REPORT · UNIT III Origin and Development Functionalism. UNIT IV Analytical Functionalism: Talcott Parsons: Structure of Social Actio n UNIT V ... 7KHRU\RI6WUXFWXUDWLRQ0

$Page 1: PROGRAMME PROJECT REPORT · UNIT III Origin and Development Functionalism. UNIT IV Analytical Functionalism: Talcott Parsons: Structure of Social Actio n UNIT V ... 7KHRU\RI6WUXFWXUDWLRQ0$
1

PROGRAMME PROJECT REPORT

(As per the guidelines of the UGC-DEB – 2017)

MASTER ARTS IN SOCIOLOGY (M.A. SOCIOLOGY)

Credit Based System (CBS)

(With effective from June 2018 -2019 onwards)

DIRECTORATE OF DISTANCE EDUCATION

ALAGAPPA UNIVERSITY,

KARAIKUDI - 630003.

2

ALAGAPPA UNIVERSITY, KARAIKUDI – 630003.


Degree of Master of Arts (M.A) Sociology

Credit Based System (CBS)

(With effective from June 2018 – 2019 onwards)

a. Programme’s Mission & Objectives:

To afford a High Quality Post Graduate Degree (M.A) Sociology through Distance

Learning mode to the graduate-aspirant in order to nurture learners in the emerging

Indian society among the young minds. The pupil who wishes to understand basic

concepts of sociology and social structure of the Indian Society, and also gain the

knowledge about the social dynamics is the need of the hour to work with society and

planning for social development for positive social change.

The objectives of the programme include;

• To give an expanded knowledge about Foundations of sociology.

• To teach about Sociological Theories.

• To study about Social Reform Movement in India.

• To understand about Sociology of Indian Society.

• To understand about Sociology of Change Development

• To know about Gender and Society

• To study about Rural and Urban Sociology.

• To enlighten the students about Research Methodology.

• To provide knowledge on Medical Sociology

• To study about Ecology and Society

3

• To understand about Human Resource Development

b. Relevance of the Programme with Alagappa University’s Mission and Goals:

In order to align with the mission and goals of Alagappa University the M.A., Sociology

Programme is planned to deliver in Distance Learning mode which may reach the

maximum number of student aspirants who are unable to thrive to spend non-elastic

timings of formal conventional class room education. Such a higher education in Arts

subject with appropriate practical experiences will enrich the human resources for the

uplift of the nation to Educational, Social, Technological, Environmental and Economic

Magnificence (ESTEEM).

c. Nature of Prospective Target Group of Learners:

This M.A., Sociology programme through Distance Learning mode is developed by

keeping in mind to give opportunity to economically and socially excluded people

includes graduates of various socio-economic status viz., unemployed youths, employed

with marginalized salary due to lack of sufficient knowledge in the subject Sociology.

Also, the target group of learners includes various level employees of hospitals,

secondary –level school teachers, research aspirants, women taking care of family –the

important unit of the community, etc.,

d. Appropriateness of programme to be conducted in Distance learning mode to

acquire specific skills and competence:

M.A., Sociology programme through Distance Learning mode is developed in order to

give subject-specific skills including i) knowledge about Foundations of sociology,

Sociological theories. ii) Social Demography, Science, Technology and Society. iii)

Sociology of Change and Development. Sociology of Indian Society, Dynamics of NGO

Management, Social Problems – Perspectives and Interventions. iv) Sociology of Ageing,

Gender and Society, Human Resource Development, Rural and Urban Sociology,

Ecology and Society, sociology, sociology of Industry and Medical Sociology. The

programme is developed to give detailed exposure theoretically and free-hands

4

experience on practical parts of the study in order to impart skills of Sociological

concepts to the learners.

e. Instructional Design:

e. 1. Curriculum Design:

Sl.

No.

Course

Code

Title of the Course CIA

Max.

ESE

Max.

TO

T

Max

C

Max.

FIRST YEAR

I Semester

1. 35111 Foundations of Sociology 25 75 100 4

2. 35112 Sociological Theories 25 75 100 4

3. 35113 Population Studies 25 75 100 4

4 35114 Research Methods and Statistics 25 75 100 4

Total 100 300 400 16

II Semester

5. 35121 Social Movements in India 25 75 100 4

6. 35122 Sociology of Modernization and

Development

25 75 100 4

7. 35123 Sociology of Indian Society 25 75 100 4

8. 35124 Sociology of Media and

Communication

25 75 100 4

Total 100 300 400 16

5

SECOND YEAR

III Semester

9. 35131 Indian Social Problems 25 75 100 4

10. 35132 Sociology of Ageing 25 75 100 4

11. 35133 Gender and Society 25 75 100 4

12. 35134 Rural and Urban Sociology 25 75 100 4

Total 100 300 400 16

IV Semester

13. 35141 Human Resource Management 25 75 100 4

14. 35142 Ecology and Society 25 75 100 4

15. 35143 Social Welfare Administration 25 75 100 4

16 35144 Medical Sociology 25 75 100 4

Total 100 300 400 16

Course Code Legend:

3 5 1 X Y Z

351- M.A., Sociology

X -Semester No

Y & Z- Course number in the semester

CIA: Continuous Internal Assessment, ESE: End Semester Examination, TOT: Total, C:

Credit Points, Max.: Maximum

6

No. of Credits per Course (Theory) -4

No. of Credits per Course (Practical) - 4

Total No. of Credits per Semester- 16

Total No. of Credits per Programme- 16 X 4 = 64

e. 2. Detailed Syllabi:

7

FOUNDATIONS OF SOCIOLOGY

FIRST SEMESTER

Course Code Title of the Course

35111 FOUNDATIONS OF SOCIOLOGY

Objectives

• The Foundations of Sociology paper is intended to acquaint the students with

sociology as a social science and the distinctiveness of its approach among the

social sciences.

• It also introduces basic concepts and social processes which will enable even

students without any previous exposure to sociology could acquire an interest in

the subject and follow it.

Outcomes of the course:

• To make student understand the scope and development of Sociology as a

scientific discipline.

• To understand basic concepts and their perspectives

• The course will help the students to answer the questions in competitive exams

viz., SET, NET, etc. successfully.

Contents:

UNIT I

Origin and Development of Sociology as an Independent Discipline

UNIT II

Nature and Scope - Its Relationship with Other Social Sciences - Uses of Sociology

8

UNIT III

Basic Concepts of Sociology - Society, Community and Association

UNIT IV

Individual and Society: Theories about the Origin of Human Society

UNIT V

The Role of Heredity and Environment in the Development of Individual.

UNIT VI

Culture: Characteristics and Functions, Material and Non-material Culture, Cultural Lag,

Acculturation, Relationship between Culture and Personality.

UNIT VII

Socialization: Importance - Process - Stages - Agencies - Theories.

UNIT VIII

Social Action and Interaction: Social Relationships and Social Processes.

UNIT IX

Associative/ Conjunctive: Cooperation, Accommodation, Assimilation, Diffusion, and

Disassociative / Disjunctive: Competition and Conflict.

UNIT X

Social Groups: Primary and Secondary Groups - Characteristics - Functions - Differences

- Reference Groups.

UNIT XI

Social Organizations: Formal and Informal - Characteristics and Functions.

UNIT XII

9

Social Institutions - Characteristics - Family and Marriage – Political – Education -

Economic - Religious Institutions.

UNIT XIII

Social Stratification: Characteristics and Functions - Estate, Caste and Class Systems,

Status.

UNIT XIV

Social Control: Types of Social Control - Formal and Informal. Agencies of Social

Control.

References:

• Anderesen, M.L. & Taylor, H.F. – Sociology the Essentials. Wadsworth

Thomson Learning, 2001.

• Bierstedt, R.A. - The Social Order. New York: McGraw-Hill, 1963.

• Bottomore, T.B. - Sociology A guide to Problems and Literature. Blackie and son

(India) Ltd., 1972.

• Brijjak, G.J. – Sociology: Cultural Diversity In A Changing World. London:

Alley and Baccon, 1992.

• Broom, L., and Selznick, P. – Sociology. New York: Harper and Row, 1970.

• Davis, K. - Human Society, New York: Macmillan, 1948.

• Calhoun, C., Light, D., Keller, S. and Harper, D. - Sociology. New York:

McGraw-Hill, Inc, 1994.

• Defleur, M.L., D'Antonio, W.V. and Defleur, L.B. – Sociology of Human

Society.

• Giddens, A. - Sociology, New York: Harcourt Brace Jovanovich, 1982.

10

• Popeneo, D. - Sociology, Eigth Edition. Englewood Cliffs: Prentice Hall, 1991.

• Giddens,F.H. - The Principles of Sociology. Jaipur: Prentice Hall, 1990.

• Hess, B.B., Markson, E.W., & Stein, P.J. – Sociology. Third Edition. New

York:Macmillan Publishing Co., 1988.

• Johnson, H.M. - Sociology A Systematic Introduction, Allied Publishers.

• Macionis, J. - Sociology. New Jersey: Prentice Hall, Englewood Cliffs, 1995.

• Maclver, M. and Page, C.H. - Society. New York: Long and Smith, 1931.

• Oakland, N.J: Scott, Foresman Company Glenview, Illionis, 1976.

• Ritzer, G. Kammeyer, K.C. and Yetman, N.R.- Sociology Experiencing A

Changing Society, Allyn and Baco - , Boetol – Vistas.

• Rose, P.T., Glazer, M. and Glazer, P.M. - Sociology Inquiring into Society. New

York: Canfield Press, 1976.

• Rosenberg, B. and Coser, L.A. - Sociological Theories. New York: Macmillan,

1976.

• Shepard, J.M. – Sociology. New York: West Publishing Company, 1981.

• Smelser, N.J. - Sociology, Sage Publication, Delhi.

• Stewart, E.W. and Glynn, J.A. - Introduction to Sociology. New York: McGraw-

Hill, 1985.

• Stockard, J. - Sociology Discovering Society. Australia: Wadsworth Thomson

Learning, 2000.

• Thio, A. - Sociology A Brief Introduction. London: Allyn and Bacon, 2000.

• Schaefer, R.T. Sociology. New York: McGraw-Hill Inc. 1992.

11

SOCIOLOGICAL THEORIES

FIRST SEMESTER


35112 Sociological Theories

Objectives

• The objective of this course will be development of theorization in Sociology with

regard to understanding of the social reality in different perspectives by different

school of thought.

• This course is intended to introduce the students to the substantive, theoretical and

methodological issues which have shaped the sociological thinking in the latter

half of the 20th century, and which continue to concern the practitioners of

sociology today.


• The main focus will be on origin and development of functionalism and

conflict theories, symbolic interactionism, phenomenology, ethno methodology.

• Provide better understanding about the theory of structuration, rational

choice theory, Postmodernism.

• Post Marxist theories etc. It is necessary for the students to evaluate the

relevance and significance of the perspectives listed for understanding society in

general and society in India in particular.

Contents:

UNIT I

12

Introduction of Social Thought and Sociological Theory- Central Problems of

Sociological Theory

UNIT II

Levels of Theorization in Sociology - Empirical Generalization - Middle Range Theories

- Grand Theories - Theoretical Perspectives.

UNIT III

Origin and Development Functionalism.

UNIT IV

Analytical Functionalism: Talcott Parsons: Structure of Social Action

UNIT V

Social System - Functional Pre-requisites - Pattern Variables.

UNIT VI

Empirical Functionalism: Robert K. Merton: Theory of Social Structure

UNIT VII

Manifest and Latent Functions. Reference Group - Relative Deprivation

UNIT VIII

Conflict Theory: Marxism and Conflict Tradition – Simmel’s Conflict Theory

UNIT IX

Dialectical Conflict Theory of Dahrendorf - Conflict Functionalism: Social Functions of

Conflict - Louis A. Coser.

UNIT X

13

Habermas -Theory of Communicative Action-Public sphere -Life world L.Althusser -

Structural Marxism -Epistemological break-Structural Causality - Structure of dominance

UNIT XI

Symbolic Interactionism: Historical Background - C.H. Cooley - George H. Mead -

Herbert Blumer.

UNIT XII

Phenomenology and Ethnomethodology - A. Schutz, Peter Berger, Gluckmann and H.

Garfinkel. Exchange Theory - Peter.M.Blau - Process of Exchange- Values, Norms –

Social.

UNIT XIII

Exchange-Power - Study of Small Groups. George Homans: Elements of Behavior -

The External System - Internal System.

UNIT XIV

Theory of Structuration M. Facoult’s Postmodernism- Derrida , Post-structurlism and

Post – Post Marxist Theories.

References:

• Abraham, F. - Sociological Theory. New Delhi: Oxford University Press,

1982.

• Adams, B.N. & Sydie, R.A. - Contemporary Sociological Theory, New

Delhi: Pine Forge Press, 2002.

• Belmont: Wadsworth Publishing Co., 1995.

• Best, S. –A beginner’s guide to Social Theory. London: Sage Publications,

2003.

14

• Burger, P. & Luckman, T. – The Social Construction of Reality, London:

Allen Lane, 1967.

• Turner, R. – Ethnomethodology. Harmondsworth: Penguin, 1974.

• Cohen, P.S. - Modern Social Theory. London: Heimemann, 1968.

• Coser, L.A. - Masters of Sociological Thought (2nd Ed). New York:

Harcourt Brace Govanovich, 1977.

• Coser, L.A. & Rosemberg, B. – Sociological Theory: A Book of Readings,

Fourth Edition. New York: Macmillan Publishing. 1970.

• Craib, I. - Classical Social Theory. New York: Oxford, 1997.

• Garfinkel, H. – Studies in Ethno methodology. Englewood Cliffs: Prentice-

Hall, 1967.

• Giddens, A. - A Contemporary Critique of Historical Materialism. London:

The Macmillan Press Ltd, 1981.

• Giddens, A. – Central Problems in Social Theory Action, Structure and

Contradiction in Social Analysis. London: The Macmillan Press Ltd, 1979.

• Haralambos & Holborn - Sociology Themes and Perspectives, Fifth

Edition. London: Collins, 2000.

• Haralambos, M. & Heald, R. – Sociology Themes and Perspectives. New

York: Oxford University Press, 2005.

• Martindale, D. – The Nature & Types of Sociological Theory. New Delhi:

Rawat Publications, 2001.

• Merton, R.K. - Social Theory and Social Structure, New York: Free Press,

1968.

15

POPULATION STUDIES

FIRST SEMESTER


35113 Population Studies

Objectives

• The course aims to familiarize the students about various demographic factors that

contribute to population change and how they influence and are influenced by

various social and economic institutions.

• This course is intended to introduce the sources and Demographic data as well as

indicators to measure various demographic factors will be discussed.


• To equip the students understand the conceptual clarity and theoretical framework

and perspectives with regard to demography.

• To make the students understand the linkages between various social institutions

and social process on the one side and demographic outcomes and processes on

the other.

• To make them understand basic concepts and their perspectives.

• The course will help the students to answer the questions in competitive

exams viz., SET, NET, GATE, etc. successfully.

Contents:

UNIT I

Demographic determinants of population change – births, deaths, migrants, marriages

16

UNIT II

Concept of natural increase of population and growth of population - Measurement and

indicators of demographic determinants: fertility, mortality, migration, marriage

UNIT III

Data sources – census – vital registration system – national sample surveys – sample

registration system – adhoc surveys – standard fertility survey – national family health

survey

UNIT IV

Population theories – History and development of population theories– Mercantilist and

related theories

UNIT V

Theories of Malthus and his immediate predecessors –socialist and Marxist writings –

Growth Theories

UNIT VI

Social Theory of Population Change – Demographic transition theory - Theories of Ester

Boserup and Julian Simon – Trends in Population Growth – India World states in India

UNIT VII

Concepts of fertility and fecundity- theory of marriage and family - social structure and

fertility – role of intermediate variables (Davis and Blake)

UNIT VIII

Economic theory of fertility (Becker) – socio economic theory of fertility (Leibenstein

and Easterlin) - regional variations in fertility levels in India. Concepts of mortality,

UNIT IX

Life expectancy – components of mortality, determinants of infant and child mortality.

17

UNIT X

Causes & death, life & working years lost, Differentials in mortality & morbidity

UNIT XI

Concepts of migration: types of migration, forced migration, political, economic and

social consequences

UNIT XII

In-migration, out-migration, immigrants, emigrants – theories of migration –

Ravenstein’s laws of migration

UNIT XIII

Everette Lee’s perspectives on migration - Push pull theories of migration – social

process of migration – international migration.

UNIT XIV

Indian Population Policy- kinds of population policy, Fertility Influencing policy, Anti-

National policy, Population Education.

References:

• Caldwell JC, Reddy PH, Caldwell P. - The social component of mortality

decline: an investigation in South India employing alternative methodologies.

Population Studies, 1983 July; 37(2):185-205.

• Caldwell, John C. - "The Global Fertility Transition: the Need for a Unifying

Theory".Population and Development Review, Vol. 23, No. 4, December 1997,

pp. 803-812.

• JC Caldwell, (Several other articles) Tim Dyson and others in Population and

Development Review. (Available in the internet).

18

• Lassaonde, Louise - Coping with Population Challenges. London: Earthscan,

1997. Massey, Douglas et al. - "Theories of International Migration". Population

and Development Review 19:3, 1993

• Massey, Douglas et al. - Return to Aztlan: The Social Process of International

Migration from Western Mexico (Studies in Demography, No 1). March 1990.

• Nam, Charles B - Population and Society. Boston: Houghton Mifflin, 1968.

• Hawthorn, Geoffrey – The Sociology of Fertility. London: Collier-Macmillan,

1970

• Heer, David M. - Society and Population, Englewood Cliffs. Prentice Hall, 1975

• Weeks, John R. -Population: An Introduction to Concepts and Issues‟. Belmont,

California: Wadsworth, 1977, pp.1-324.

• Asha Bhande & Tara Kaitkar - Principles of Population Studies, Himalayan

Publishing House, 2015.

19

RESEARCH METHODOLOGY AND STATISTICS

FIRST SEMESTER


35114 Research Methodology and Statistics

Objectives

On completion of the course the students will be able to

• This Paper aims to provide exposure to the fundamentals of various research

techniques and methods (both quantitative and qualitative).

• This paper tries to build upon the basic assumptions in adopting different

methodologies for different kinds of research themes.


• Research Methodology paper will bring out certain ideas underlying the

emergence of scientific methods in social sciences and its theoretical delineations

are introduced.

• The course will attempt to sensitize the post-graduate students to develop a critical

outlook at the existing perspectives and methods and to evolve conceptual clarity,

which can lead them in their future research.

• Teaching certain quantitative methods, statistical techniques and qualitative

methods to collect and analyze the data would help them organize and analyze the

information gathered by them.

Contents:

UNIT I

Introduction to Research: Definition Scientific Research: Science and Its Characteristics.

Features,

20

UNIT II

Science and Its Characteristics. Features, Purpose and Assumptions of Scientific Method.

Steps in Scientific Method.

UNIT III

Applicability of Scientific Method to the Study of Social Phenomena. Theory and

Research. Induction and Deduction.

UNIT IV

Research Problem: Formulation, Conditions and Considerations.

UNIT V

Concepts: Meaning, Categories, and Operationalization. Variables: Meaning, Types, and

Measurement

UNIT VI

Review of literature: Scope and Purpose of literature review, Processes and sources of

reviewing the literature,

UNIT VII

Hypothesis: Functions, Conditions for a Valid Hypothesis, Formulation of Hypothesis,

Types and Forms of Hypothesis, Hypothesis Testing.

UNIT VIII

Research Design: Need for Research Design, Features. Types: Exploratory, Descriptive,

Explanatory, Experimental and Evaluative.

UNIT IX

Sampling: Census, Sample Survey, Characteristics and Implications of Sample Design,

Sampling criteria, sampling frame, sampling error.

21

UNIT X

Types of Sampling: Probability and Non-Probability Sampling. Criteria for Selecting a

Sampling Procedure.

UNIT XI

Collection of Data: Primary and Secondary Data, Sources of Secondary Data.

Methods of Data Collection: Interview, Schedule, Questionnaire, Observation, Content

Analysis and Case Study.

UNIT XII

Measurement and Scaling Techniques: Meaning, Need for Scales, Problems of Scaling,

Methods of Scale Construction - Likert, Thurstone and Guttman Scales. Bogardus Scale.

Reliability and Validity.

UNIT XIII

Preparation of a Research Report: Format, Footnotes, Tables and Figures, Bibliography,

Index, Editing and Evaluating the Final Report. Analysis of Data: Introduction,

Importance, Scope, Function and Limitations.

UNIT XIV

Measures of Central tendency: – Mean, Median, Mode-Measures of Dispersion: – Range,

Quartile Deviation, Mean Deviation and Standard Deviation-Correlation Analysis: Karl

Pearson’s Coefficient of Correlation, Rank Correlation and Association of Attributes,

Test of Significance.

References:

• Babbie, Earl. - The Practice of Social Research, (Second Edition). Belmont:

Wadsworth Publishing, 1979.

• Bailey, K.D. - Methods of Social Research. New York: The Free Press, 1982.

22

• Barker, T.L. - Doing Social Research. New York: McGraw-Hill, 1999.

• Durkheim, E. - The Rules of Sociological Method, New York: Glemcol, 1938.

• Seltiz, C. et al, - Research Methods in Social relations. Free Press: New York,

1959.

• Goode, W.J. and Hatt, P.K. - Methods of Social Research. New York: McGraw

Hill, 1952.

• Holsti, O.R. - Content Analysis for the Social Sciences and Humanities. Addison-

Wesley: Reading, Mass, 1969.

• Kerlinger, F.R. - Foundations of Behavioral Research, (Second Edition). New

York: Holt Reimhart and Winston, 1973.

• Kothari, C.R. - Research Methodology Methods and Techniques. New Delhi:

Wiley Esterm Ltd., 1989.

• McTavisi, D.G. & Loether, H.J. - Social Research: An Evolving Process.

London: Allyn and Bacon, 2002.

• Moser, C.A. and Kalton, G. - Survey Methods in Social Investigation. New York:

The Macmillan, 1958.

• Mukherji, P.N. - Methodology in Social Research. New Delhi: Sage Publications,

2000.

• Laws, S. - Research for Development. New Delhi: Vistaar Publications, 2003.

• Payne, S.L. - The Art of Interviewing. Princeton, N.J: Princeton University Press,

1951.

• Sarantakos, S. - Social Research. London: Macmillan Press Ltd. 1998.

• Schutt, R.K. - Investigating the Social World: The Process and Practice of

Research,

23

• Schwartz, H. & Jacobs, J. - Qualitative Sociology A Method to the Madness.

New York:

• Silverman, D. - Qualitative Methodology & Sociology. England: Gower, 1985.

• Simon, J.I. - Basic Research Methods in Social Science. New York: Random

House, 1978.

• Singleton, R.A. & Straits, B.C. - Approaches to Social Research. New York:

Oxford University Press, 2005.

• Vaus, D.A. - Surveys in Social Research. New Delhi: Rawat Publications, 2003.

• Weber, Max. - The Methodology of Social Sciences. New York: Glencol, 1949.

24

SOCIAL MOVEMENTS IN INDIA

SECOND SEMESTER


35121 Social Movements in India

Objectives


• This course is intended to introduce the students; how the social movements

have shaped the world we live and continue to do.

• Further the course continued to disseminate broadly with regard to the impact

of social movements on society and social structure.


• To understand the transformation occurred in the society due social movements.

• To know the theoretical perspectives of social movements and its political

implications.

• It is necessary for the students to evaluate the relevance and significance of the

social movements and the reforms it brought to the society.

Contents:

UNIT I

Social Movements – Concept, Nature, Definitions, Typologies

UNIT II

Approaches of Social movements

UNIT III

Role of social reform movements in India

25

UNIT IV

Theories of Social Movements.

UNIT V

Deprivation Theory- Resource Mobilization Theory

UNIT VI

Political Process Theory-Structural Strain Theory- New Social Movement Theories

UNIT VII

Movements of the deprived sections- Subaltern movement: Meaning and importance

UNIT VIII

Dalit & Tribal social movement in India.

UNIT IX

Movements of the displaced & Project affected- Civil Liberties & Human Rights

movement

UNIT X

New Social Movements: Meaning and nature

UNIT XI

Peasant movement- Feminist movement- Environment movement – Youth movement

UNIT XII

Social Movements, Socio-Political implications

UNIT XIII

Impact of Globalization on social movements

26

UNIT XIV

Social Movements and Social change

References:

• S. Kothari, Social Movements and Redefinition of Democracy, Boulder

Colorado, West views Press, 199.

• T. K. Oomen, Protest and Change, Studies in Social Movement, New Delhi, Sage,

1990.

• S. Ghose, The Renaissance to Militant Nationalism, Bombay, Bombay, Allied

Publishers, 1969

• K. Jones, Socio Religions Reform Movement in British India, Cambridge Uni.

Press, 1984.

• Omvedt G. – New Social Movements in India, Sage, Delhi, 1999

• Ahmad, Imtiaz (1980) “Social Movements in India” (Review), Sunday Standard,

16th March 1980

• Alvi, Hamza (1965) “Peasants and Revolution”, the Socialist Register, ed. By

Ralph Miliband

• Aurora, G. S. (1981) “Social Movements in India, A Review Article”.

• Dhanagre, D. N. (1974) “Peasant Movements in India, 1920- 1950, Delhi Oxford

University Press.

• Desai, A. R. (1978) Peasant Struggles in India, Bombay: Oxford University Press.

• Malik, S. G. (ed.) (1978) Indian Movements: Some Aspects of Dissent, Protest

and Reform, Simla: Indian Institute of advanced Study

27

• L. K. Mahapatra, „ Social Movements among Tribes of India‟, inK. Suresh

Singh (ed.), Tribal Situation in India, Simla: Indian Institute of advanced

Study, 1972,

• M. S. A. Rao, „Social Movements In India‟, (2008), Manohar Publishers.

• Buechler, S.M. (1995). New social movement theories. The Sociological

Quarterly, 36, 441-464. Retrieved December 5, 2006, from http://www.blackwell-

synergy.com/doi/abs/10.1111/j.1533-8525.1995.tb00447.x

• McAdam, D., McCarthy, J.D., & Zald, M.N. (1988). Social movements. In N. J.

Smelser (Ed.), Handbook of sociology (pp. 695-737). Newbury Park, CA:Sage

Publications.

• Tilly, C. (2004). Social movements, 1768-2004. Boulder, CO: Paradigm

Publishers

28

SOCIOLOGY OF MODERNIZATION AND DEVELOPMENT

SECOND SEMESTER


35122 Sociology of Modernization and Development

Objectives


• Social change has always been a central concern of sociological study. More

recently it has gained in greater salience partly because of its unprecedented

rapidity and partly because of its planned character.

• Not surprisingly, development has emerged as pronounced concern and as a

remarkable feature of our times. Accordingly, the relevance of the course

Sociology of Change and Development can hardly be overemphasized. The

following objectives are:


• To provide conceptual and theoretical understanding of social change and

development as it has emerged in sociological literature.

• This paper also aim is to address the factors, sources and process of social change

and its relevance in the everyday social reality.

• To prepare the students for professional careers in the field of development

planning, including governmental, non-governmental and international agencies

engaged in development.

• This paper helps the students to be encouraged to participate in workshops to

critically examine the existing indicators of human development and to formulate

alternatives sets of indicators of human development, social development and

sustainable Development.

29

Contents:

UNIT I

Basic Concepts: Change, Evolution, Growth, Development, Progress

UNIT II

Social Change versus Cultural Change, Change versus Interaction, Short versus Long-run

Changes

UNIT III

Whole Societies versus Parts, Description versus Analysis, Rate of Change, Direction,

Forms, Source of Social Change - Planned Change

UNIT IV

Factors of Social Change: Geographic, Demographic, Political, Technological,

Economic, Ideological and Ecological

UNIT V

Theories of Social Change - Mono-causal and Multi-causal Theories, Evolutionary,

Cyclical, Linear, Equilibrium.

UNIT VI

Social Change in Indian Society, Trends of Change, Process of Change

UNIT VII

Concept of Sanskritization, Westernization, Modernization, Secularization

UNIT VIII

Globalization, Privatization and Their Impact in socio economic and political aspect in

India

30

UNIT IX

Information Technology and the Network Society. Social Movements - Ideology and

Mass Mobilization, Impact of Revolutionary and Reform Movements.

UNIT X

Changing Conceptions of Development: Economic Growth, Human Development, and

Social Development.

UNIT XI

Quality of Life and Indices, Sustainable Development

UNIT XII

Planned Development as Diffusion of Innovations.

UNIT XIII

Social Structure and Development: Structure as Facilitator / Barrier

UNIT XIV

Development and Implications of Globalization - Ethnicity as Social and Cultural

Identity.

References:

• Appadurai, A. - Modernity at Large Cultural Dimensions of Globalization. New

Delhi: OUP, 1997

• Dereze, J & Sen, A. - India Economic Development and Social Opportunity. New

Delhi: OUP, 1996.

• Giddens, A. - Introduction to Sociology 2nd edition, New York: W.W.Norton &

Co., 1996.

• Haq, M. - Reflections on Human Development, New Delhi: OUP, 1991.

31

• Panikkar, K.M. - Hindu Society at Cross Road., Bombay, 1955.

Mandelbaum, D.G. Society in India. Bombay: Popular Prahkashn, 1970.

• Mathew, Panini & Pathi - Symposium on Implications of Globalization.

• Moore, W.E., and Cook, R. - Social Change. New Delhi: Prentice – Hall (India),

1967.

• Sharma, S. L. - Empowerment without Antagonism: A Case for Reformulation of

Women’s Empowerment Approach. Sociological Bulletin, Vol. 49, No 1, New

Delhi: 2000

• Singer, M. and Cohen, B. - Structure and Change in Indian Society. Jaipur:

Rawat Publication, 2001.

Singh, Y. - Modernization of Indian Tradition. New Delhi: Rawat, 1996.

Sociological Bulletin, Vol 44, New Delhi: 1995.

• Srinivas, M.N. - Social Change in Modern India., Berkeley: University of

Berkeley,

• Kapadia,K.M. - Marriage and Family in India, Culcutta: Oxford University

Press, , 1977.

• UNDP, Human Development Report, New York: Oxford University Press

• UNDP, Sustainable Development, New York: OUP

• World Bank, World Development Report, New York: OUP.

32

SOCIOLOGY OF INDIAN SOCIETY

SECOND SEMESTER


35123 SOCIOLOGY OF INDIAN SOCIETY

Objectives


• To give knowledge to the students about the composition of Indian society and

problems of unity and diversity.

• To equip the students about the Indian social structure and various institutional

patterns. To provide the students with an overview of the Classification and

Distinctive features of Tribal Communities and system of social stratification

among different social groups.

• It is presumed that the student has some familiarity with Indian society by virtue

of the fact that he is a member of it and that he has observed and experienced

some facets of it.


• This Course aims to explore the basic institutions and structure of Indian Society

by presenting a comprehensive, integrated and empirically-based profile of Indian

society.

• The continuity between the present and the past is an evident feature of Indian

society. Though this continuity is reflected in the structure of the course, the focus

is on the contemporary Indian Society.

33

Contents:

UNIT I

Composition of Indian Society: Racial, Linguistic, Cultural, and Religious Groups.

Problems of Unity and Diversity

UNIT II

Hindu Social Organization: Purusharthas, Ashramas, Varna, Jati, etc., Hindu View of

Life

UNIT III

Caste System: Definition, Structure, Characteristics, Sanctions, Functions, Theories on

Origin

UNIT IV

Structural and Functional Changes in Caste System, Mobility in Caste System

UNIT V

Problems of Weaker and Marginalized Sections in India

UNIT VI

Kinship: Definition, Types of Kinship, Degrees of Kinship, Lineage, Kinship Usages,

Kinship Patterns / Terms

UNIT VII

Marriage: Definition, Types and Forms, Characteristics, Functions, Changes in the

Marriage System, Legislation and Its Impact on the Institution of Marriage

UNIT VIII

Family: Definition, Structure, Functions, Classification, and Changes in Structure and

Functions of Family

34

UNIT IX

Gender Roles, Hegemonic Relations between Men and Women.

UNIT X

Tribal Community: Geographical Distribution, Classification and Distinctive features of

Tribal Communities

UNIT XI

Tribes and Castes - Diffusion, Acculturation, Problems of Integration and

Contraculturation

UNIT XII

Rural Community: Bases, Characteristics, Jajmani System - Features, Changes

UNIT XIII

Power Structure and Leadership Pattern - Bases, Functions, Emerging Trends, Values,

Norms, Social Control, Agencies and Means

UNIT IV

Urban Community: Characteristics of Urban Community, Urbanism and Urbanization,

Rural Urban Differences and Continuum

References:

• Bailey, F.G. - Caste and the Economic Frontiers. Manchester: Manchester

University Press, 1957.

• Beals, A.R. Gopalpur - A South Indian villages. New York: Holt, Rinehart and

Winston, 1962.

• Beteille, A. Caste, Class and Power, Berkeley: University of California Press,

1967.

35

• Beteille, A. - Studies in Agrarian Structure, Delhi, Oxford University Press. 1974.

• Kapadia, K.M. - Marriage and Family in India, Madras: Oxford University

Press, 1958.

• Ahuja, R., Indian Social System, Jaipur: Rawat Publication, 1993.

• Bhatt, A. - Caste, Class and Politics: An Empirical Profile of Social Stratification

in Modern Indi: Delhi: Manohar Publishing, 1975.

Desai, A.R., (ed.) Rural Sociology in India. Bombay: 1959.

• Dube, S.C, Indian Villages, Madras: Madras Allied Publisher, 1957.

• Risley, H.H. - The People of India. Delhi: Orient Books, 1969.

Ghurye, G.S. - Caste and Race in India. Oxford, 1955

• Hutton, J.H., Caste in India: Its Nature, Function and Origin, Cambridge

University Press, 1955

• Mandelbaum, D.G. - Society in Indi., Berkeley: University of California, press,

1970.

• Prabhu, P.V. - Hindu Social Organization. Bombay: The popular Depot, 1954.

• Singh, Y. - Modernization of Indian Tradition. New Delhi: Thomson Press, 1973.

• Srinivas, M.N. - Caste: Twentieth Century Avatar. Delhi: Viking, 1996.

• Srinivas, M.N., (ed.) India’s Villages, Madras: Madras Asian Publishing House,

1969.

36

SOCIOLOGY OF MEDIA AND COMMUNICATION

SECOND SEMESTER


35124 Sociology of Media and Communication

Objectives


• This course is intended to introduce the students; how the media have connect

the world we live and continue to do.

• Further the course continued to disseminate broadly with regard to the impact

of sociology into the media and communication.


• To understand the transformation occurred in the society due media and

communication.

• To know the theoretical perspectives of media and communication and its

sociological concepts.

• It is necessary for the students to evaluate the relevance and significance of the

media and communication and the reforms it brought to the society.

Contents:

UNIT I

Communication: Meaning, Definitions, Nature and Scope – Elements of Communication

– Communication Act – Sender – Message – Channel – Receiver – Effects – Feedback –

Communication Process – Communis – Human Relationship.

37

UNIT II

Types of communication - Intrapersonal – Interpersonal - Group – Mass Communication

and Mass line Communication – Functions of Communication – Effects.

UNIT III

Models of Communication: - Barriers - Hypodermic and One Step Flow - Harold. D.

Lasswell, Braddock, Shannon and Weaver, Osgood and Wilbur Schramm, Wilbur

Schramm and Hellical Dance Model.

UNIT IV

Theories of communication: Social Responsibility and Authority.

UNIT V

Characteristics and Differences in Communication mode - Interpersonal and Mass

Communication.

UNIT VI

Human Communication – Characteristics – Contents – Language – Meanings – Talent –

Manifest – Contextual Structural Meanings.

UNIT VII

Classification of Media – Various Types – Traditional Media – Classical and Folk Media

– Modern Media.

UNIT VIII

Origin and growth of mass media in India - Origin of mass media: Press –Film–

Television – Internet - Cellular Phone - SMS – MMS - 2G -3G – 4G - Video

Conferencing.

38

UNIT IX

Mass Communication – Mass Concepts – Characteristics of Mass Audience – Typology

of Audience – Bauer’s Concept.

UNIT X

Communication and the process of diffusion - Two step flow and the role of opinion

leaders in the process of diffusion.

UNIT XI

Technology and communication - Communication Technology and Social Change -

Formation of Public Opinion, Propaganda.

UNIT XII

Role of Communication in Development of Digital Divide.

UNIT XIII

Functions of Mass Communication – Mass Society – Socialisation Process – Mass

Culture – McLuhan’s Global Village Concept – Global Culture.

UNIT XIV

Sociological Dimensions – Scope and functions of communication in the society-social

aspects in shaping communication behavior - Influence of socio-cultural institutions –

Family.

References:

• Agee,Warren K.Philip. Ault and Edwin Emery, Introduction to Mass

Communication, (6th Edition) Oxford and IH Publishing Co., New Delhi : 1979.

• Cassata, Mary. B. and Molefik. Asante, Mass Communucation : Principles and

Practices. Macmillan Publishing Co., Inc. New York: 1979.

39

• Kewal Kumar J., Mass Communucation in India, Jaico Publishing House,

Bombay, 1984.

• MC Quail, Dennis and Sven Windhal, Communication Models, Longman

London, 1984.

• MC Quail, Dennis, Mass Communication Theory: An Introduction (2nd Edition)

Sage Publications, London, 1988.

• Trilochan Pande, Understanding Languages as Communications: Inter Cultural

context, Himalaya Publishing House, 1999.

• Bever S.H., et.al., The Sociology of Mass Media Communications, The Social

Review, The University of Keele, Staffordshire, 1969.

• David K. Berlo, The Process of Communication, Holt Rhinehart and Winston,

1960.

• Denis McQuail, Mass Communication Theory, Third Edition, Sage Publication,

1994.

• Denis McQuail and Svin Windhal, Communication Models, Longman, London,

1981.

• James Watson, Dictionary of Communication and Media Studies.

• John Comer and et. al, Communication Studies, Longman, London, 1981.

• Keval J.Kumar, Mass Communication in India, Vikas Publication’s New Delhi,

1994.

• Reed H.Blasce and Edwin Haroldsen, A Taxonomy of concepts of

Communication, Hasting House, 1975.

• Warren K. Agee, Introduction to Mass Communication, New York, 1960.

40

INDIAN SOCIAL PROBLEMS

THIRD SEMESTER


35131 Indian Social Problems

Objectives


• To sensitize the students the perspectives of emerging social issues and problems

of contemporary society.

• Making them to understand perspectives of social problems and identifying

causatives, so that they will be in a position to arrive the factual remedies for

reducing/ eliminating / preventing from their perspectives.


• Learners will able to understand the concept how society is undergoing rapid and

massive changes.

• Learners will understand many of these changes are such that they tend to call into

question the ages-old social norms and practices thus giving rise to some critical

social issues and problems.

• The course is designed to identify and analyze some of emerging issues and

problems from sociological perspectives.

Contents:

UNIT I

Social Problems: Definition, Nature and Characteristics

UNIT II

Functionalism, Conflict theory, and Interactionism.

41

UNIT III

Social Disorganization: Meaning, Characteristics and Types.

UNIT IV

Approaches: Pathology, Disorganization and Deviance

UNIT V

Problem of Social Order: Social Change and Social Control

UNIT VI

Juvenile Delinquency, Alcoholism and Drug Addiction, Prostitution, unemployment,

Crime and cyber crime.

UNIT VII

Personal Disabilities: Concept, types, legislation, Physical and Mental differently able,

Health Problems - AIDS

UNIT VIII

Family Problems: marriage, divorce, Child Related - Child Abuse and Neglect.

UNIT IX

Woman Related Problems - Abuse, Violence, and Problems of Working Women.

UNIT X

Elderly Related Problems - Abuse and Avoidance, Intergenerational Conflict, Marital

Conflict, Family Dissolution and legislation.

UNIT XI

Community Problems: Social Disabilities, Social Exclusion, Group Conflicts - Inter-caste

Conflicts

42

UNIT XII

National Problems: Illiteracy, Poverty, Unemployment, Ethnic/Group Conflicts,

Regionalism, and Extremism.

UNIT XIII

Global Problems: Environment Problems, Displacement and Resettlement.

UNIT XIV

Human Agency: State, Parties, Movements, Activists, Moral entrepreneurs, Academics &

social researchers, Media, Helping Professionals.

References:

• Ahuja, R - Social Problems in India. New Delhi: Rawat Publications, 1997.

• Ahuja, R - Youth and Crime. New Delhi: Rawat Publications, 1996.

• Batria, P. - Sex and Crime in India. New Delhi: Uppal Publishing House, 1992.

• B

eteille, A. - Inequality and Social Change. Delhi: Oxford University Press, 1972.

• Cullingworth, J B 1973. Problems of Urban Society, George Allen & Unwin Ltd,

London.

• Davis, J F - Social Problems: Enduring Major Issues and Changes. Free Press,

1970, New York.

Downes, D & Rock, P. - Understanding Deviance. Oxford.Clarendon Press, 1982.

• Ghosh, S K. - The World of Prostitutes. New Delhi: APH Publishing Corporation,

1996.

• Horton B. Paul, Gerald R. Leslie and Richard F. Larson - The Sociology of

Social Problems. New Jersey: Prentice Hall, 1991.

43

• Jamrozik and Luisa Nocella - The Sociology of Social Problems: Theoretical

Perspectives and Methods and Interventions. Cambridge. Cambridge University

Press, 1998.

• Jones B. J et.al., - Social Problems: Issues, Opinions and Solutions. New York:

McGraw Hill, Inc., 1988.

• Kelly, D H - Deviant Behaviour. New York: St. Martin‟s Press, 1989.

• Kornblum, William / Joseph Julian - Social Problems. New Jersey: Prentice

Hall, 1992.

• Merton, R K & Nisbet, R A - Contemporary Social Problems. Harcourt Brace.

New York: Johnavich INC, 1976.

• Miles, I & Irvine, J - The Poverty of Progress: Changing Ways of Life in

Industrial

• Pothen, S - Divorce: Its Causes and Consequences in Hindu Society. New Delhi:

Sakthi Books, 1986.

• Ramamurthy, V. AIDS and the Human Survival. Delhi:.Authors Press, 2000.

• Sharma, S. - AIDS and Sexual Behaviour. New Delhi: APH Publishing

Corporation, 1996

• Young, R F. and Olson, E.A. (Eds), - Health, Illness and Disability in Later Life:

Practice Issues and Interventions. London: Sage Publications, 1991.

44

SOCIOLOGY OF AGEING

THIRD SEMESTER


35132 Sociology of Ageing

Objectives


• To understand the concept of Aged and problems of Aging in the socio-economic

context.

• To study the traditional ways of accommodating the aged population in the main

streams of family and community life and to see how far they could cope up

within in the modern society with regard to social support and formal and informal

networks.

• And to know about Successful Aging with respect to physical, economic, social

and cultural capital for successful Aging.


• The worldwide trends indicate that the proportion of aged people in the

populations of different societies is ever increasing.

• This has far reaching socio-economic and even political implications for the

societies across the world. It has therefore become essential to study the problems

created by increasing aging population, as well as, the problems of aged people in

the society.

45

Contents:

UNIT I

Aged in Society: Concept, Status, Characteristics and Problems - Demographic and

Socio-economic context, Needs.

UNIT II

Rights and Obligations of Aged - Cultural and sub cultural variations in values regarding

the Aged

UNIT III

Social Support: Emotional, Instrumental, Financial, Service, Informational,

companionship.

UNIT IV

Positive and Negative Support. Family Structure, Ethnicity, Financial Resources as

Factors - Economics of Aging: -Income, Poverty, Housing.

UNIT V

Informal Networks: Family and Kinship Ties, Friendship and Neighborhood Ties.

UNIT VI

Changing Family and Household Pattern - Composition, Role Relationships, and Living

Arrangements and Emerging Needs.

UNIT VII

Intergenerational relationships - Filial Responsibility, Relationships between

Grandparents and Grandchildren. Types of Reciprocity.

UNIT VIII

46

Elderly as Support Providers: Nature and Extent of Support Extended by Elderly to

the Family, Friends, Neighbours, Community and Society

UNIT IX

Formal Networks: Links with the Community - Engagement in Community Life, Levels

of Connections in Community Life, Establishment of Relationships

UNIT X

Factors Affecting the Links. Declining Role of Communities.

UNIT XI

Institutional Relationships - Ties with Institutions in Everyday Life and in Emergencies,

Levels of Confidence in Institutions- Old age homes

UNIT XII

Social Exclusion and Neglect of the Aged.

UNIT XIII

Care to the Elderly: Personal Care, Healthcare, Household Care

UNIT XIV

Legislation and Schemes available for aged

References:

• Anderson, M. (Ed) - Sociology of the Family, Harmondsworth: Penguin Books

Ltd., 1971.

• Armoss, P. & Harell, S. (Eds)- Other Ways of Growing Old, Stanford CA:

Stanford University Press, 1981.

• Barnes, J.A., Social Networks, Philippines: Addison-Wesley, 1972.

47

• Bengston, V.L. & Achenbaum, W.A. (Eds) - Changing Contract across

Generations, Hawthorne, NY: Aldine de Gruyter, 1993.

• Biswas, S.K.(Ed)-Aging in Contemporary India, Calcutta: India Anthropological

Society, 1987.

• Bott, E. - Family and Social Network, London: Tavistock, 1957.

• Cabrium, J.F. - Time, Roles and Self in Old Age, New York: Human Sciences

Press, 1976.

• Chadha, N.K. - Aging and the Aged, Delhi: Friends Publications (India), 1997.

• Chaney, E. - Empowering Older Women: Cross-cultural Views, Women‟s

Initiative of the American Association of Retired Persons, Washington D.C., 1990.

• Cowgill, D.O., Aging around the World, Belmont, CA: Wadsworth, 1986.

• Crandall, R.C. - Gerontology: A Behavioural Science Approach, Massachusetts:

Addison-Wesley, 1980.

• Cumming, E. & Henry, W. - Growing Old: The Process of Disengagement, New

York: Basic Books, 1961.

• Dandekar, K. - The Elderly in India, New Delhi: Sage Publications, 1996.

• Desai, (Ed), Aging in India, New Delhi: Ashish Publishing House, 1989.

• Gibson, G., Older Women around the World, International Federation on Aging,

Washington DC, 1985.

• Gottlieb, B.H. (Ed) - Social Network and Social Support, Beverly Hills: Sage,

1981.

• Kutzik, A.J. (Ed) - Ethnicity and Aging, New York: Springer, 1979.

48

• Milardo, R.M. (Ed), Families and Social Networks, Newbury Park: C.A. Sage,

1988.

• Pati, R.N. & Jena, B. (Eds) - Aged in India: Socio-demographic Dimensions,

New Delhi: Ashish Publishing House, 1989.

• Quinn, W.H. & Hughston, G.A. (Eds) - Independent Aging: Family and Social

Systems Perspectives, Rockville, MD: Aspen, 1984.

• Riley, M.W. & Foner, A. - Aging and Society: An Inventory of Research

Findings, New York: Russell Sage Foundation, 1968.

• Shanas, E. - Old People in the Three Industrial Societies, New York: Atherton

Press, 1968.

• Sharma,M.L.& Dak, .M. (Eds) - Aging in India, New Delhi: Ajanta Publications

(India), 1987.

49

GENDER AND SOCIETY

THIRD SEMESTER


35133 Gender and Society

Objectives


• The objective is to trace the evolution of gender as a category of social analysis in

the late twentieth century. Major debates that have emerged are also outlined. The

format provides for a comparative perspective in so far as the first part

encompasses the developed and the developing countries while the second part

revolves around issues concerning Indian women.

• It is hoped that exposure to the course will lead to a better understanding of the

social phenomena with regard to gender.


• The recent sociological research has given special importance to the various new

thrust areas of interest; here the social construction of gender is not an exception.

• This course plan focuses on the emergence of women’s movements and eventually

women’s studies in the context of feminist thought and critiques of sociological

theories and methodologies.

Contents:

UNIT I

Social Construction of Gender: Gender and Biology, Equality and Equity.

50

UNIT II

Nature and Gender, Gender Identity and Self Image, Gender Roles, Segregation and

Ranking. Sociological Analysis of Gender

UNIT III

Private-Public Dichotomy and Sexual Division of Labor. Ideology and Gender, Sex

Preference, Declining Sex Ratio and Socio-cultural Implications

UNIT IV

Concepts of theories : Feminism – meaning, radical feminism, Liberal Feminism,

Multicultural feminism, Marxist Feminism, Socialist Feminism,

UNIT V

Emerging concept of Feminism - Feminist Movements.

UNIT VI

Status of Women – in India - Women entrepreneur

UNIT VII

Women in unorganized sector and their problems

UNIT VIII

Women in Family and Marriage: Gender Role Divisions, Invisibility of Women’s Role

UNIT IX

Problems of Working Women and Dual Role Burden. Role Conflict and Coping

Mechanisms.

UNIT X

Network and Support System - Gender and Health: Reproductive – Health Problems

51

UNIT XI

Gender and Parenting Roles- Female headed Household- Single Parenthood.

UNIT XII

Problems of Women: Production vs. Reproduction, Household Work, Invisible Work,

Domestic Violence.

UNIT XIII

Women’s Work and Technology. Impact of Development Policies, Liberalization and

Globalization on Women.

UNIT XIV

Contribution of Women in India .

References:

Baker et al - Women Today. California: Cole Publishing,1980.

Charlotte, G.O. - Women and Men in Society. Litton Education Publishing Inc.,

1980.

• Desai,N and Patel, V. - Indian Women. Bombay: Popular Prakasan Publishing,

1985.

• Ghadially, R. (ed) - Women in Indian Society, New Delhi: Sage, 1988.

• Ghosh, S.K. - Women in a Changing Society. New Delhi: Ashish Publishing,

1984.

• Graham - Women, Health and the Family. New York: Harvester Wheat sheaf,

1984.

• Gupta et al - Women’s Health in India: Risk and Vulnerability . New Delhi:

Oxford Press, 1995.

52

• Myers, K.A. et al (eds). - Feminist Foundations: Towards Transforming

Sociology. New Delhi: Sage, 1998.

• Oakley, A. - Sex, Gender and Society, New York: Harper and Row, 1972.

• Ramu, G.N. - Women, Work and Marriage in Urban India. New Delhi: Sage

Publications, 1989.

53

RURAL AND URBAN SOCIOLOGY

THIRD SEMESTER


35134 Rural and Urban Sociology

Objectives


• The objective is to trace the concepts of Rural Urban Sociology

• It is hoped that exposure to the course will lead to a better understanding of the

various factors affecting rural urban society.


• The recent sociological research has given special importance to the various new

thrust areas of interest of rural and urban areas.

• This course plan focuses on the emergence of understanding of rural and urban

problems.

Contents:

UNIT I

Rural Sociology-Nature and Scope of Rural Sociology; History of Rural Sociology

UNIT II

Importance of the study of Rural Sociology. Patterns of village settlements – Rural Urban

contrast-Rurbanism- Peasant Studies-Agrarian Class Structure.

UNIT III

Agrarian Social Structure and Change -Village Social Structure; Land ownership pattern

in Rural Society

54

UNIT IV

Jajmani System; Tenancy Systems; Caste and social structure; Changing trends in inter

caste relations,

UNIT V

Factors accounting for the changes, dominant caste, ancestral worship. Factors of

Change; Agrarian Legislation; Land Reform programmes; Green Revolution; Rural

Development Programmes

UNIT VI

Rural Social Problems-Agrarian Unrest and Peasant Movements- Untouchability; Rural

Violence; Landlessness; Rural Indebtedness

UNIT VII

Poverty; Unemployment- Seasonal unemployment -Illiteracy-Superstitions- Drinking

water-housing- health and sanitation-Bonded and Migrant laborers.

UNIT VIII

Urban Sociology-Nature and Scope of Urban Sociology

UNIT IX

Importance of the Study of Urban Sociology; Urbanism as a way of life; Factors of

Urbanization.

UNIT X

Urban Planning- Definition of urban locality, urban place- Urban agglomeration and

other related terms.

UNIT XI

Urban Renewal; Planning for New Settlements- Measuring Urbanization

55

UNIT XII

Trends of world Urbanization- Growth of urban population in India

UNIT XIII

Location of cities-nature, culture, function, migration.

UNIT XIV

India- Urban Social Problems-Crime; Juvenile Delinquency; Slums; Housing Problems;

Environmental Problems; Poverty; Unemployment

References:

• Desai AR . Rural Sociology in India, Popular Prakashan, Bombay, 1969

• Chitambar. JB . Introductory Rural Sociology, New Age International (p) limited

publishers, 1993.

• Doshi SL and PC Jain, Rural Sociology, Rawat Publications, Jaipur, 1999.

• Bhatia, B.S & G.S.Batra, Rural Development Management, Deep & Deep

Publications, New Delhi, 2000.

• Nahar, UR and Ambika Chandani, (Ed) Sociology of Rural Development,

Rawat Publications, Jaipur. 1995.

• Singh, Katar, Rural Development – Principles, Policies and Management, Sage

Publications, New Delhi, 1999.

• Erence Guijt & Meena Kaul Shah, The Myth of community – Gender Issues in

Participatory Developmeent, Vistaar Publications, New Delhi, 1998.

• Lakshmanan, T.K and B.K. Narayanan, (Ed) Himalaya Publishing House,

Bombay, 1987.

56

• Vidyarathi, L.R. (Ed) Rural Development in South India, Concept Publishing

company, New Delhi, 1982.

• Rajendra Kumar Sharma, Rural Sociology Attartic publishers, 2007.

• Bhaskar majumder Rural Housing: policies & practices, Rawat Publicatons

Jaipur 2007.

• Verma and Powar, Rural empowerment, Deep & Deep publications, 2005

• Desai, A.R.., Agrarian Struggles in India after Independence, Oxford university

press, Oxford, 1986.

• Ramachandran.R, Urbanization and Urban systems in India, Oxford University

Press. (B.No:2832).

• Rajendra Kumar sharma, Urban Sociology, Atlantic publishers, & Distributors,

2007.

• Adinarayanappa, N.A. Urbanisatian slums & Environmental Health Anmol

publications PVT. Ltd,

• Ranvinder singh sandhu Urbanization in India sociological Contributions, sage

publications, New Delhi 2003.

• Jayapalan.N , Urban Sociology, Atlantic Publishers and Distributors

(B.No:2798)

• Subbarao.S, Human Ecology, Rajat Publications (B.No: 2520)

57

HUMAN RESOURCES MANAGEMENT

FOURTH SEMESTER


35141 HUMAN RESOURCE MANAGEMENT

Objectives


• The course provides new theoretical insights that can advance our understanding

of human resource development, including strengthening of the students for

understanding of the impact the employment relationship has on contemporary

society.

• It will also study the important perspectives, approaches, career plannings /

Human Resource planning, Affirmative action plan, job requirements and there by

quality of work and quality of life.

• This includes a study of how people behave in the employment setting - as

managers, as workers, and as representatives. Through this combination students

will be able to link issues such as inequality, class relations to employment, and

will be more aware of the ways that conflict in the workplace is linked to conflict

in the wider society.


• The combination provides enhanced opportunities for students considering career

options in the public, private and voluntary sectors, giving students a broad

understanding of work, employment, management and society more generally

• The knowledge of entrepreneur Development Programmes will also help students

to set up their own ventures.

58

Contents:

UNIT I

Management: Concept, elements, principles and functions of management;

UNIT II

Management thoughts: Henry Fayol, F.W.Taylor, and Peter Drucker.

UNIT III

Human resource management: Definition, scope, evolution, and functions.

UNIT IV

Human resource policy: Formulation and implementation; duties, responsibilities, and

qualities of human resource manager and challenges for the 21st century.

UNIT V

Human Resource functions: Human resource planning, recruitment, selection, induction

and placement, promotion, transfer

UNIT VI

Job analysis, training, performance appraisal; discipline and disciplinary procedure,

personnel records and personnel research; HR audit.

UNIT VII

Wage and salary administration: job evaluation: definition, objectives; methods,

advantages and limitation;

UNIT VIII

Theories of wages: concepts of wages, wage differentials – financial and non-financial

incentives.

59

UNIT IX

Human Resource Planning: The demand for Human Resources - The Supply of Human

Resources -

UNIT X

Estimates of Internal supply and Estimates of External supply Implementation of

Human Resources Plans

UNIT XI

Recruitment of Human Resources - Constraints on Recruitment: Organizational

policies.

UNIT XII

Human Resource Plans - Affirmation Action Plans - Recruiter habits - Environmental

Conditions - Job Requirements

UNIT XIII

Industrial social work: meaning, scope, and relevance; application of social work

methods in the industrial sector;

UNIT XIV

Labor problems and industrial counseling in industries and working with the families of

industrial workers: meaning, scope, relevance, advantages and disadvantages.

References

• Agarwal, Rameshwar Dayal, ed. Dynamics of Personnel Management in India:

a Book of Reading. Tata McGraw-Hill, 1973.

• Davar, Rustom S. Personnel management and industrial relations in India.

International Book Distributors, 1976.

• Flippo, Edwin B. Principles of personnel management. McGraw-Hill, 1976.

60

ECOLOGY AND SOCIETY

FOURTH SEMESTER


35142 ECOLOGY AND SOCIETY

Objectives


• The course also aims at providing knowledge of the debate on environment and

development with a focus on environmental justice, policy and action.

• The study of inter connections between environment and society has gained in

enormous significance in recent times on account of the debilitating effects on the

environment and society

• To sensitize the students in order to re-orient sociology towards a more holistic

perspective that would conceptualize social process within the context of the

biosphere to determine the usefulness of ecological concepts and to acknowledge

the role of social psychological process of the self in micro level decision making

about the behaviour that affect the environment.


• The course plan aims to provide knowledge and scholarship of sociological basis

of environment and society interface. It seeks to impart social skills in

environmental concerns in order to understand the human suffering.

• As a prelude to it, the course focuses on „Environment in Sociological Theory‟,

both classical and contemporary. In view of this, it is understandable that the focus

of environmental studies has moved from sociology of environment to

environmental sociology.

61

Contents:

UNIT I

Ecology: Concept, Nature and Scope, Importance of studying Ecology.

UNIT II

Sociological Understanding of Ecology.

UNIT III

Karl Marx, Emile Durkheim concept on environment.

UNIT IV

Introduction of Environmental Sociology: Concept and Definitions, Trends

UNIT V

The rise, decline and resurgence of environmental Sociology, 21st century paradigm.

UNIT VI

Emerging theoretical parameters in environmental Sociology

UNIT VII

Contribution of Zavestoskis, Dunlap, and Catton, Ramachandra Guha, Patrick Giddens

and Radha Kamal Mukherjee.

UNIT VIII

Nature versus Nurture: Synthesis of Societal and environmental dialect

UNIT IX

Environmental Issues pertaining to population, water, sanitation, pollution, energy

62

UNIT X

Current situation on Housing and Urban Development and impact of rural poverty

UNIT XI

Social impact assessment of environmental issues,- development, displacement,

relocation and environmental problems.

UNIT XII

Introduction to Global Environmentalism and Its Importance

UNIT XIII

Study about the challenges to post materialism and the Environment today

UNIT XIV

Technology and society Environmental justice, policy and action.

References:

• Arnold, David and Ramchandra Guha - Nature, Culture, Imperialism. Delhi:

Oxford University Press, South Commission, 1989.

• Gadgil, Madhav and Ramchandra Guha - Ecology and Equity: The Use and

Abuse of Nature in Contemporary India, New Delhi: OUP. 1996.

• Giddens, Antony - Global Problems and Ecological Crisis in Introduction to

Sociology. nd

• Michael Redclift - Development and the Environmental Crisis. New York:

Meheun Co. Ltd., 1984.

• Munshi, Indra - “Environment‟ in Sociological Theory”. New Delh i:

Sociological Bulletin, Vol.49, No.2, 2000.

• Schnaiberg Allan - The Environment, New York: Oxford University Press. 1980.

63

SOCIAL WELFARE ADMINISTRATION

FOURTH SEMESTER


35143 SOCIAL WELFARE ADMINISTRATION

Objectives:

• To acquire knowledge of the basic process of registering, managing, and

administrating welfare agencies in the context of social work profession.

• To acquire skills to participate in management, administrative process, and

programme delivery.

• To develop the ability to see the relationship between policy and programmes and

to analyze the process as applied in specific settings and specific programmes.

• To gain knowledge on policy analysis and policy formulations and to study social

policies, plans, legislations and programmes so as to be able to interpret, enforce,

and challenge them.

• To understand critically the concept and content/indicators of social development

Outcome of the course

• This course aims at helping the learner to understand management process and

developing administrative skills and also to understand the learners to how policy

is a link between constitutional principles and legislative actions and to understand

the concept of social development.

Contents:

UNIT I

Social Welfare Administration: meaning and definition of social welfare administration

and social work administration; purpose, historical development; principles, functions,

and areas (policy making, planning, personnel, supervision, office administration,

64

budgeting, finance, fund raising, accounting, auditing, purchase and stock keeping, record

maintenance, co-ordination,

UNIT II

Public relation, monitoring and evaluation, and research, annual report); social welfare

administration at national, state, and local levels; CSWB (Central Social Welfare Board),

state social welfare board, directorate of social welfare, and handicapped welfare.

UNIT III

Social Welfare Programme and Agencies: evaluation of social welfare in India; voluntary

social work, social agencies: meaning, definition, type and models of NGO‟s; roles of

NGO‟s in national development; governmental schemes on social welfare;

UNIT IV

Agency registration: methods, advantages, preparation of byelaws, memorandum of

association, rules, regulation, and registration procedures.

UNIT V

Registration of societies and trusts: governing board, committees. Executives; qualities,

functions, and role.

UNIT VI

Social Policy: definition, need, evolution and constitutional base; sources and instrument

of social policy,

UNIT VII

Social policies regarding Other Backward Castes (OBCs), Scheduled Castes (SCs),

Scheduled Tribes (STs), and de-notified communities;

65

UNIT VIII

Social policies and programmes for women, children, aged, and handicapped;

development and implementation of programmes for weaker sections.

UNIT IX

Social Legislation: Definition, its roles as an instrument of social change,

UNIT X

Constitutional basis for social legislation: Fundamental Rights and Directive Principles of

state Policy

UNIT XI

Laws Related to Marriage: Hindu, Muslim, Christian, and personal laws relating to

marriage

UNIT XII

Laws relating to divorce, minority, and guardianship; adoption, succession, and

inheritance

UNIT XIII

Legislation relating to social problems such as prostitution, juvenile delinquency, women

harassment

UNIT XIV

Legislation relating to child labour, untouchability, physical, and mental disabilities.

References:

• Bose, A. B. "Social Welfare Planning in India." UN pub, Bangkok (1970).

• Chaudhary, D. "Paul Voluntary Social Welfare in India, Sterling Publication (P)

Ltd." New Delhi (1971).

66

• Chaudhary, D. Paul. "Social Welfare Administration." Atma Ram & Sons, New

Delhi (1979).

• Dubey, Sumati Narain, and Ratna Murdia. "Administration of policy and

programmes for backward classes in India." (1976).

• Dubey, Sumati Narain. Administration of social welfare programmes in India.

No. 27. Bombay: Somaiya Publications, 1973.

• Gangrade, Kesharichand Dasharathasa. Social legislation in India. Concept

Publishing Company, 1978.

• Jacob, K. K. Social policy in India. Himanshu Publications, 1989.

• Jagadeesan, P. Marriage and Social Legislations in Tamil Nadu. Elatchiappenn

Publications, 1990.

• Shanmugavelayutham, K. "Social Legislation and Social Change." (1998).

67

MEDICAL SOCIOLOGY

FOURTH SEMESTER


35144 MEDICAL SOCIOLOGY

Objectives


• To introduce the student the concepts of health and to impress upon him that

health is primarily a social science subject than of medical science.

• To make student understand that health is one of the basic rights of every citizen

in the country.

• To understand the problems of health in India with respect to social epidemiology

social cultural context of health behaviour and health care delivery system in the

day to day lives of people in India and also to understand the relationship between

political economy and health at the national and international levels with respect to

WHO Report.


• In spite of 59 years of independence and several developmental efforts our health

status as measured by quality of life is not up to global levels as facts produced by

World Health Organization.

• People still suffer from preventable communicable, infectious diseases and even

nutritional disorders are quite high. With globalization and liberalization the

problems of health are likely to aggravate and should come into the picture to

bring out into the open the social science dimension of health for rectifying the

present anomalies in the health sector.

68

Contents:

UNIT I

Introduction to Medical Sociology-Definition, Objectives, Principles, Scope and its

relevance to patient care.

UNIT II

Difference between sociology of medicine and sociology in medicine

UNIT III

Historical development of medical sociology. Sociological Perspectives on Health and

Illness-The Sick role-Illness

UNIT IV

Concept of Health and Illness: Aspects of Health - Physical, Social, Emotional, and

Spiritual.

UNIT V

Formation of Health Behavior: Beliefs, Values, Attitudes and Practices. Social Groups

and Access to Healthcare.

UNIT VI

Social Medicine, Community Health, Health Care and Agencies.

UNIT VII

Theoretical perspectives of Health-Functional Approach, Conflict Approach,

Integrationist Approach, Labeling Approach

69

UNIT VIII

Social Epidemiology-Meaning and Definition of social Epidemiology. Vital Statistics:

Uses and sources of vital and health statistics, Components of Epidemiology

UNIT IX

Natural history of diseases, Social Etiology - Social Epidemiology and Ecology of

Disease - Microbial Theory - Process of Transmission. Socio-Cultural factors bearing on

health in India.

UNIT X

Hospital and Health Profession in Society-Hospital as a Social Institution. Structure and

function of a hospital. Cost of hospitalization. Medical social service in a hospital.

UNIT XI

Professionalization of Health personnel. The process of seeking Medical Care and the

sick role – Illness as a Deviance – The functionalist approach- The Sick Role – Labelling

Theory – Illness as a Social Deviance - Health Stratification- caste and class based

inequalities.

UNIT XII

Management of Health care Services-Public and Private Health Care Services in India:

Evolution of public health systems in India- Health Planning in India (Committees,

Planning commission

UNIT XIII

Five year plans - National Health Policies)-Public health systems in India (Center, State,

District & Village level) - Current trends in private health care in India.

70

UNIT XIV

Contemporary Issues in Health Services Management: Medical technology - Health care

work force - Learning management - Intersectoral collaboration - Risk Management.

Reference

• Cockerham, William, C. Medical Sociology Englewood Cliffs: Prentice Hall,

1978.

Park J.E. and K.Park. Text book of Preventive and Social Medicine:

Banarasidas Bharat Publishers, Jabalur, 1983.

• Anne, Marie Barry and Chris Yuill, Understanding Health-A Sociological

Introduction: Sage Publication, New Delhi, 2002.

• DAK T.M. Sociology of Health in India: Kaveri Printers Private Ltd, New Delhi,

1991.

• Kevin White, An Introduction to the Sociology of Health and Illness: Sage

Publication,New Delhi, 2002.

• Coe, Rodney M. Sociology of Medicine, New York: McGraw Hill, 1970.

• Freeman, Howard E and Sol Levine. Handbook of Medical Sociology,

Englewood Cliffs: Prentice Hall, 1989.

• Albrecht, Gary L. 1994. Advances in Medical Sociology Mumbai: Jai Press.

• Coe. Rodney M. 1970. Sociology of Medicine. New York: McGraw Hill.

• Cockerham, William C. 1997. Medical Sociology. New Jersey: Prentice Hall.

• Conrad, Peter et al. 2000. Handbook of Medical Sociology, New Jersey: Prentice

Hall.

71

• Dasgupta, R. 1993. Nutritional Planning in India. Hyderabad: NIN.

• Fox, Renee C. 1988. Essays in Medical Sociology: Journeys into the field. New

York: Transaction Publishers.

• Gunatillake, G. 1984. Intersectoral Linkages and Health Development: Case

Studies in India (Kerala State), Jamaica, Norway, Sri Lanka, and Thailand (WHO

offset series) Geneva: WHO.

• Nayar, K.R. 1998. Ecology and Health: A System Approach. New Delhi: APH

Publishing Corporation.

• Rao, Mohan. 1999. Disinvesting in Health: The World Bank’s Prescription for

Health. New Delhi: Sage.

• Schwatz, Howard. 1994. Dominant Issues in Medical Sociology. New York:

McGraw Hill.

• Scrambler, Graham and Paul Higgs. 1998. Modernity, Medicine and Health:

Medical Sociology Towards 2000. London: Routledge.

• Venkataratnam, R. 1979. Medical Sociology in an Indian Setting, Madras:

Macmillan.

e. 3. Duration of the Programme:

The programme for the degree of Master of Arts in Sociology shall consist of two

academic years divided in to four semesters. Each semester consists of four Theory

Papers. Theory course carry 4 credits each. Each semester consist of 16 credits.

72

e. 4. Faculty and Support Staff Requirements:

The programme for the degree of Master of Arts in Sociology requires the

following faculty and supporting staff:

Staff Category Required

Core Faculty 3

Faculty for Specialization 2

Clerical Assistant 1

# Faculty may belongs to at least Assistant Professor Level

e. 5. Instructional Delivery Mechanisms:

The instructional delivery mechanisms of the programme includes SLM – study

materials, face to face contact session for both theory and practical courses of the

programme, e-content of the study materials in the form of CD, MOOC courses and

virtual laboratory wherever applicable.

e. 6. Identification of Media:

The SLM – designed study materials will be provided in print media as well is in

the form of CD which carries electronic version of the study material in addition to

MOOC and virtual laboratory courses.

e. 7. Student Support Services:

The student support services will be facilitated by the head quarter i.e., Directorate

of Distance Education, Alagappa University, Karaikudi and its approved Learning

Centres located at various parts of Tamil Nadu. The pre-admission student support

services like counselling about the programme including curriculum design, mode of

73

delivery, fee structure and evaluation methods will be explained by the staff at head

quarter and Learning Centres. The post-admission student support services like issuance

of identity card, study materials, etc. will be routed through the Learning Centres. The

face to face contact sessions of the programme for both theory and practical courses will

be held at the head quarter and Learning Centres. The conduct of end semester

examinations, evaluation and issuance of certificates will be done by office of the

controller of examinations, Alagappa University, Karaikudi.

f. Procedure for Admission, curriculum transaction and evaluation:

f. 1. Procedure for Admission:

A candidate who has passed any U.G degree (10 + 2+ 3 system) of any other

University accepted by the Syndicate as equivalent there to shall be eligible to appear and

qualify for the Master of Arts in Sociology of this University after a course of study of

two academic years.

f. 2. Curriculum Transactions:

The classroom teaching would be through chalk and talk method, use of OHP,

Power Point presentations, web-based lessons, animated videos, etc. The face to face

contact sessions would be such that the student should participate actively in the

discussion. Student seminars would be conducted and scientific discussions would be

arranged to improve their communicative skill.

For practical courses, the procedure will be issued to the learners. In the concern

areas, instruction would be given for the practical activities followed by showing the

records and the documents. And finally the students have to do the activities individually.

74

The face to face contact sessions will be conducted in following durations;

Course Type Face to Face Contact Session

per Semester

(in Hours)

Theory Courses

(4 courses with 4 credits each)

64

Practical Courses

(1 course with 4 credits)

0

Total 64

f. 3. Evaluation:

The evaluation shall be conducted separately for theory and practical to assess the

knowledge acquired during the course of study. There shall be two systems of evaluation

viz., internal assessment and end semester examinations.

In the case of theory courses the internal evaluation shall be conducted as Continuous

Internal Assessment via. Student assignment preparation. The internal assessment shall

comprise of maximum 25 marks for each subject. The end semester examination shall be

of three hours duration to each course at the end of each semester. The end semester

examinations shall comprise of maximum of 75 marks for each course. The candidate

failing in any course(s) will be permitted to appear for each failed course(s) in the

subsequent examination.

In the case of Practical courses for Master of Arts in Sociology should be

conducted at every semester. The internal evaluation of practical courses will be done

through continuous assessment of skill in collecting the data and record note preparation.

The external evaluation consists of an end semester practical examinations which

75

comprise of 75 marks for each course. The candidate failing in any course(s) will be

permitted to appear for each failed course(s) in the subsequent examination.

f. 3.1. Question Paper Pattern:

Answer all questions (one question from each unit with internal choices Time: 3 Hours

Max. Marks: 75

Part A- 10 x 2 Marks = 20 Marks

Part B -5 x 5 Marks = 25 Marks

Part C- 3 x 10 Marks = 30 Marks

f. 3.2. Distribution of Marks in Continuous Internal Assessments:

The following procedure shall be followed for awarding internal marks for theory

courses

Component Marks

Assignments

(5 questions per course)

25

Total 25

f. 3.3. Passing Minimum:

The candidate shall be declared to have passed the examination if the candidate

secures a minimum of 50% (50 marks out of 100 marks) in the University end semester

examination. Then the total marks secured by the candidate will be taken and added with

his/her internal marks (Maximum marks 25).

For a pass in the Practical paper, a candidate has to secure a minimum of 50 %

76

(37.5 marks) marks in the University end semester practical examination (75 marks)

examination. Then the total marks secured by the candidate will be taken and added with

his/her internal marks (Maximum marks 25). However submission of all record notebook

is a must.

Candidate who does not obtain the required minimum marks for a pass in a course

shall be required to appear and pass the same at a subsequent appearance.

f. 3.4. Marks and Grades:

The following table gives the marks, grade points, letter, grades and classification

to indicate the performance of the candidate.

Range of Marks Grade Points Letter Grade Description

90-100 9.0-10.0 O Outstanding

80-89 8.0-8.9 D+ Excellent

75-79 7.5-7.9 D Distinction

70-74 7.0-7.4 A+ Very Good

60-69 6.0-6.9 A Good

50-59 5.0-5.9 B Average

00-49 0.0 U Re-appear

ABSENT 0.0 AAA ABSENT

Ci = Credits earned for the course i in any semester

Gi = Grade Point obtained for course i in any semester.

n refers to the semester in which such courses were credited

For a semester;

Grade Point Average [GPA] = ∑i CiGi/ ∑i Ci

77

Grade Point Average = Sum of the multiplication of grade points by the credits of the

courses

Sum of the credits of the courses in a semester

For the entire programme;

Cumulative Grade Point Average [CGPA] = ∑n ∑iCniGni/ ∑n ∑iCni

CGPA = Sum of the multiplication of grade points by the credits of the entire programme

Sum of the credits of the courses for the entire programme

CGPA Grad Classification of Final

Result

9.5-10.0

9.0 and above but below 9.5

O+

O

First Class- Exemplary*




D++

D+

D

First Class with Distinction*




A++

A+

A

First Class



B+

B

Second Class

0.0 and above but below 5.0 U Re-appear

*The candidates who have passed in the first appearance and within the prescribed

semester of the PG Programme are eligible.

78

f. 3.5. Maximum duration for the completion of the course:

The maximum duration for completion of Master of Arts in Sociology programme

shall not exceed ten semesters from their fourth semester.

f. 3.6. Commencement of this Regulation:

These regulations shall take effect from the academic year 2018-2019 (June

session) i.e., for students who are to be admitted to the first year of the course during the

academic year 2018-2019 (June session) and thereafter.

f. 4. Fee Structure:

The programme has the following Fee Structure:

Sl. No. Fees Detail Amount in Rs.

First

Year

Second

Year

1 Admission Processing Fees 300.00 -

2 Tuition Fees 4400.00 4400.00

4 ICT Fees 150.00 150.00

TOTAL 4850.00 4550.00

The above mentioned fee structure is exclusive of Exam fees.

g. Requirement of the laboratory support and Library Resources:

The students who have enrolled themselves in M. A., Sociology Programme shall

attend the face to face contact session for Practical Courses at their respective Learning

Centres.

79

Directorate of Distance Education, Alagappa University, Karaikudi housing an

excellent Library facility with adequate number of copies of books in relevant titles for

M. A., Sociology programme. The Central Library of Alagappa University also having

good source of reference books. The books available at both the libraries are only for

reference purpose and not for lending services.

h. Cost estimate of the programme and the provisions:

The cost estimate of the programme and provisions for the fund to meet out the

expenditure to be incurred in connection with M. A., Sociology Programme as follows:

Sl.

No.

Expenditure Heads Approx.

Amount in Rs.

1 Programme

Development (Single

Time investment)

10,00,000

2 Programme Delivery

(Per Year)

20, 00,000.00

3 Programme

Maintenance (Per Year)

3,00,000.00

i. Quality assurance mechanism and expected programme outcomes:

i. 1. University’s Moto:

‘Excellence in Action’

80

i. 2. University’s Vision Statement:

Achieving Excellence in all spheres of Education, with particular emphasis on

“PEARL”- Pedagogy, Extension, Administration, Research and Learning.

i. 2. University’s Objectives:

1. Providing for Instructions and Training in such Branches of Learning as the University

may determine.

2. Fostering Research for the Advancement and Dissemination of Knowledge

i. 3. University’s Quality Policy:

Attaining Benchmark Quality in every domain of ‘PEARL’ to assure Stakeholder

Delight through Professionalism exhibited in terms of strong purpose, sincere efforts,

steadfast direction and skillful execution.

i. 4. University’s Quality Quote:

Quality Unleashes Opportunities towards Excellence (QUOTE)

i.5. Programme’s Review Mechanism:

The quality of the programme depends on scientific construction of the

curriculum, strong-enough syllabi, sincere efforts leading to skilful execution of the

course of the study. The ultimate achievement of M. A., Sociology programme of study

may reflect the gaining of knowledge and skill in the subject. And all these gaining of

knowledge may help the students to get new job opportunities, upgrading in their position

not only in employment but also in the society, make students feel thirsty to achieve in

research in the fields associated with the discipline- Sociology and studying about the

social structure may achieving in competitive examinations on the subject.

The benchmark qualities of the programme may be reviewed based on the

performance of students in their end semester examinations. Apart from the end semester

81

examination-based review feedback from the alumni, students, parents and employers

will be received and analyzed for the further improvement of the quality of the M. A.,

Sociology Programme.

----------------------------------

82

njhiyepiyf; fy;tp ,af;ffk; KJfiyj; jkpo;

1

njhiyepiyf; fy;tp ,af;ffk; mofg;gh gy;fiyf; fofk;

(Njrpaj; ju eph;zaf; FOtpd; %d;whk; Rw;Wj; ju kjpg;gPl;by; A+ (CGPA:3.64) jFjp ngw;wJ) mofg;ghGuk;

fhiuf;Fb – 630 003

KJfiyj; jkpo;

ghlj;jpl;l tbtikg;G 2018 – 2019 Mk; fy;tpahz;L Kjy; eilKiwf;FhpaJ


2

mofg;gh gy;fiyf;fofk; njhiyepiyf; fy;tp ,af;ffk;

KJfiyj; jkpo;. a) Nehf;fk; :

jkpopy;; cs;s ,yf;fpa ,yf;fz E}y;fisg; gbj;J mwpit tsh;j;jy;

nkhopg; gapw;rp> gilg;ghw;wy;> jpwdha;T> Muha;r;rp Mfpatw;iw tsh;j;jy;.

mw ,yf;fpaq;fisg; gw;wpAk; rka ,yf;fpaq;fisg; gw;wpAk;

vLj;Jiuj;J mjd; top elf;f Kaw;rp nra;jy;

gz;ghLk; fiyAk; ehl;L tuyhw;wpy; Kf;fpa ,lj;ijg; ngWtd. ,e;jpa

ehfhpfj;jpy; jkpohpd; gz;ghl;ilg; gw;wpAk;, fiyfisg; gw;wpAk;

khzth;fSf;F mwpKfk;nra;J gz;ghl;L khw;wq;fis czur;nra;jy;.;

,yf;fpak;> fy;ntl;L> gl;laq;fs;> may;ehl;lhh; fbjq;fs; Mfpatw;wpd;

%yk; gz;ilj;jkpohpd; tuyhW gz;ghl;il khzth;rKjhaj;jpw;F

tpsf;Fjy;.

khdplhpd; gz;ghl;L epiy, gz;ghl;L epiyapy; cah;e;J epd;Nwhh; , khdplh;

tho;e;j epiyapidAk; , thoNtz;ba epiyapidAk; mwpjy;.

b) ,yf;F:

mofg;gh gy;fiyf; fofj; njhiyJ}uf; fy;tpapd; %yk;> midtUk; gad;ngWk;

tz;zk;;> KJfiyj; jkpioj; njhiyJ}uf; fy;tp topahf toq;Fk; jpl;lk;

jpl;lkplg;gl;Ls;sJ. ehl;bd; tsh;r;rpf;fhd r%f tsq;fis Nkk;gLj;Jk; vz;zj;Jld;

nghUshjhu epiyapy; gpd;jq;fpath;fs;> Ntiytha;g;igj; Njbf; nfhz;L Nkw;gbg;G

gbg;gjw;fhfr; rpwg;ghd Kiwapy; jukhd fy;tpia toq;Fk; Nehf;fpy;> njhiyJ}uf;

fy;tp ,af;ffj;jpy; gs;sp Mrphpah;fs;> ,y;ywj;jpy; cs;s kfsph;> r%fj;jpy;

fy;tpawpTld; mwptpidAk; tsh;j;Jf; nfhs;s tpUk;GNthh;> murpay;thjpfs; MfpNahh;

,jd; %yk; gad;ngWtNj ,jd; ,yf;fhFk;.

c) njhiyJ}uf; fy;tp %yk; gapy;Nthh;


3

gs;spg; gbg;ig KOikahf epiwT nra;Njhh;> gs;spg; gbg;ig Kbj;J tptrhak;

nra;Nthh;> ifj;njhopy; nra;Nthh;;> njhopyhsh;fs;;;> murpay;thjpfs;> gjtp cah;T

mila tpUk;GNthh; MfpNahh; ,f;fy;tp Kiw %yk; fw;f ,aYk;

d) njhiyJ}uf; fy;tp %yk; jpwd;fs; kw;Wk; jpwikfisg; ngWjy;:

jkpopy;; cs;s ,yf;fpa ,yf;fz E}y;fisg; gbj;J mwpit tsh;j;jy;. nkhopg;

gapw;rp> gilg;ghw;wy;> jpwdha;T> Muha;r;rp Mfpatw;iw tsh;j;Jf; nfhs;Sk; nghUl;L;;>

fUj;jhsh;fs; kw;Wk; ey;y gapw;rpahsh;fs; > rpwe;j nrhw;nghopthsh;fs;> ftpQh;fs;

MfpNahh; %yk; jpwikfis khzth;fs; ngWfpwhh;fs;.

e) ghlj;jpl;l tbtikg;G :

gUtk; jhs; vz;

jhs; FwpaPl;L vz;

ghlq;fs; mf kjpg;

ngz;fs;

Njh;T kjpg;

ngz;fs;

nkhj;j kjpg;ngz;

kjpg; gPLfs;

Kjw;gUtk; 1

1 31911 ,f;fhy ,yf;fpak; 25 75 100 4 2 31912 mw ,yf;fpaq;fSk; rka

,yf;fpaq;fSk; 25 75 100 4

3 31913 ,yf;fzk; - njhy;fhg;gpak; vOj;jjpfhuk; ,sk;G+uzk;.

25 75 100 4

4 31914 ,yf;fpaj; jpwdha;tpay; 25 75 100 4 100 300 400 16 ,uz;lhk;gUtk; 2

5 31921 ,yf;fzk; - njhy;fhg;gpak; nrhy;yjpfhuk;

25 75 100 4

6 31922 jkpoh;; gz;ghLk; fiyAk; 25 75 100 4 7 31923 jpwdha;Tf; Nfhl;ghL 25 75 100 4 8 31924 fy;ntl;bay; 25 75 100 4

100 300 400 16 %d;whk; gUtk; 3 9 31931 rq;f ,yf;fpaq;fs; 25 75 100 4

10 31932 fhg;gpaq;fs; 25 75 100 4 11 31933 rpw;wyf;fpaq;fs; 25 75 100 4

12 31934 ,yf;fzk; - 3 njhy;fhg;gpak; nghUshjpfhuk;

25 75 100 4

100 300 400 16 ehd;fhk; gUtk; 4

13 31941 xg;gpyf;fpak; 25 75 100 4 14 31942 gz;ghl;L khdpltpay; 25 75 100 4 15 31943 jkpof tuyhWk; gz;ghLk; 25 75 100 4 16 31944 Muha;r;rp mwpKfk; 25 75 100 4

100 300 400 16 nkhj;jk; 1600 64

Course Code Legend: 3 1 9 Y Z


4

319- M.A. Tamil Programme Y -Semester No Z- Course number in the semester No. of Credits per Course (Theory)- 4

Toatal No. of Semester - 4 Total No. of Credits per Semester- 16 Total No. of Credits the Programme- 16 X 4 = 64

tpjp Kiwfs; f) 1) ghlr; Nrh;f;ifj; jFjp :

,yf;fpatpay; ,isah; (B.Lit.(Tamil)) gl;lk; ngw;wth;fSk;> fiyapay; ,isah;(B.A. Arts Group) mwptpay; ,isah; gl;lg;gbg;Gfspy; (B.Sc. Science

Group) gFjp – 1,y; jkpopy; Njh;r;rp ngw;wth;fs; Nruyhk;

2) Njh;r;rpf;fhd kjpg;ngz; :

xt;nthU jhspYk; Njh;r;rp ngWtjw;F vOj;Jj; Njh;tpy; 75 kjpg;ngz;fspy; Fiwe;jJ 37..5 kjpg;ngz;fisg; ngWjy; Ntz;Lk;. 25 mf kjpg;ngz;fspy; Fiwe;jJ 12..5 kjpg;ngz;fisg; ngWjy; Ntz;Lk;. fhy msT 3 kzp NeukhFk;.

3) mf kjpg;gPLk; tpdhj;jhs; mikg;Gk;

mf kjpg;gPL xt;nthU ghlj;jpl;lj;jpYk; mfkjpg;gPl;bw;F 25 kjpg;ngz;fs; fPo;fz;lthW toq;fg; gl Ntz;Lk;.

1. xg;gilg;Gf; fl;Liu(1) - 15 kjpg;ngz;fs 2. xg;gilg;Gf; fl;Liu(1) 10kjpg;ngz;fs

--------- nkhj;jk; 25 kjpg;ngz;fs; ---------

4) tpdhj;jhs; mikg;G : fhyk; 3 kzpfs; nkhj;j kjpg;ngz; : 75

gFjp–m (10X2=20) midj;J tpdhf;fSf;Fk; tpilaspj;jy; Ntz;Lk;.

gFjp - M (5X5=25)

xU gf;f mstpy; tpilaspj;jy; Ntz;Lk;

gFjp - , (3 X 10 =30)

ngUtpdhitf; fl;lhakhff; Nfl;ly; Ntz;Lk;. ,jpy; Ie;JngUtpdhf;fs; nfhLj;J vitNaDk; %d;W tpdhf;fSf;F kl;Lk; tpilaspj;jy; Ntz;Lk;.

Fwpg;G :


5

1. gFjp ‘m’ tpy; 1 Kjy; 10 tiuAk; 2. gFjp‘M’ tpy; 11 Kjy; 15 tiuAk; 3. gFjp ‘,’tpy; 16 Kjy; 20 tiuAk;

ghlE}y;fspypUe;J kl;Lk; tpdhf;fs; mikjy; Ntz;Lk;

Nehf;fk;:

,f;fhy ,yf;fpaq;fisg; gw;wp khzth;fSf;F vLj;Jiuj;jy;

jhs; 31911 - ,f;fhy ,yf;fpak;

kjpg;ngz;: 75+25 kjpg;gPL : 4

Kjyhkhz;L Kjw;gUtk;


6

Nehf;fk;: khzth;fSf;F mw ,yf;fpaq;fisg; gw;wpAk; rka ,yf;fpaq;fisg; gw;wpAk; vLj;Jiuj;J mjd; top elf;f Kaw;rp nra;jy;

$W 1 : ghujpahh; - Njrpa fPjq;fs;

$W 2 : ghujpjhrd; - FLk;g tpsf;F

$W 3 : eh. fhkuhrd; (GJf;ftpij)

mg;Jy; uFkhd; (GJf;ftpij)

$W 4 : mwpTkjp ( GJf;ftpij )

<NuhL jkpod;gd; (GJf;ftpij)

$W 5 : Kj;Jf;Fkhh; ( GJf;ftpij )

jhkiu ( GJf;ftpij)

$W 6 : mz;zhtpd; Ntiyf;fhup -ehlfk;

$W 7 : gpugQ;rdpd;- Kl;il- Gjpdk;

n[ae;jdpd;- epidf;fg;gLk;- Gjpdk;

$W 8 : Gjikgpj;jdpd; -rpWfij

n[afhe;jd;; - rpWfij

$W 9 : jp. [hdfpuhkd;

#hpafhe;jd;

$W 10

: ituKj;J

uh. ntq;fNl\;

$W 11 : fp.uh[ehuazd; (Gjpdk;)

$W 12 : mDuhjh ukzdpd; rpiw (Gjpdk;)

$W 13 : ciueil - jpU.tp.ftpd; KUfd; my;yJmoF

$W 14 : ciueil - tz;zjhrdpd; mfKk; GwKk;

jhs; 31912 -mw ,yf;fpaq;fSk; rka ,yf;fpaq;fSk;



7

Nehf;fk; :

$W 1 : jpUf;Fws; : mwj;Jg;ghy; - Kjy; %d;W mjpfhuq;fs;

$W 2 : jpUf;Fws; : nghUl;g;ghy; - Kjy; %d;W mjpfhuq;fs;

$W 3 : jpUf;Fws; : fhkj;Jg;ghy; - Kjy; %d;W mjpfhuq;fs;

$W 4 : ehybahh; : el;ghuha;jy; $lh el;G

$W 5 : gonkhop :fy;tp> fy;yhjhh; > mwpTilik

$W 6 : Xsitahh; : ey;top (Kjy; 20 ghly;fs;)

$W 7 : ,d;dh ehw;gJ : Kjy; gj;J ghly;fs

$W 8 : ,dpait ehw;gJ : Kjy; gj;J ghly;fs;>

$W 9 : fhihf;fhy; mk;ikahh; : jpU. ,ul;il kzpkhiy – mg;gh;:Nghw;wpj; jpUj;jhz;lfk; - rk;ge;jh; : jpUePw;Wg; gjpfk; NfhsW gjpfk; - kzpthrfh; :rptGuhzk;.

$W 10 : ek;kho;thh; : Kjy; gj;J – cah;T mw vd;Dk; Kjy; jpUtha; nkhopAk; tPLkpd;vd;Dk; ,uz;lhk; jpUnkhopAk; Mz;lhs; : jpUkzf; fdit ciuj;jy; tyk;Ghpf;Ff; fpilj;j NgW – FyNrfuho;thh; : CNdW – jpUNtq;flKilahd; tp\ak;.

$W 11 : gl;bdj;jhh; : jpUtpil kUJ}h; Kk;kzpf;Nfhit – jpU%yh; : mwQ;nra;thd; jpwk;> mwk; nra;ahd; jpwk;.

$W 12 : jhAkhdth; : ghpG+uhdhde;jk; ghly;fs; - ts;syhh; : nja;tkzp khiy

$W 13 : Fzq;Fb k];jhd; rhfpG : guhguf;fz;zp

$W 14 : Njrpa tpehafk; gps;is : Mrpa N[hjp

jhs; 31913 - ,yf;fzk; - njhy;fhg;gpak; vOj;jjpfhuk; ,sk;G+uzk;.



8

nkhop kw;Wk; vOj;jpd; ,yf;fz mikg;ig gw;wp khzth;fSf;F $Wjy; $W 1 : E}y; kuG– khj;jpiu , vz;

$W 2 : E}y; kuG– tbT , kaf;fk;

$W 3

: nkhop kuG– rhh;G vOj;Jf;fs; - MAjj;jpd; ,ay;G – msgil –

vOj;Jf;fs; njhlh;e;J nkhopahjy;

$W 4

: vOj;Jfspd; ,af;fk; - Nghyp – nkhop Kjy; vOj;Jf;fs; - nkhop

,Wjp vOj;Jf;fs

$W 5

: gpwg;gpay; - caph; vOj;Jf;fs; gpwf;FkhW – nka; vOj;Jf;fs;

gpwf;FkhW – rhh;G vOj;Jf;fs; gpwf;FkhW

$W 6 : Gzhpay; - nkhopfspd; KjYk; <Wk; - Gzh;jypd; ,ay;G – cUGg;

Gzh;r;rp – rhhpiag; Gzh;r;rp

$W 7 : vOj;Jr; rhhpia – caph; vOj;jpd; Gzh;r;rp ,ay;Gfs; - clk;gL

nka; -Gzh;r;rpapd; nghUs; NtWgLk; ,lk;

$W 8 : njhif kuG – caphPW – nka;aPW - cah;jpizg; ngah;fs; gw;wpa

Gzh;r;rp

$W 9 : cUgpay; - caphPWfs; - nka;aPWfs;

$W 10 : cUgpay; - Kw;Wfu – Fw;Wfu - <Wfs; - Gweil

$W 11 : caph; kaq;fpay; - mfu,Mfhu,,fu,<fu,cfu,Cfhu <Wfs;

$W 12 : caph; kaq;fpay; - vfu,Vfhu,Ifhu,Xfhu, Xsfhu <Wfs;

$W 13 : Gs;sp kaq;fpay;

$W 14 : Fw;wpaYfug; Gzhpapay;

jhs; 31914 - ,yf;fpaj; jpwdha;tpay;



9

Nehf;fk;:

fiyapd; tbtKk; ,yf;fpaj;jpd; jpwdha;itAk; , fw;gid gw;wp tpsf;fj;ijAk; khzhf;fh;fSf;F mwpTWj;Jjy; $W 1

: ,yf;fpaj; jpwdha;tpd; ,ay;Gk; Nehf;fKk; - jpwdha;thshpd; jFjpfs; -

jpwdha;tpd; gad;

$W 2

: ,yf;fpaf; fy;tp ,yf;fpaj; jpwdha;Tj; njhlh;Gfs; - njhy;fhg;gpaKk;

jkpo;j; jpwdha;tpd; mbg;gilfSk; - jkpo;j;jpwdha;tpd; tsh;r;rpAk; tuyhWk;

$W 3 : jpwdha;T tiffs; - tpjpKiwj; jpwdha;T – kjpg;gPl;L Kiw jpwdha;T

$W 4

: xg;gPl;LKiwj; jpwdha;T – ghuhl;LKiw jpwdha;T ,tw;iw

vLj;Jf;fhl;Lld;mwpjy;

$W 5

: fw;gid -vd;w nrhy;ypd; tpsf;fKk; Ml;rpAk; - fw;gid gw;wp mbrd;

tpy;ypak;ja;yh;. Nth;l;]; xh;j;. Nfhyphpl;[; . hpr;rh;l;]; MfpNahhpd; tpsf;fq;fs;

$W 6

: fw;gidapd; tiffs; - tho;f;ifAk; fw;gidAk; - ,y;yd gilj;jy; -

cyfpaw; fw;gid – my; ,aw;iff; fw;gid

$W 7 : ,yf;fpaKk; czh;r;rpAk; - ,yf;fpaj;jpw;Fg; nghUj;jkhd ey;y czh;r;rpfs;

$W 8 : ,yf;fpak; nebJ thOtjw;Fj; jf;f czh;r;rpfs; - njhy;fhg;gpa

nka;g;ghLfs;

$W 9 : fiyAk; tbtKk; - ,yf;fpaKk; fUj;Jk; xypeaj;jpd; rpwg;G

$W 10 : xypeaKk; czh;r;rpAk; - czh;r;rpf;Nfw;wgb tbt khw;wk;

$W 11 : jpwdha;T : Itifg; ghh;itfs; - mwtpay; - r%ftpay;

$W 12 : cstpay; - njhy;gbktpay; - khdpltpay;

$W 13 : ,yf;fpa ,af;fq;fs; - elg;gpay; - Gidtpay; - nrt;tpay; - Mfpatw;iwg;

gw;wp mwpjy; -

$W 14 : jkpo;Ma;tpy; gad;gLj;Jjy; - FwpaPl;by; - cUj;Njhw;wtpay;

ghh;it E}y;fs;


10

1. Jh.V.Qhd%h;j;jp - ,yf;fpaj; jpwdhtpay; Ie;jpizg; gjpg;gfk;. nrd;id 2. K.tujuhrdhh; - ,yf;fpaj;jpwd; ghhp epiyak; .nrd;id 3. R.ghyr;re;jpud; - ,yf;fpak; jpwdha;T mzpafk; nrd;id 4. m.r.Qhdrk;ge;jd; - ,yf;fpaf; fiy irtrpj;jhe;j E}w;gjpg;Gf; fofk;. nrd;id 5. f.ifyhrgjp - ,yf;fpaf; fiy irtrpj;jhe;j E}w;gjpg;Gf; fofk; nrd;id 6. e.rQ;rPtp - ,yf;fpa ,ay; m.$l;L;wT vOj;jhsh; rq;fk; nrd;id 7 jkpoz;zy; - Nehf;F kPdhl;rp gjpg;gfk; 8 f.gQ;rhq;fk; - jkpo; ,yf;fpaj;jpwdha;T tuyhW nry;td; gjpg;gfk;

GJit 9 FNshhpah (nkh.M) - ,yf;fpaf; nfhs;if ghhp epiyak; .nrd;id 10. F.gftjp(g.M) - jpwdha;T mZFKiwfs; cyfj;jkpohua;r;rp epWtdk;

nrd;id 11. e. gpr;ir Kj;J - jpwdha;Tk; ,yf;fpaf; nfhs;isfSk; Ntq;fluq;fd;

gjpg;gfk; nrd;id 12. jp.R. eluh[d; - jpwdha;Tf; fiy 13 ,.kiwkiy - ,yf;fpaKk; r%ftpaYk; 14 -\- - ,yf;fpaKk; khh;f;rpaKk; 15 -\- - GJf;ftpijAk; r%ftpaYk; kzpthrfh; E}yfk; 16 ghyh - rhh;yprk; md;dk; .rptfq;if 17 Nfh. Nfrtd; - ,yf;fpaKk; ,af;fg; Nghf;FfSk;


11

Nehf;fk; :

khzth;fSf;Fj; njhy;fhg;gpaj;jpd; nrhy;yjpfhuq;fisg; gw;wp vLj;Jf; $Wjy;

$W 1 : fpstpahf;fk; - tOtikjp

$W 2 : fpstpahf;fk; - njhlh;r;rp

$W 3 : Ntw;Wikapay; - Kiwitg;G

$W 4 : Ntw;Wik kaq;fpay;

$W 5 : tpspkuG

$W 6 : ngahpay; - nrhw;fspd; ghFghL –

cah;jpiz

$W 7 : m/wpiz ,tpuTg; ngah;

$W 8 : tpidapay; - ,yf;fzk; - ghFghL

$W 9 : tpidnar;rk; - njhlh;r;rp

$W 10 : ,ilapay; - ,yf;fzk; - rhhpia -

,ilepiy – Ntw;Wik cUGfs;

$W 11 : ,ilapay; - mirepiy - ,irepiwr;

nrhw;fs; -Fwpg;Gr; nrhw;fs; - ctk

cUGfs;

$W 12 : chpapay; - ,ir, Fwpg;G, gz;

$W 13 : vr;rtpay;

$W 14 : vr;rtpay; - njhlh;r;rp - njhif nrhw;fs;

jhs; 31921 -njhy;fhg;gpak; : nrhy;yjpfhuk; - Nrdhtiuak;

Kjyhkhz;L ,uz;lhk;gUtk;



12

Nehf;fk;:

gz;ghLk; fiyAk; ehl;L tuyhw;wpy; Kf;fpa ,lj;ijg; ngWtd. ,e;jpa ehfhpfj;jpy; jkpohpd; gz;ghl;ilg; gw;wpAk;, fiyfisg; gw;wpAk; khzth;fSf;F mwpKfk;nra;J gz;ghl;L khw;wq;fis czur;nra;jy;.

$W 1 : rq;f rka newp – irt newp – jkpoh; gz;ghl;by; itztk; - jkpoh; rkzk;

$W 2 : jkpoh; gz;ghl;by; ,Ryhk; - jkpoh; gz;ghlby; fpwpj;Jtk;

$W 3 : ,e;jpa ehfhpfj;jpy; jkpoh; gz;ghl;Lf; $Wfs; - Mq;fpy Ml;rpapd; nry;thf;F – kuhl;bag; gz;ghL – gz;ghl;L Clhl;lk;

$W 4 : moFf; fiyfs; gw;wpa nghJ mwpKfk; - ,irf;fiy tuyhW – njhy;fhg;gpak; ,irr; nra;jpfs;

$W 5 : rq;f fhyk; - ghzh; kuG - ,irf; fUtpfs; - ,ir E}y;fs; - rpyg;gjpfhuk; ,irAk; rkzKk; ,irAk;

$W 6 : gy;yth;fhy ,ir kd;dh;fSk; ,irAk; - Nrhoh;fhy ,ir – gpw;fhy ,ir – jkpopirr; rq;fk; - ,irj;jkpo; E}y;fs;

$W 7 : $j;Jf; fiy tuyhW – rq;ffhyk; ts;spf;$j;J Fuit ntwpahl;L Jzq;if Kjyhdit nghUeh; tpwypah; - rpyg;gjpfhukKk; $j;jk; ehl;ba Nkil gjpNdhuhly;

$W 8 : gy;yth;fhyk; Kjyhd ehlff; fiy – njhy;fhg;gpak; Kjyhdtw;wpy; ehlfr; nra;jpfs; - ehlfk; ehl;bak; vDk; nghUspy; - ehd;Ftif ehlfk; - 24 tif nka;g;ghLfs;

$W 9 : MLfsk; - MLfs mikTfs; - 10 E}w;whz;L ehlfk; - 19 Mk; E}w;whz;L ehlfk; - ehlf rigfs; - 20 Mk; E}w;whz;L ehlf tuyhW

$W 10 : rq;f fhyk; - Nfhapy; fl;llq;fs; - rpyg;gjpfhuk; , kzpNkfiy ,

Mo;thh;fs; ,ehad;khh;fs; , fhyf; Nfhapy;fs; $W 11 : rq;ffhyk; - rq;ffhyj;jpd; gpd;dhd Xtpaf; fiy – gidkiy

Xtpak; fhQ;rpGuk; jpUkiyg;Guk; rpj;jd;d thry; - jhkiuf;Fsk; $W 12 : Nrhoh;fhy Xtpak; fapiyf; fhl;rp ehl;ba eq;ifah; -tpraefuj;jhh;

fhy Xtpak; - kJiu ehaf;fh; fhy Xtpak; - gpw;fhyk; $W 13 : rq;ffhy kz;zPl;lhsh; mfoha;Tk; kz; cUtq;fSk; fij

rpw;gq;fSk; - gy;yth;fiyr; rpw;gk; - fw;rpw;gk; - khky;yGur; rpw;gq;fs; -Nrho ghz;bah; rpw;gk;

jhs; 31922 -jkpoh; gz;ghLk; fiyAk;



13

$W 14 : atzr; rpw;gKk; ,e;jpar; rpw;gKk; - ehy;tifr; rpw;gk; - ,aw;if fw;gid gbik cUtk; - rpw;grhj;jpuq;fs; - nrg;Gj; jpUNkdpfs;

ghh;it E}y;fs;:

1. rpw;gf; fiy 2003 nr. itj;jpaypq;fk; nka;ag;gd; jkpoha;tfk; rpjk;guk;

2. jkpo; ,yf;fpaj;jpy; kjKk; khDlKk; 1963 fhh;j;jpNfR rptjk;gp jkpo;g;

Gj;jfhyak; nrd;id.

3. jkpof tuyhWk; kf;fSk; gz;ghLk; 1971 Nf.Nf.gps;is jkpo;ehl;Lg;

ghlE}y; epWtdk; nrd;id.

4. jkpoh; gz;ghLk; tuyhWk; 1997 eh. thdkhkiy epA+ nrQrhp Gf; `T];

gpiuNtl; ypkpnll; nrd;id.


14

Nehf;fk;: jpwdha;tpd; Njhw;wKk; tsh;r;rpAk; kw;Wk; cyfmstpy; Ngrg;gLk; jpwdha;Tf; Nfhl;ghLfs;-,yf;fpaq;fs; gw;wpj; khzth;fSf;F mwpKfk; nra;J tpsf;Fjy;.

$W 1 : ,yf;fpaf; Nfhl;ghL - ,yf;fpaj; jpwdha;T

$W 2 : ,yf;fpa tuyhW – mwpKg;gLj;Jjy;

$W 3 : GJj;jpwdha;T – Njhw;wKk; tsh;r;rpAk; - Nfhl;ghl;lhsh;fs; - GJj;jpwdha;Tf;

Nfhl;ghLfs; - GJj; jpwdha;Tk; jkpo; ,yf;fpaq;fSk;

$W 4 : tuyhw;wpay; jpwdha;T – Njhw;wKk; tah;r;rpAk; - tuyhw;wpay; jpwdha;Tk;

khh;f;rpa mwpQh;fSk; - ,yf;fpa tuyhw;nwOj;jpay; - ,yf;fpaj;ij

tuyhw;W %ykhff; nfhzh;jy;

$W 5 : nkhopapay; jpwdha;T – Nuad; ahf;fg;rd; - r#h; - nkhopapd; Gij Gw

tbtk; : xg;gpyf;fpaj; jpwdha;T – tiuaiw jhf;ff; Nfhl;ghL - tuNtw;G

- ,izciu – mbf;fUj;Jk; Fwpg;Gg; nghUSk;

$W 6 : r%ftpay; jpwdha;T – rKjhag; gpd;dzp – vjph;Nfhs; - rKjhar; rpj;jhpg;G

– rKjha kjpg;G – rKjhar; rpf;fy; : khh;f;frpaj; jpwdha;T

$W 7 : ,aq;fpay; nghUs; Kjy; thjk; - tuyhw;Wg; nghUs; Kjy; thjk; , cUtk;

cs;slf;fk; - gpujpgypg;Gf; nfhs;if – mbj;jsk; - Nky;jsk; , Nrhrypr

vjhh;j;jk;

$W 8 : ngz;zpaj; jpwdha;T – tpsf;fk; - tiuaiw – Njhw;wk; - tsh;r;rp tiffs;

: jypj;jpaj; jpwdha;T : nrhy;tpsf;fk; - Njhw;wk; tsh;r;rp – jypj;

,yf;fpaj; jpwd; nfhs;iffs;

jhs; 31923 -jpwdha;Tf; Nfhl;ghLfs;



15

$W 9 : csg;gFg;gha;Tj; jpwdha;T : cstpay; mZFKiwAk; kdg;gFg;Gk; -

xbay; kdr;rpf;fy; - Aq; - yf;fhd; -: njhd;kj; jpwdha;T : tiffs; -

njhd;kKk; ,yf;fpaKk; - njhd;kKk; nkhopAk; : mikg;gpay;

$W 10 : nkhopf; fplq;F – Ngr;R nkhop – Fwpg;gpd; - Fwpg;gPL - ,izKuz; -

jha;g;ghh;it – fhyg;ghh;it : gpd; mikg;gpay; njhpjhTk; rpijtpsf;fKk;

$W 11 : r#Uk; njhpjhTk; - yf;fhd; - G+f;Nfh : gpd; etPdj;ij jpwdha;T

etPdj;jtk; - gpd; etPdj;Jtk; NtWghLfs; - fijahly;fs;

$W 12 : vLj;Jiug;gpay; jpwdha;T : vLj;Jiug;gpd; mbg;gilfs; : fijkhe;jh; -

nray; - fhyk; - Nehf;Fepiy – gDtYk; thrpg;Gk;

$W 13 : gpd; fhyzpj;Jtj; jpwdha;T : Njhd;wpa #oy; - gpd; fhyzpj;Jtj;

jpwdha;Tf; Nfhl;ghLfs; - khw;W tuyhw;iw cUthf;Fjy; - vl;th;l; iraj; -

N`hkpghgh

$W 14 : Gyk; ngah; ,yf;fpaj; jpwdha;T : tpsf;fk; - tiuaiw – Gyg;ngah;Tf;fhd

fhuzq;fs; - Gyk; ngah; r%fj;jpd; nghJg; gz;Gfs;;;: #oypay; jpwdha;T :

Njhw;wk; tiuaiw – mnkhpf;fhTk; ,q;fpyhe;Jk;; gz;ghLk; ,aw;ifAk; -

mwptpaYk; #oypaYk; - #oypay; mZFKiwfs;.

ghh;it E}y;fs;:

1. jp.R. eluhrd; jpwdha;Tf; fiy vd.rp.gp.vr; nrd;id.

2. ,yf;fpa ,af;fq;fs; 1980 e.gpr;rKj;J rf;jp ntspaPL nrd;id.

3. Barry Peter, Beginnng theory, Viv Books , New Delhi .2010.

4. ,yf;fpaj; jpwdha;tpay; 1986 jh.V.Qhd%h;j;jp Ie;jpizg; gjpg;gfk;

nrd;id.


16

Nehf;fk;:

fy;ntl;Lfspdy; fhzg;gLk; nkhop mikg;gpid vKj;Jiuj;jy;. fy;ntl;Lfspd; vOj;JfSk; kw;Wk; gad;ghLfSk; mjd; %yk; ,f;fhy khzf;fh;fSf;F Kd;Ndhh;fspd; tuyhw;iw vLj;Jiuj;jy;.

$W 1 : tuyhW cUthf;fj;jpy; fy;ntl;Lfspd; gq;F

$W 2 : fy;ntl;Lfs; vOJk; Kiw

$W 3 : ,e;jpaf; fy;ntl;Lfspy; fhZk; nkhopfs;

$W 4 : fy;ntl;Lfspd; jd;ik

$W 5 : mNrhfh; fy;ntl;Lfs;

$W 6 : jkpoff; fy;ntl;Lfspd; nghJj;jd;ik

$W 7 : ,e;jpaf; fy;ntl;lha;tpd; tuyhW

$W 8 : njd;dpe;jpaf; fy;ntl;lha;tpd; Njhw;wKk; tsh;r;rpAk;

$W 9 : fy;ntl;Lfspd; fhyf;fzpg;G

$W 10 : vOj;Jfspd; Njhw;wk;

$W 11 : rpe;Jntsp vOj;Jf;fs;

$W 12 : gpuhkp – fNuh\;b – jkpo; gpuhkp – tl;nlOj;J

$W 13 : fpue;j vOj;J – jkpo; vOj;Jfs;

$W 14 : FwpaPLfs;

jhs; 31924 - fy;ntl;bay;



17

ghh;it E}y;fs;

1. jkpo; fy;ntl;baYk; tuyhWk; v.Rg;guhaY jkpo; gy;fiyf; fofk.;

2. gz;ilj; jkpo; vKj;Jfs; jp. eh.Rg;gpukzpad; cyfj; jkpo; Muha;r;rp

epWtdk; nrd;id.

3. fy;ntl;bay;, , ,uh.ehfrhkp jkpo;ehL njhy;nghUs; Ma;Tj; Jiw

nrd;id.

4. rq;ffhyg; gpuhkp fy;ntl;Lfs; kapiy rPdp Ntq;flrhkp irt rpj;jhe;j

E}w;gjpg;Gf; fofk; nrd;id.

Nehf;fk;:

rq;f ,yf;fpaq;fisg; gw;wpAk; Itif epyq;fisg; gw;wpAk; khzth;fSf;F vLj;Jiuj;jy;.

$W 1 : FwpQ;rpg; ghl;L

$W 2 : Ky;iyf; fyp– 1 Kjy; 8 tiu

$W 3 : Ky;iyf; fyp– 9 Kjy; 17 tiu

$W 4 : Iq;FWE}W : kUjk;

$W 5 : mfehD}W nea;jy; - 10 Kjy; 200 tiu

$W 6 : mfehD}W nea;jy; - 210 Kjy; 400 tiu

$W 7 : FWe;njhif : ghiyg; ghly;fs; - 1 Kjy; 50 tiu

$W 8 : FWe;njhif : ghiyg; ghly;fs; - 51 Kjy; 93 tiu

$W 9 : ew;wpiz : Kjy; ,UgJ ghly;fs;

$W 10 : ew;wpiz : mLj;j ,UgJ ghly;fs;

$W 11 : ghpghly;fs; : itag; ghly;fs;

jhs; 31931 –rq;f ,yf;fpak;

,uz;lhkhz;L %d;whk;gUtk;



18

$W 12 : GwehD}W : 151 Kjy; 200 ghly;fs; tiu

$W 13 : gjpw;Wg;gj;J - Ie;jhk; gj;J

$W 14 : rpWghzhw;Wg;gil.

Nehf;fk;:

fhg;gpaq;fspd; fijfSk; mjpy; $wg;gl;Ls;s rpwg;Gr; nra;jpfisg; gw;wpAk; khzth;fSf;Ff; $Wjy;.

$W 1 : rpyg;gjpfhuk; - Gfhh;f; fhz;lk; - mwpKfk; - kidawk;gLj;j fhij

$W 2 : rpyg;gjpfhuk; - Gfhhf;; fhz;lk; - muq;Nfw;Wf; fhij -me;jp khiy

rpwg;Gr;nra;j fhij

$W 3 : rpyg;gjpfhuk; - Gfhh;f; fhz;lk; -,e;jputpoT+nuLj;j fhij – flyhL fhij

$W 4 : rpyg;gjpfhuk; - Gfhh;f; fhz;lk; - fhdy;thpf; fhij – Ntdpw; fhij

$W 5 : rpyg;gjpfhuk; - Gfhh;f; fhz;lk; - fdhj;jpwk; ciuj;j fhij - eLfhz;

fhij

$W 6 : kzpNkfiy : 1 Kjy; 7 fhijfs;

$W 7 : kzpNkfiy : 8 Kjy; 15 fhijfs;

$W 8 : rPtf rpe;jhkzp : Nfhtpe;ijahh; ,yk;gfk;

jhs; 31932– fhg;gpaq;fs;



19

$W 9 : nghpa Guhzk; : fz;zg;g ehadhh; Guhzk;

$W 10 : tpy;ypghujk; : fd;d gUtk;

$W 11 : Njk;ghtzp : Kjw;fhz;lk; - ghy khl;rp glyk;

$W 12 : rPwhg;Guhzk; : EGtj;Jf; fhz;lk; - ckW fj;jhG <khd; nfhz;l glyk;

$W 13 : esntz;gh : Rak;tu fhz;lk; (1 – 45 ghly;fs;)

$W 14 : tisahgjp

Nehf;fk;:

rpw;wpyf;fpaq;fisg; gw;wp vLj;Jiuj;jy;.

$W 1 : fypq;j;Jg;guzp – guzp ,yf;fzk;

$W 2 : flTs; tho;j;J – filj;jpwg;G

$W 3 : fypq;fj;Jg;guzp - fhLghbaJ – Nfhapy; ghbaJ

$W 4 : FNyhj;Jq;fr; Nrhod; cyh

$W 5 : ee;jpf; fyk;gfk; - nrhy; tpsf;fk; - ghl;Lilj; jiytd; - Kjy; 20

ghly;fs;

$W 6 : ee;jpf; fyk;gfk;- nrhy; tpsf;fk;- ghl;Lilj; jiytd;- 21 Kjy; 45

ghly;fs;

$W 7 : jkpo;tpL J}J– J}J ,yf;fzk; - J}J tuyhW

jhs; 31933 -rpw;wpyf;fpaq;fs;



20

$W 8 : jkpo;tpL J}J– jkpopd; jdpr;rpwg;G – jkpopd; nja;tPf Mw;wy;

$W 9 : Fw;whyf; FwtQ;rp –tre;jty;yp

$W 10 : Fw;whyf; FwtQ;rp – Fwj;jpaplk; kiytsk; Nfl;ly; Kjy; FwpNfl;ly; tiu

(66 – 111)

$W 11 : kPdhl;rpak;ikg; gps;isj; jkpo; - gps;isj; jkpo; ,yf;fzk;

$W 12 : kPdhl;rpak;ikg; gps;isj; jkpo; - mk;Gypg; gUtk;

$W 13 : jQ;irthzd; Nfhit – ghq;fp. kjpAld;ghL kl;Lk;.

$W 14 : Kj;njhs;shapuk; (Nrhod;).

Nehf;fk; :

njhy;fhg;gpaj;jpy; nghUsjpfhuj;jpd; jpizg;ghFghLfisg; gw;wp khzth;fSf;F tpsf;fpf; $wy;.

$W 1 : mfj;jpizapay; - mwpKfk; - Itif epyq;fs;

$W 2 : mfj;jpizapay; - gphptpy; epfOk; $w;Wtiffs;

$W 3 : Gwj;jpizapay; - mwpKfk; - jpiztiffs; - ntl;rpj;;jpiz

$W 4 : Gwj;jpizapay; - tQ;rpj;jpiz – copiQj;jpiz

$W 5 : Gwj;jpizapay; - Jk;igj;jpiz – thifj;jpiz

jhs; 319304 - njhy;fhg;gpak; : nghUshjpfhuk; ,sk;G+uzk;



21

$W 6 : Gwj;jpizapay; - fhQ;rpj;jpiz – ghlhz;jpiz

$W 7 : fstpay;

$W 8 : fw;gpay;

$W 9 : nghUspay;

$W 10 : nka;ag;ghl;bay;

$W 11 : ctikapay;

$W 12 : nra;Aspay; - khj;jpiu Kjy; fsd; tiu

$W 13 : nra;Aspay; - fhyk; Kjy; ,ioG tiu

$W 14 : kugpay;

Nehf;fk;:

xg;gpyf;fpaj;jpd; Njhw;wKk; tsh;r;rpAk; kw;Wk; njf; Nfhl;ghLfs; gw;wp vLj;Jf; $Wjy;.

jhs; 31941 - xg;gpyf;fpak;

,uz;lhkhz;L ehd;fhk; gUtk;



22

ghh;it E}y;fs;

Nehf;fk;:

khdplhpd; gz;ghl;L epiy, gz;ghl;L epiyapy; cah;e;J epd;Nwhh; , khdplh; tho;e;j epiyapidAk; , thoNtz;ba epiyapidAk; mwpjy;.

$W 1 : khdpltpay; Njhw;wKk; tsh;r;rpAk;

$W 1 : xg;gpyf;fpaj; Njhw;wKk; tsh;r;rpAk;

$W 2 : jkpopy; xg;gpyf;fpa tsh;r;rp epiy

$W 3 : xg;gPLk; xg;gpyf;fpaKk;

$W 4 : xg;gpyf;fpag; gad;ghL

$W 5 : xg;gpyf;fpa Ma;Tfs; - nghJepiy

$W 6 : mbf;fUj;jpay; - ,yf;fpa tif - ,iz epiy – jhf;fk;

$W 7 : xg;gpyf;fpa Ma;Tg; gug;G

$W 8 : xg;gpyf;fpaf; Nfhl;ghLfs; - gpnuQ;Rf; Nfhl;ghL

$W 9 : mnkhpf;ff; Nfhl;ghL -

$W 10 : xg;gpyf;fpaKk; nkhopngah;g;Gk;

$W 11 : ,yf;fpaKk; gpw fiyfSk; - ,yf;fpaKk; tuyhWk;

$W 12 : cstpaYk; ,yf;fpaKk; gpw JiwfSk;

$W 13 : ,yf;fpaKk; mwpTk; - ,aw;gpay; Nfhl;ghL

$W 14 : rhh;gpay; Nfhl;ghLfs; fhyKk; ,yf;fpaKk;

1. jkpoz;zy; xg;gpyf;fpa mwpKfk; kPdhl;rp Gj;jf epiyak; ntspaPL kJiu Kjw;gjpg;G – 1973

2. k. jpUkiy &r.rPdpthrd; xg;gpyf;fpa nfhs;iffs;, fkyhyak;,

vd.[p.X.fhydp ehfkiy GJf;Nfhl;il

3. f. ifyhrgjp xg;gpay; ,yf;fpak;, ghhp epiyak;, nrd;id

4. it.rr;rpjhde;jk; xg;gpyf;fpak; Xh; mwpKfk;, Mf;];Nghh;L Adpth;rpl;b gpu];, nrd;id

jhs; 31942 -gz;ghl;L khdpltpay;



23

$W 2 : rhf;uB]; - gpNsl;Nlh – mhp];lhby;

$W 3 : Gj;jha;Tf; fhyk; - mwpnthspf;fhyk;

$W 4 : ,e;jpahtpy; khdpltpay; tsh;r;rp

$W 5 : cly;rhh; khdpltpay; - ,dtpay; - khdpl cly; msitapay;

$W 6 : kdpjr; #oypay; - cstpay;rhh; khdpltpay;

$W 7 : nkhopapay; gz;ghl;L khdpltpay;

$W 8 : khdpltpaYk; fsg;gzpAk; - fsg;gzpapy; juTfisg; ngWjy;

$W 9 : juTfisg; gFj;J Ma;jy; - xg;gPl;L Kiw

$W 10 : gz;ghl;bd; cl;$Wfs; - cl;$Wfspd; jd;ikfs;

$W 11 : gz;ghl;bd; mikg;G – gz;ghl;L nghJik

$W 12 : gz;ghl;;L xU elj;ij rhh; Kiw

$W 13 : jkpofg;goq;Fbapd; gz;ghl;L khw;wk; - ,df;FO – rhjpfs; -

rhjpf;nfhs;iffs;

$W 14 : rhjpgw;wpa etPdf; Nfhl;ghLfs;

ghh;it E}y;fs;

1. Nf.V.FzNrfud; , jkpof kiyapd kf;fs; 2. jkpoh; khdpltpay; , gf;jtr;y ghujp gjpg;gfk;, milahsk; nrd;id 3. khdpltpay; Nfhl;ghLfs; , gf;jtry ghujp gjpg;gfk;, milahsk; Fj;jej;jk; -

621310 jpUr;rp khtl;lk; 4. ,yf;fpa khdpltpay; gf;jtr;y ghujp gjpg;gfk;, milahsk; Fj;jej;jk; - 621310

jpUr;rp khtl;lk; 5. tuyhw;W khdpltpay; , gf;jtr;y ghujp gjpg;gfk;, milahsk; Fj;jej;jk; - 621310

jpUr;rp khtl;lk; 6. ghzh; ,d tiutpay;, gf;jtr;y ghujp gjpg;gfk;, milahsk; Fj;jej;jk; - 621310

jpUr;rp khtl;lk;

Nehf;fk; :

jhs; 31943 - jkpof tuyhWk; gz;ghLk;



24

jkpofj;jpd; tuyhWk; ,tw;wpy; fhzg;gLk; gz;ghLk;,fiyfSk; , ehfhpfq;fisg;

gw;wpAk; tpsf;fpf; $Wjy;.,yf;fpak;> fy;ntl;L. gl;laq;fs; top gz;ilj;jkpoh; tuyhw;iw mwpar; nra;jy;.

$W 1 : tuyhWk; epygug;Gk; - tuyhw;wpd; nry;thf;F – gy;NtW fhyq;fspy; tuyhW cz;lhf;fpa ehl;Lg; gphpTfs;

$W 2 : gioa fw;fhyk; - Gjpa fw;fhyk; - ,Uk;Gf; fhyk; $W 3 : njhy;fhg;gpaUf;F Kw;gl;l jkpoh; ehfhpfKk; gz;ghLk; - rq;f fhyk;

fp.K.300-fp.gp.300 $W 4 : rq;f E}y;fspy; Ntq;flk; - Nrhoh;fhyj;jpy; tl vy;iy $W 5 : %d;whk; FNyhj;Jq;fd; tiu – fpU\;zNjtuhah; fhyk; - gy;yth;

tuyhW - gy;yth; gw;wpa rhd;Wfs; $W 6 : fsg;gpuh; - rpk;k tp\;Z – kNfe;jputh;kd; - Filtiuf; Nfhapy;fs; -

eurpk;kth;kd; - %d;whk; ee;jpth;kd; $W 7 : fhpfhy; ngUtsj;jhd; - fp.K.%d;whk; E}w;whz;bd; Kw;gl;l Nrhkh; -

fp.K. Kjy; E}w;whz;Lr; Nrhoh; $W 8 : rq;f fhy murpaYk; kf;fs; tho;f;ifAk; - Nrhoh; vOr;rp – nghpa

Nfhtpy; - ghz;bah; tuyhW – kfhuhl;bah; $W 9 : rKjha tuyhW – nghUshjhu tuyhW $W 10 : rkz rkar; nry;thf;F – ngsj;j rkar; nry;thf;F - ,Ryhj;jpd;

nry;thf;F fpwp];jt rkaj; njhz;L $W 11 : jkpoh; ehfhpfk; – jkpoh; gz;ghL – fy;tp epiy $W 12 : jkpoff; fiyfs; – fl;blf; fiy – Xtpaf; fiy – rpw;gf; fiy –

mirf; fiy – eldf; fiy – ehlff; fiy – kUj;Jtf; fiy $W 13 : fhtphpf; fiu ehfhpfk; - fiyr; rpwg;G kl;Lk; - itiff; fiu ehfhpfk;

,yf;fpar; rpwg;G - fiyr; rpwg;G $W 14 : Mw;wq;fiug; gz;ghL – ngz;iz ehlL ehfhpfk; - nghUief; fiu

ehfhpf;fsk; - neha;ay; ejp ehfhpfk;

ghh;it E}y;fs;

1. jkpoh; ehfhpfKk; gz;ghLk;, m.njl;rpzh%h;j;jp , 1994 Ie;jpizg; gjpg;gfk; nrd;id 2. jkpof tuyhWk; gz;ghLk; , Nf.Nf.gps;is , 1971 , jkpo;ehl;Lg; ghlE}y; epWtdk;

nrd;id


25

3. jkpoh; gz;ghLk; tuyhWk; , eh.thdkhkiy , 1997 , epA+nrQ;rhp gf; `T]; gpiuNtl; ypkpnll; nrd;id

4. jkpoh; gz;ghLk; tuyhWk; , nj.ngh. kPdhl;rp Re;judhh; , 1999 , epA+nrQ;rhp Gf; `T]; gpiuNtl; ypkpnll; nrd;id

5. gz;ilj; jkpoh; tho;Tk; topghLk; , f.ifyhrgjp , 1999 , Fkud; gg;sp\h;]; nrd;id 6. The Early Writing System, Dr. K.Rajan, ghz;ba ehl;L tuyhw;Wg; Nguit kJiu-10 7. goe;jkpoh; tho;Tk; tsh;r;rpAk; , rhkp rpjk;gudhh; , 1988 rhkp rpjk;gudhh; ,yf;fpa

epiyak; nrd;id. 8. jkpoh; tsh;j;j moFf; fiyfs;> kapiy rPdp Ntq;flrhkp 2004 kzpthrfh;

gjpg;gfk;.

jhs; 31944 - Muha;r;rp mwpKfk;


26

Nehf;fk;:

Muha;r;rp mwpKfk; ,Ma;tpd; tiffs; kw;Wk; Gwf;fl;Lg;ghl;bd; mikg;Ggw;wp tpsf;Fjy;

$W 1 : Ma;Tk; Ma;NtLk; tiffs;

$W 2 : Ma;Tk; Ma;Tg; nghUs; Njh;Tk;

$W 3 : Ma;thsUf;Fhpa jFjpfs;- Ma;Tf; Fhpa fhyk;

$W 4 : Ma;T Nehf;fpidr; Rl;ly; - Ma;Tr; rpf;fy; - Ma;Tg; nghUs; gw;wpr;

nra;ag;gl;l Ma;Tfs;

$W 5 : Kjd;ikf; $Wfs; - Jiz epiyf; $Wfs;

$W 6 : njhFj;jy; - gFj;jy; - cw;WNehf;fy;

$W 7 : cw;W Nehf;Fthhpd; mZFKiwfs;

$W 8 : Neh;fhzy; - Neh;fhzypd; tiffs; - tpdhj; njhFjp

$W 9 : khjphpfs; - fs Ma;Tf;Fj; Njitahd nghUl;fs;

$W 10 : vOj;J - gl Mjhuq;fs; - jpiug;glk; - xypg;gjpT – xspg;gjpT

$W 11 : Ma;Ntl;bd; cUthf;fk; - Ma;Ntl;bd; mikg;G

$W 12 : gFjpfs; - ,ay; gphpg;G – fUj;J tpsf;fk;

$W 13 : Ma;Ntl;bd; Gwf;fl;likg;G – gpd;dpizg;G

$W 14 : Nkw;Nfhs; - mbf;Fwpg;G – Jiz E}y; gl;bay;

ghh;it E}y;fs;

1. Ma;tpay; mwpKfk;,jkpoz;zy; , lhf;lh; v];.v];. ,yf;Ftd; , 1979 kPdhl;rp Gj;jf epiyak; ,kJiu

2. Muha;r;rp Kiwfs; ,Kidth; vr;. rpj;jpuGj;jpud; , Kidth; M.rz;Kfk;

3. ,yf;fpa Muha;r;rp newpKiwfs; ,lhf;lh; Ntq;fluhkd; ,lhf;lh;. Kj;Jr; rz;Kfk; , 1985 Kj;Jg;gjpg;gfk; ,kJiu

4. Ma;tpay; newpKiwfs; ,lhflh; .F.nt. ghyRg;gpukzpad;

5. ehl;lhh; tof;fhWfs; , Nj.Y}h;J

6. ehl;lhh; tof;fhw;wpy; fs Ma;T,Nj.Y}h;J



27

e.3. Duration of the Programme:

The programme for the degree of Master of Arts in Tamil shall consist of two academic years divided in to four semesters. Each semester consists Four Theory Papers. Theory course carry 4 credits each. Each semester consist of 16 credits.

e. 4. Faculty and Support Staff Requirements:

The programme for the degree of Master of Tamil requires the following faculty and supporting staff:


Faculty for Tamil Subjects # 3

Facluty for Grammer Subject# 2


# Faculty may belongs to at least Assistant Professor Level

e. 5. Instructional Delivery Mechanisms:

The instructional delivery mechanisms of the programme includes SLM – study materials, face to face contact session for both theory and practical courses of the programme, e-content of the study materials in the form of CD, MOOC courses and virtual laboratory wherever applicable.

e. 6. Identification of Media:

The SLM – designed study materials will be provided in print media as well is in the form of CD which carries electronic version of the study material in addition to MOOC and virtual laboratory courses.

e. 7. Student Support Services:

The student support services will be facilitated by the head quarter i.e., Directorate of Distance Education, Alagappa University, Karaikudi and its approved Learning Centres located at various parts of Tamil Nadu. The pre-admission student support services like counselling about the programme including curriculum design, mode of delivery, fee structure and evaluation methods will be explained by the staff at head quarter and Learning Centres. The post-admission student support services like issuance of identity card, study materials, etc. will be routed through the Learning Centres. The face to face contact sessions of the programme for theory courses will be


28

held at the head quarter and Learning Centres. The conduct of end semester examinations, evaluation and issuance of certificates will be done by office of the controller of examinations, Alagappa University, Karaikudi. f. Procedure for curriculum transaction and evaluation: f. 2. Curriculum Transactions:

The classroom teaching would be through chalk and talk method, use of OHP, Power Point presentations, web-based lessons, animated videos, etc. The face to face contact sessions would be such that the student should participate actively in the discussion. Student seminars would be conducted and scientific discussions would be arranged to improve their communicative skill. The face to face contact sessions will be conducted in following durations;

Course Type Face to Face Contact Session per Semester

(in Hours) Theory Courses (4 courses with 4 credits each)

64

Total 64

f. 3.2. Distribution of Marks in Continuous Internal Assessments: The following procedure shall be followed for awarding internal marks for theory courses

Component Marks

Assignments(2) (15+10)

25

Total 25


29

f. 3.4. Marks and Grades:

The following table gives the marks, grade points, letter, grades and classification to indicate the performance of the candidate.



80-89 8.0-8.9 D+ Excellent


70-74 7.0-7.4 A+ Very Good

60-69 6.0-6.9 A Good

50-59 5.0-5.9 B Average



Ci = Credits earned for the course i in any semester Gi = Grade Point obtained for course i in any semester. n refers to the semester in which such courses were credited

For a semester;

Grade Point Average [GPA] = ∑i CiGi/ ∑i Ci

Grade Point Average = Sum of the multiplication of grade points by the credits of the courses







30

CGPA Grad Classification of Final Result

9.5-10.0 9.0 and above but below 9.5

O+ O


8.5 and above but below 9.0 8.0 and above but below 8.5 7.5 and above but below 8.0

D++ D+ D

First Class with Distinction*

7.0 and above but below 7.5 6.5 and above but below 7.0 6.0 and above but below 6.5

A++ A+ A

First Class

5.5 and above but below 6.0 5.0 and above but below 5.5

B+ B

Second Class


*The candidates who have passed in the first appearance and within the prescribed semester of the PG Programme are eligible.

f. 3.5. Maximum duration for the completion of the course:

The maximum duration for completion of M.A., Degree in Tamil programme shall not exceed ten semesters from their fourth semester. f. 3.6. Commencement of this Regulation:

These regulations shall take effect from the academic year 2018-2019 (June session) i.e., for students who are to be admitted to the first year of the course during the academic year 2018-2019 (June session) and thereafter.

f. 4. Fee Structure: The programme has the following Fee Structure:


First Year Second Year

1 Admission Processing Fee 300.00 -

2 Course Fee 5000.00 5000.00

4 ICT Fee 150.00 150.00

TOTAL 5450.00 5150.00

The above mentioned fee structure is exclusive of Exam fees.


31

g. Requirement of the Library Resources:

The students who have enrolled themselves in M. A., Tamil Programme shall attend the face to face contact session for Assignment at their respective Learning Centres.

Directorate of Distance Education, Alagappa University, Karaikudi housing an excellent Library facility with adequate number of copies of books in relevant titles for M. A., Tamil programme. The Central Library of Alagappa University also having good source of reference books. The books available at both the libraries are only for reference purpose and not for lending services.

h. Cost estimate of the programme and the provisions: The cost estimate of the programme and provisions for the fund to meet out the expenditure to be incurred in connection with M. A.,Tamil Programme as follows:

Sl. No.

Expenditure Heads Approx. Amount in Rs.

1 Programme

Development (Single Time investment)

10,00,000.00

2 Programme Delivery (Per Year)

20,00,000.00

3 Programme Maintenance (Per Year)

3,00,000.00

i. Quality assurance mechanism and expected programme outcomes:

i. 1. University’s Moto: „Excellence in Action‟ i. 2. University’s Vision Statement: Achieving Excellence in all spheres of Education, with particular emphasis on “PEARL”- Pedagogy, Extension, Administration, Research and Learning. i. 2. University’s Objectives: 1. Providing for Instructions and Training in such Branches of Learning as the University may determine. 2. Fostering Research for the Advancement and Dissemination of Knowledge


32

i. 3. University’s Quality Policy: Attaining Benchmark Quality in every domain of „PEARL‟ to assure Stakeholder Delight

through Professionalism exhibited in terms of strong purpose, sincere efforts, steadfast direction and skillful execution. i. 4. University’s Quality Quote: Quality Unleashes Opportunities towards Excellence (QUOTE) i.5. Programme’s Review Mechanism:

The quality of the programme depends on scientific construction of the curriculum, strong-enough syllabi, sincere efforts leading to skilful execution of the course of the study. The ultimate achievement of M. A., Tamil programme of study may reflect the gaining of knowledge and skill in the subject. And all these gaining of knowledge may help the students to get new job opportunities, upgrading in their position not only in employment but also in the society, make students feel thirsty to achieve in research in the fields associated with the disciplineTamilachieving in competitive examinations on the subject.

The benchmark qualities of the programme may be reviewed based on the performance of students in their end semester examinations. Apart from the end semester examination-based review feedback from the alumni, students, parents and employers will be received and analyzed for the further improvement of the quality of the M. A., Tamil Programme.


33


MBA BANKING AND FINANCE


ALAGAPPA UNIVERSITY

KARAIKUDI – 630 003

PROGRAMME PROJECT REPORT MBA BANKING AND FINANCE

a) PROGRAMME MISSION AND OBJECTIVES

Business Studies have fascinated humans for two reasons, namely generating

interest and augmenting essentials of running a firm effectively. That is why

their study is enchanting and glorifying. The primary objective of this

programme is to provide ample exposure to subjects from the fields of business

legacy and accountancy, equip the Students for entry level jobs in industry and

to contribute to the economic development of the country.

b) RELEVANCE OF THE PROGRAMME WITH HEI’S MISSION AND GOALS:

The Alagappa University is functioning with following Vision and Mission:

Mission: Achieving Excellence in all spheres of Education, with particular

emphasis on ‘PEARL”- Pedagogy, Extension, Administration, Research and

Learning

Vision: Affording High Quality Higher Education to the learners so that they

are transformed into intellectually competent human resources that will help in

the uplift of the nation to Educational, Social, Technological, Environmental

and Economic Magnificence.

Therefore, the introduction of MBA BANKING AND FINANCE programme

in the Directorate of Distance Education will contribute substantially in

fulfilling the mission of Alagappa University. Such a higher education in

subject with appropriate Practical Exposer will enrich the human resources for

the uplift of the Nation to Educational, Social, Technological, Environmental

and Economic Magnificence (ESTEEM).

c) NATURE OF PROSPECTIVE TARGET GROUP OF LEARNERS

Working Professionals

Entrepreneurs

ServicePersonnel

AcademicFaculty

GovernmentOfficials

Researchers

Homemakers

UnemployedGraduates

d) APPROPRIATENESS OF PROGRAMME

To Attain Leadership in spearheading qualitative and responsible academic

programs relevant to the society through cost effective off-campus distance

mode of education. Knowledge and understanding, skills, qualities and other

attributes in the following areas:

The fundamental concepts ofManagement

The higher-level taxonomy and diversity of BusinessStudies.

How principles of Business can be applied toproblems

Internship training inIndustry

Undertake Inter tasks andtechniques.

Inter-disciplinary knowledge like statistics, Mathematics, Computer andE-Banking.

Using the SPSS package for the analysis ofdata

It also improves the Intellectual skills of thestudents.

In nutshell, these skills will improve the performance of the studentsparameters.

E) INSTRUCTIONAL DESIGN MBA BANKING AND FINANCE

Course

Code

Title CIA

Max.

ESE

Max.

TOT

Max.

C

I Semester

33011 Management – Principles and Practices 25 75 100 4

33012 Organizational Behaviour 25 75 100 4

33013 Managerial Economics 25 75 100 4

33014 Quantitative Techniques 25 75 100 4

33015 Financial and Management Accounting 25 75 100 4

Total 125 375 500 20

II Semester

33021 Research Methods 25 75 100 4

33022 Business Environment 25 75 100 4

33023 Business Laws 25 75 100 4

33024 Management Information System 25 75 100 4

33025 Human Resource Management 25 75 100 4

Total 125 375 500 20

III Semester

33031 Marketing Management 25 75 100 4

33032 Financial Management 25 75 100 4

33033 Banking Law and Practice 25 75 100 4

33034 Central Banking and Monetary Management 25 75 100 4

33035 International Banking and Foreign Exchange 25 75 100 4

Total 125 375 500 20

IV Semester

33041 Computer and Banking 25 75 100 4

33042 Investment Analysis and Portfolio Management

25 75 100 4

33043 Project Finance 25 75 100 4

33044 Mutual Fund Management 25 75 100 4

33045 Merchant Banking 25 75 100 4

Total 125 375 500 20

Grand Total 2000 80

Course Code Legend:

3 3 0 Y Z

330- M.B.A Programme Y -Semester Number

Z- Course Number in the Semester

CIA: Continuous Internal Assessment, ESE: End Semester Examination,

TOT: Total, C: Credit Points, Max.: Maximum

No. of Credits per Course (Theory) - 5 Total No. of Credits per Semester- 20

Total Credits for the Programme- 20 X 4 = 80

33011- MANAGEMENT PRINCIPLES AND PRACTICES

Objectives:

To introduce the basic concepts of Management functions and principles

To learn the scientific decision making and modern trend in the management process

To understand the contemporary practices and issues in management

UNIT 1 Management:Definition – Nature, Scope and Functions – Evolution of

Management – Management thought in modern trend – Patterns of the

management analysis – Management Vs. Administration - Management and

Society: The external Environment, Social Responsibility and Ethics.

UNIT 2 Management Science and Theories : Contributions of FW Taylor, Henri Fayol,

Elton Mayo, Roethilisberger, H.A.Simon and P.F Drucker - Universality of

Management - Relevance of management to different types of organization.

UNIT 3 Planning: Nature and Purpose – Principles and planning premises –

Components of planning as Vision, Mission, Objectives, Managing By

Objective (MBO) Strategies, Types and Policies -Planning and Decision

Making: Planning process.

UNIT 4 Decision making: Meanings and Types – Decision-making Process under

Conditions of Certainty and Uncertainty – Rational Decision Making

Strategies, Procedures, Methods, Rules, Projects and Budgets.

UNIT 5 Organizing: Nature, Importance, Principles, purpose and Scope - Organizing

functions of management – Classifications of organization – Principles and

theories of organization – Effective Organizing – Organizational Culture and

Global Organizing.

UNIT 6 Organizational Structure – Departmentalization – Span of control – Line and

staff functions – Formal and Informal Groups in Organizations - Authority and

responsibility - Centralization and decentralization – Delegation of authority –

Committees – Informal organization.

UNIT 7 Staffing: General Principles of Staffing- Importance, techniques, Staff

authority and Empowerment in the organization – Selection and Recruitment -

Orientation - Career Development - Career stages – Training – Performance

Appraisal.

UNIT 8 Creativity and Innovation – Motivation - Meaning – Importance – Human

factors of Motivation – Motivation Theories: Maslow, Herzberg, Mc Gregor

(X&Y), Ouchi (Z) ,Vroom, Porter-Lawler, McClelland and Adam –

Physiological and psychological aspects of motivation .

UNIT 9 Directing : Meaning, Purpose, and Scope in the organization – Leadership:

Meaning, Leadership styles, Leadership theories: Trait, Contingency,

Situation, Path-Goal, Tactical, Transactional, Transformational and Grid.

Leaders: Type, Nature, Significance and Functions, Barriers, Politics and

Ethics. Leader Vs. Manager.

UNIT 10 Communications: Meaning – Types – Process – Communication in the

decision making – Global Leading - Effective communication in the levels of

management. – Uses of Communication to Planning, Organizing, coordinating

and controlling.

UNIT 11 Co-ordination: Concept; Meaning, Characteristics, Importance in the

organization, Co-ordination process and principles - Techniques of Effective

co-ordination in the organization - Understanding and managing the group

process.

UNIT 12 Business ethics: Relevance of values in Management; Holistic approach for

managers indecision-making; Ethical Management: Role of organizational

culture in ethics – Ethics Committee in the organization.

UNIT 13 Controlling: Objectives and Process of control Devices of control – Integrated

control – Special control techniques- Contemporary - Perspectives in Device

of Controls

UNIT 14 New Perspectives in Management - Strategic alliances – Core competence –

Business process reengineering – Total quality management – Six Sigma-

Benchmarking- Balanced Score-card.

REFERENCES

1. Stoner, et-al, Management, Prentice Hall, 1989.

2. Koontz and O’Donnell, Management: A Systems Approach, McGraw Hill, 1990

3. Weihrich and Koontz,Management: A Global Perspective, McGraw Hill, 1988

4. Peter F. Drucker, Management, 2008.

5. Gene Burton and Manab Thakur, Management Today: Principles and Practice, Tata

McGraw Hill.

6. Ricky W. Griffin, Management, South-WesternCollege Publications, 2010

7. Stephen P. Robbins and Mary Coulter, Management, 9th Edition, 2006.

8. Kaplan and Norton, The Strategy-Focused Organization: How Balanced Scorecard

Companies Thrive in the New Business Environment, HBP, 2000.

33012 - ORGANIZATIONAL BEHAVIOUR

Objectives:

To understand the personality trades and influence on the organization.

To imbibe the necessary conceptual understanding of behaviour related people

To learn the modern trends, theories and changes in organizational Behaviour.

UNIT 1 Organizational Behaviour: History – Meaning Elements – Evolution,

Challenges and opportunities – Trends – disciplines – Approaches – Models –

Management functions relevance to organizational Behaviour – Global

Emergence of OB as a discipline.

UNIT 2 Personality – Determinants, Structure, Behaviour, Assessment, Individual

Behaviour: Personality & Attitudes- Development of personality – Nature and

dimensions of attitude – Trait Theory – Organizational fit – Organizational

Commitment

UNIT 3 Emotions – Emotional Intelligence – Implications of Emotional Intelligence on

Managers – EI as Managerial tool – EI performance in the organization –

Attitudes: Definitions – Meaning – Attitude relationship with behaviour –

Types – Consistency

UNIT 4 Individual Behaviour and process of the organization: Learning, Emotions,

Attitudes, Perception, Motivation, Ability, Job satisfaction, Personality, Stress

and its Management – Problem solving and Decision making – Interpersonal

Communication - Relevance to organizational behaviour.

UNIT 5 Group Behaviour: Group Dynamics - Theories of Group Formation - Formal

and Informal Groups in organization and their interaction - Group norms –

Group cohesiveness – Team: Importance and Objectives - Formation of teams

– Team Work- Group dynamics – Issues - Their relevance to organizational

behaviour.

UNIT 6 Organizational Power: Organizational Power: Definition, Nature,

Characteristics - Types of powers - Sources of Power - Effective use of power

– Limitations of Power – Power centre in Organization.

UNIT 7 Organizational Politics: Definition – Political behaviour in organization -

Factors creating political behaviour – Personality and Political Behaviour -

Techniques of managing politics in organization – Impact of organizational

politics.

UNIT 8 Organizational Conflict Management: Stress Management: Meaning – Types –

Sources and strategies resolve conflict – Consequences – Organizational

conflict: Constructive and Destructive conflicts - Conflict Process - Strategies

for encouraging constructive conflict - Strategies for resolving destructive

conflict.

UNIT 9 Organizational Dynamics: Organizational Dynamics – Organizational

Efficiency, Effectiveness and Excellence: Meaning and Approaches – Factors

affecting the organizational Climate.

UNIT 10 Organizational Culture: Meaning, significance – Theories – Organizational

Climate – Creation, Maintenance and Change of Organizational Culture –

Impact of organizational culture on strategies – Issues in Organizational

Culture.

UNIT 11 Inter personal Communication: Essentials, Networks, Communication

technologies – Non-Verbal communications Barriers – Strategies to overcome

the barriers. Behavioral Communication in organization - Uses to Business

UNIT 12 Organizational Change: Meaning, Nature and Causes of organizational change

Organizational Change –Importance – Stability Vs Change – Proactive Vs.

Reaction change – the change process – Resistance to change – Managing

change.

UNIT 13 Organizational Behaviour responses to Global and Cultural diversity,

challenges at international level, Homogeneity and heterogeneity of National

cultures, Differences between countries.

UNIT 14 Organizational Development: Meaning, Nature and scope – Features of OD –

OD Interventions- Role of OD – Problems and Process of OD – process OD

and Process of Intervention - Challenges to OD- Learning Organizations -

Organizational effectiveness Developing Gender sensitive workplace

REFERENCES

1. Fred Luthans, Organizational Behaviour, McGraw-Hill/Irwin, 2006.

2. Stephen P. Robbins, Organizational Behaviour, Prentice Hall; 2010

3. Keith Davis, Organizational Behavior: Human Behavior at Work, McGraw Hill, 2010

4. Griffin and Moorhead, Organizational Behavior: Managing People and Organizations,

2006.

5. Judith R. Gordon, Organizational Behavior: A Diagnostic, Prentice Hall, 2001.

6. K. Aswathappa, Organizational Behaviour, Himalaya Publishing, Mumbai, 2010

7. Judith R. Gordon, A Diagnostic Approach to Organizational Behaviour, Allyn &

Bacon, 1993.

33013 - MANAGERIAL ECONOMICS

Objectives:

To understand the economic principles and its applications in business

To develop economics based analytic skills for business

To make the learners to strong in economical approach

UNIT 1 Economics: Introduction – Meaning, nature and scope of Managerial

Economics – General Foundations of managerial Economics – Economic

Approach – Working of Economic system - Circular flow activities -

Economics & Business Decisions - Relationship between Economic theory

and Managerial Economics.

UNIT 2 Business Decisions: Role of managerial Economics in Decision making –

Decision making under Risk and Uncertainty - Concepts of Opportunity cost, -

Production possibility curve – Incremental Concepts - Cardinal and Ordinal

approaches to consumer Behaviour Time Value of Money –

UNIT 3 Consumer Behaviour:Marginalism– Equilibrium and Equi-marginalism and

their role in business decision making. – Equi-Marginal principles – Utility

analysis – Total and Marginal Utility – Law of diminishing marginal utility –

Marshallian approach and Indifference curve analysis.

UNIT 4 Demand analysis: Meaning, Functions - Determinants of demand-Law of

Demand – Demand Estimation and Forecasting - Applications of demand in

analysis - Elasticity of Demand: Types, Measures and Role in Business

Decisions.

UNIT 5 Supply Analysis: Determinants of supply- Elasticity of Supply- Measures and

Significance - Derivations of market demand – Demand Estimation and Fore

casting- Demand and Supply equilibrium – Giffen Paradox

UNIT 6 Production Functions: Managerial uses of production function - Cobb-Douglas

and other production functions - Isoquants – Short run and long run

production function – Theory of production – Empirical estimations of

production functions.

UNIT 7 Forms of Markets: Meaning and Characteristics - Market Equilibrium:

Practical Importance, Market Equilibrium and Changes in Market Equilibrium.

Pricing Functions: Market Structures - Pricing and output decisions under

different competitive conditions: Monopoly Monopolistic completion and

Oligopoly

UNIT 8 Strategic Behaviour of the firms and Game Theory - Nash Equilibrium:

Implications – Prisoner’s Dilemma: Types of strategy – Price and Non price

competition – Relation to the firm behaviour.

UNIT 9 Cost and Return: Cost function and cost output relationship – Economics and

Diseconomies of scale - Cost control and cost reduction- Cost Behaviour and

Business Decision- Relevant costs for decision-making- Traditional and

Modern theory of Cost.

UNIT 10 New Product Penetrative Decision and Skimming the cream Pricing-

Government control over pricing - Concept of Profit- Types and Theories of

Profit by Knight (Uncertainty), Schumpeter (Innovation), Clark (Dynamic)

and Hawley (Risk) - Profit maximization – Cost volume profit analysis – Risk

and Return Relationship.

UNIT 11 Profit and Investment Analysis: Meaning – Measurement of profit – Theories

of Pricing- Profit planning and forecasting- Profit and Wealth maximization –

Cost volume profit analysis – Investment analysis and Evaluation: IRR, NPV

and APV techniques.

UNIT 12 Macro-economic Factors: Nature, Importance ; Economic Growth and

Development - Business cycle – Phases and Business Decision- Inflation -

Factors causing Inflation and Deflation - Control measures – Balance of

payment Trend and its implications in managerial decision.

UNIT 13 National Income: Introduction Meaning – Theories – Methods of

Measurement - Sectoral and Population distributions – Per capita Income:

Definition – Calculations – Uses – Limitations – GDP – GNP - Recent

developments in Indian Economy.

UNIT 14 Economic Regulations of Business: Introduction – Antitrust theory and

Regulations – The structure – Conduct – Performance paradigm –

Concentration: Overview – Measuring concentration – Regulation of

Externalities.

REFERENCES

1. Dominick Salvatore, Managerial Economics in a Global Economy,OxfordUniversity

Press, 2011.

2. Ivan Png and Dale Lehman, Managerial Economics, Wiley-Blackwell, 2007.

3. Truett Lila J., Truett, Dale B. and Truett J. Lila (2006), Managerial Economics:

Analysis Problems, Cases, 8th Editon, John Wiley & Sons.

4. Atmanand (2008), Managerial Economics, 2nd Edition, Excel Books.

5. Christopher R Thomas & S Charles Maurice (2008), Managerial Economics, 9th

edition, McGraw Hill Co.

6. Petersen, H. C., Cris, L W and Jain, S.K. (2008), Managerial Economics, 1st edition

Pearson

7. Gupta G S, Managerial Economics, Tata McGraw-Hill.

8. Varshney and Maheswari, Managerial Economics, Sultan Chand and Sons.

9. Mehta P L, Managerial Economics, Sultan Chand and Sons.

10. Joel Dean, Managerial Economics, Prentice-Hall.

33014 - QUANTITATIVE TECHNIQUES

Objectives:

To help develop analytical skills based on problem solving approach

To learn quadrature problems solving of business issues.

To acquire the knowledge in statistics and their use inbusiness decision making.

UNIT 1 Basic Quantitative Concepts: Place of quantitative analysis in the practice of

management – Problem definition: Models and their development. Variables

notion of Mathematical models – concept of trade off – Notion of constants –

concept of Interest.

UNIT 2 Basic Concept of differentiation – integration – Optimization concepts – use of

differentiation for optimization of business problem Optimization Statistics:

Meaning and Applications of Statistics in business decision making and

research - Collection, Tabulation and presentation of data - Measures of central

tendency: Mean, Median and Mode. Measures of dispersion

UNIT 3 Variables and function: Linear and Non-linear –Graphical representation of

functions and their applications in cost and revenue behavior. Slope and its

relevance –Use of functional relationships to understand elasticity of demands,

Relationship between costs and level of activity, Decisions on Minimizing

Costs and Maximizing output/profits.

UNIT 4 Linear Programming: Introduction to the linear programming – Concepts of

optimization- Formulation of different types of linear programming –Standard

from of LP problems - Importance and practical implementation in Industry

UNIT 5 Simple regression and Correlation analysis: Introduction, Correlation,

Correlation analysis, linear regression analysis and Co-efficient. Duality and

sensitivity analysis for decision-making- Solving LP using graphical and

simplex method (only simple problems) – Interpreting the solution for

decision-making

UNIT 6 Special Algorithms of LPP: Transportation Algorithm - Balanced and

Unbalanced Problem Formulation and solving methods: North West Corner,

Vogel’s Approximation-MODI method- Assignment and Travelling Executive

Algorithms

UNIT 7 Theory of Probability: Introduction to the Concept – Development of

probability – Areas and Utilisation of probability theories in the Business –

Sample space – terminology – Types of probability.

UNIT 8 Theoretical Probability Distributions: Introduction - Concept of events –

Probability of events – Joint, conditional and marginal probabilities

Probability distributions: Binomial, Poisson and Normal – Features and

Applications – Use of Normal Tables.

UNIT 9 Operational research for Decision Making: Historical background and

Developments – Definition – Phases in the use of Operations research –

Models – Characteristics of quantitative methods - Benefits and Limitations of

Quantitative methods.

UNIT 10 Sequencing /Scheduling Methods : Concepts – terminology – Notations –

Assumption for scheduling models – Job sequencing priorities – Processing

the job and Mass production system.

UNIT 11 Simulation Techniques: Introduction to simulation as an aid to decision-

making- Advantages and Disadvantages of Simulation – Applications of

simulations models – Types: Inventory, Cash, and Project – Random Numbers.

UNIT 12 Queuing Theory: Introduction – Definition – Queue priorities Product

launching problems using Monte Carlo simulation- Queuing Theory: M/M/1

queuing model and applications.

UNIT 13 Decision Analysis: Concepts – Definition – Decision Tables Pay-off and Loss

tables – Expected value of pay-off – Expected value of Perfect Formation –

decision making process

UNIT 14 Decision Tree Analysis: Decision making environments – Concept of

Posterior probabilities Decision Tree approach to choose optimal course of

action Criteria for decision – Mini-max, Maxi-max, Minimizing Maximal

Regret and their applications.

REFERENCES

1. David R. Anderson, et al, An Introduction to Management Science: Quantitative

Approaches to Decision Making, Cengage Learning, 2008.

2. Lucey, Quantitative Techniques Cengage Learning Business Press, 2002

3. Sharma, Operations Research: Theory and Applications.

4. Richard I Levin, & C. Atkinson Kirkpatrick, Quantitative Approaches to Management,

McGraw-Hill.

5. K. Gupta and D.S. Hira, Operations Research.

6. Srivastava, Shenoy and Sharma, Quantitative Techniques for Managerial Decision-

making, New Age International, 2006.

7. N.D. Vohra, Quantitative Techniques in Management, Tata McGraw-Hill Education.

8. V.K. Kapoor, Operations Research.

9. DharaniVenkatakrishnan, Operations Research: Principles and Problems.

10. Hamdy A. Taha, Operations Research: An Introduction, Prentice Hall, 2002.

33015 - FINANCIAL AND MANAGEMENT ACCOUNTING

Objectives:

To enable the students to learn basic accounting principles, concepts.

To practice Financial and Management accounting applications

To make the learners familiarize in managerial decision making.

UNIT 1 Accounting: Definition – Accounting for historical function and managerial

function - Types of Accounting- Management, Management and Cost

accounting – Scope for Accounting-Managerial Uses of Management

accounting and Financial Accounting.

UNIT 2 Accounting Concepts and Conventions – Accounting standards - Financial

Accounting Definitions – Principles – Accounting standards - Double entry

system of accounting: Accounting books – Preparation of journal and ledger,

subsidiary books.

UNIT 3 Preparation of Trial Balance – Errors and rectification – Classifications of

capital and Revenue – Fixed Assets and Depreciation accounting – Preparation

of Manufacturing accounting- Preparation of Final Accounts - Accounting

from incomplete records – Statements of affairs methods

UNIT 4 Conversion methods – Preparation of Trading, Profit & Loss Account and

Balance Sheet from incomplete records – Depreciation methods - Straight line

method, Written down value method, Sinking fund method.

UNIT 5 Financial Statement Analysis - Objectives - Reorganizing the Financial

Statement information -Techniques of Financial Statement Analysis:

Comparative Statements, Common – Size statement, Trend Percentage -

UNIT 6 Management Statement Analysis: Management statements – Nature of

management statements – Limitations of management statements – Analysis

of interpretation -Types of analysis- Tools of analysis: Trend analysis,

Common size statements and Comparative statements;

UNIT 7 Accounting Ratios: Construction of balance sheet using ratios (problems) –

Financial ratios – Types: Profitability ratios – Turnover ratios – Liquidity

ratios – Proprietary ratios – Market earnings ratios- Uses and limitations of

ratios - Dupont analysis.

UNIT 8 Fund Flow Analysis: Need and meaning – Preparation of schedule of changes

in working capital and the fund flow statement – Workings for

Computation of various sources and uses - Preparation of Fund Flow

Statement

UNIT 9 Cash flow Analysis: Meaning and importance Managerial uses of cash flow

statement – Differences between fund flow and cash flow analysis - Uses and

limitation of fund flow statement- Preparation of cash flow statement

UNIT 10 Cost Accounting: Cost Accounting - Meaning - Distinction between Financial

Accounting and Cost Accounting - Cost Terminology: Cost, Cost Centre, Cost

Unit - Elements of Cost - Cost Sheet – Problems - Overhead Cost Allocations:

Over and under Absorption. Job and Contract Costing,

UNIT 11 Operating Costing: Material Cost Accounting, Perpetual Inventory Control,

Inventory Valuation, EOQ, ABC Analysis, Setting of Reorder Level,

Maximum Level, Minimum Level, Labour Cost Accounting, Remuneration

and Incentive Schemes- Reconciliation of Financial and Cost Accounting

UNIT 12 Marginal Costing: Definition – Difference between marginal costing and

absorption costing – Break- even point Analysis - Contribution, p/v Ratio,

margin of safety - Decision making under marginal costing system-key factor

analysis, make or buy decisions, export decision, sales mix decision-Problems

UNIT 13 Budgeting and Budgetary Control: Concept and Need for Budgeting-

Classification of budgets – Preparation of Sales, Production, Material,

Purchase and Cash Budgets –Budgetary control system – Mechanism – Master

budget.

UNIT 14 Capital Budgeting System: Importance – Methods of capital expenditure

appraisal – Payback period method – ARR method – DCF methods – NPV and

IRR methods – Their rationale – Capital rationing.

REFERENCES 1. Arulanandam& K.S. Raman,Advanced Accounting, Himalaya Publishing House.

2. Gupta &Radhasamy,Advanced Accounting, Sultan Chand & Sons.

3. Shukla & T.S. Grewal,Advanced Accounting, S.Chand&Company.

4. Jain &Narang,Advanced Cost Accounting, Kalyani. Publications.

5. Ravi M. Kishore, Cost Management, Taxman Publications

6. S.N. Maheswari, Management Accounting &Management Accounting, Vikas

Publishers.

7. Manmohan & Goyal, Principles of Management Accounting, Shakithabhavan

Publication.

8. N. K. Prasad,Advanced Cost Accounting, Book Syndicate Pvt. Ltd., Calcutta.

9. Andrew A Haried, Advanced Accounting, Atlantic Publishers.

10. Hoyle,Advanced Accounting, McGraw Hill.

33021 - RESEARCH METHODS

Objectives:

To Understand the basic principles of research and design

To practice the research process, tools and techniques

To facilitate managerial decision making

UNIT 1 Research Bases: Definition and applications of business research; Types of

research –descriptive, exploratory, correlational, explanatory, quantitative,

qualitative; Steps in the research process; establishing operational definitions

UNIT 2 Research scope - Recent advancements in research. Distinction between Pure

& Applied, Historical & Futuristic, Analytical & Synthetic, Descriptive &

Prescriptive, Survey & Experimental and Case & Generic Researches

UNIT 3 Planning of Research: Research problem – Identification, selection and

formulation of research problem – Review of literature in the field of business

- Identifying objectives of the research.

UNIT 4 Economic management: Use in identifying Research Gaps and Techniques –

Hypothesis – Meaning – Sources and Types of Hypothesis – Hypothesis

Formulation for testing – Research design – Factors affecting research design

– Evaluation of research design

UNIT 5 Variables construction for Hypothesis: Identifying variables - Constructing

hypotheses – functions, characteristics, types of hypotheses - Significance of

research in social sciences – Induction and deduction.

UNIT 6 Sampling Design: Census method and sampling method for investigation –

Principle of sampling – Essentials of a good sampling – sampling frame;

Methods of sampling: Probability, non-probability, mixed sampling designs;

UNIT 7 Construction of sampling for Finite and Infinite populations – Sample size

determination– Calculations - Factors affecting the size of the sample – Biased

sample – Sampling and non-sampling errors.

UNIT 8 Sources and Collection of Data: Sources of data – Primary and secondary data

– Modes of data collection – Observation: Types and Techniques –Interview:

Types and conduct – Preparation for an interview – Effective interview

techniques – Limitations of interview

UNIT 9 Schedule: Meaning and kinds – Essentials of a good schedule – Procedure for

the formulation of a schedule – Questionnaire: Meaning and types – Format of

a good questionnaire– Schedules Vs. Questionnaires

UNIT 10 Scaling techniques: Meaning, Importance, Types of measurement scales –

Nominal, Ordinal, Interval, Ratio; Methods of their construction of

Questionnaires or Schedules – Pre-testing of Data Collection Tools- Validity

and Reliability – Methods.

UNIT 11 Processing and Analysis of Data: Meaning – Importance – Process of data

analysis – Editing – Coding – Tabulation – Diagrams – Univariate, Bivariate

and Multi-variant analysis

UNIT 12 Test of Significance: Fundamentals on Test Procedure- Testing for

significance of Mean/Proportion and difference between Means/Proportions- F

Test for Means and Chi-square test Contingency Table - Parametric Test: T

test, F Test and Z test

UNIT 13 Non-parametric Test: Concept and Types: Mann Whitney Test- Test, Kruskal

Wallis, sign test. Multivariate analysis-factor, cluster, MDS, Discriminant

analysis - The process of interpretation of Test Results– Guidelines for making

valid interpretation

UNIT 14 Report Writing : Role and types of reports – Contents of research report –

Steps involved in drafting reports – Principles of good report writing –

Grammatical Quality – Language flow- Data Support- Diagrammatic

Elucidation- References and Annotations – Clarity and Brevity of

expressions- Features of a good Report- Criteria for evaluating research

reports/ research findings.

REFERENCES

1. John W Best & James V. Kahn Research in Education, Allyn and Bacon, 2009

2. Anderson et-al, Thesis and Assignment Writing, Wiley, New Delhi, 1989.

3. William Josiah Goode and Paul K. Hatt, Methods of Social Research, McGraw Hill,

1981.

4. Wilkinson and Bhandarkar, Methods and Techniques of Social Research, 2003, HPH.

5. Earl R. BabbieRobert, ThePractice of Social Research, Cengage Learning, 2010.

6. B. Burns & A. Burns, Business Research Methods and Statistics Using SPSS, Sage

Publications, 2008.

7. Krishnaswami and Ranganatham, Research Methodology in social Sciences, HPH,

Mumbai

8. Bryman & Bell: Business Research Methods, OUP.

9. Pauline V Young, Scientific Social Surveys and Research, Prentice-Hall, (Digitalized)

2007.

10. C.R.Kothari, Research Methodology: Methods and Techniques, 2009

33022 - BUSINESS ENVIRONMENT

Objectives:

To understand the concepts and constituents of Business environment

To know the environmental issues in the business context

To analyze the changes in the global environmental relating to business

UNIT 1 Business Environment: Introduction: Concepts – Significance - Dynamic

factors of environment – Importance of scanning the environment – Macro and

Micro Environment – Micro and Macro Economics to the business –

Constituents of Business environment

UNIT 2 Fundamental issues captured in PESTLE– Political, Economic, Socio-cultural,

Technological, Legal and Ecological environment- Opportunities and Threats

as environmental issues to address by Businesses.

UNIT 3 Political Environment: Government and Business – Political Systems, Political

Stability and Political Maturity as conditions of business growth - Role of

Government in Business: Entrepreneurial, Catalytic, Competitive, Supportive,

Regulative and Control functions

UNIT 4 Government and Economic planning: Industrial policies and promotion

schemes – Government policy and SSI – Interface between Government and

public sector - Guidelines to the Industries – Industrial Development

strategies; salient features, Role of public and private sectors, Comparative

cost dynamics.

UNIT 5 Economic Environment: Phase of Economic Development and its impact-

GDP Trend and distribution and Business Opportunities – capacity utilisation

– Regional disparities and evaluation - Global Trade and investment

environment.

UNIT 6 Financial System and Business capital: Monetary and Fiscal policies -

Financial Market structure – Money and Capital markets – Stock Exchanges

and Its regulations – Industrial Finance - Types, Risk - Cost-Role of Banks;

Industrial Financial Institutions - Role of Management Institutions

UNIT 7 Role of Central Bank- Fiscal System: Government Budget and Taxation

Measures- Fiscal Deficits and Inflation- FDI and collaboration –Foreign

Capital tapping by businesses- Export-Import policy – Foreign Exchange and

Business Development.

UNIT 8 Labour Environment: Labour Legislation – Labour and social securities –

Industrial Relations – Trade Unions – Workers participation in management –

Exit Policy – Quality Circles.

UNIT 9 Social and Technological Environment: Societal Structure and Features-

Entrepreneurial Society and its implications for business – Social and cultural

factors and their implications for business- Technology Development Phase in

the Economy as conditioner of Business Opportunities

UNIT 10 Technology Environment: Technology Policy- Technology Trade and transfer-

Technology Trends in India- Role of Information Technology – Clean

Technology. – Time lag in technology – Appropriate technology and

Technology adoption- Impact of technology on globalization.

UNIT 11 Legal and Ecological Environment: Legal Environment as the all-enveloping

factor from inception, location, incorporation, conduct, expansion and closure

of businesses – IDRA and Industrial licensing – Public, Private, Joint and

Cooperative Sectors.

UNIT 12 Legal Aspects of Entering Primary and Secondary Capital Markets- Law on

Patents- Law on Consumer Protection- Law on Environmental Protection-

Need for Clean energy and Reduction of Carbon footprint.

UNIT 13 New Economic Policy Environment in India: Liberalization, Privatization and

Globalization (LPG): Efficiency Drive through Competition- Facets of

Liberalization and impact on business growth

UNIT 14 Aspects of Privatization and impact on business development– Globalization

and Enhanced Opportunities and Threats – Extended competition in Input and

Output Markets Role of WTO, IMF and World Bank in global economic

development.

REFERENCES

1. Brooks, Weatherston, Wilkinson, International Business Environment, Pearson, 2010.

2. Steiner & Steiner, Business, Government and Society: A Managerial Perspective,

McGraw-Hill, 2008.

3. Mohinder Kumar Sharma, Business Environment in India, South Asia Books.

4. Adhikary M, Economic Environment of Business, Sultan Chand & Sons.

5. Amarchand D, Government and Business, TMH.

6. Francis Cherunilam, Business Environment and Development, Himalaya Publishing

House, 2008.

7. Maheswari& Gupta, Government, Business and Society.

33023 - BUSINESS LAWS

Objectives:

To understand the legal structure and provision for running a business

To learn various acts, enactments and amendments of mercantile law

To know the various aspects of Business law for legal process.

UNIT 1 Indian Contract Act 1872: Contract – Meaning – Essential elements – Nature

and formation of contract: Nature, elements, Classifications of Contracts on

the basis of Validity, Formation and Performance– offer and acceptance

UNIT 2 Offer and Acceptance: Introduction – Proposal – acceptance –

Communications of offer, Acceptance and Revocations – Offer and acceptance

by Post.

UNIT 3 Consideration: Definitions, Types of consideration – essentials of

Consideration – Privity of Contracts: Exceptions – Capacity: Consent –

Legality of object – Quasi contract Discharge of contract - Remedies for

breach of contract – Quasi contracts.

UNIT 4 Special Contracts: Contract of Indemnity and Guarantee – Bailment and

Pledge – Law of Agency-Definition – Rights of Surety -Discharge of Surety –

Bailment and Pledge: Introduction, Classifications, Duties and Rights of Bailer

and Bailee – termination of Bailment -

UNIT 5 Formation of contract under Sale of Goods Act, 1930: Contract of sale -

Conditions and Warranties - Transfer of property - Performance of the

contract: Essentials of valid tender performance, Performance reciprocal

promise- Rights of an unpaid seller.

UNIT 6 Laws on Carriage of Goods: Duties, Rights and Liabilities of Common

Carriers under: (i) The Carriers Act, 1865. (ii) The Railways Act, 1989, (iii)

The Carriage of Goods by Sea Act, 1925, (iv) The Carriage by Air Act, 1972

and (v) The Carriage By Road Act, 2007

UNIT 7 Negotiable Instruments Act, 1881: Negotiable Instruments: Features – Types-

Parties – Material alteration – Parties to negotiable instruments – Presentations

of negotiable instrument.

UNIT 8 Insurance: Definition and sources of Law – Judicial set up in India ––

Insurance as a contract -History of Insurance Legislation in India - Legal

principles - Fundamental Principles of Life Insurance Fire Insurance and

Marine Insurance.

UNIT 9 Indian Partnership Act, 1932: Meaning and test of partnership – registration of

firms Life Insurance Corporation Act 1956 – General Insurance Business

Nationalization Act 1973.

UNIT 10 Partners Relations: Introduction – Eligibility to be a partner – Registration of

change in partner – Limited Liabilities of partnership - Dissolution of firms -

Characteristics – Kinds – Incorporation of Companies – Memorandum of

Association – Articles of Association

UNIT 11 Companies Act 1956: Nature and kinds of companies – Prospectus –

Disclosure Needs - Management and Administration – Director –

Appointment, Powers and Duties

UNIT 12 Formation of a Company : Introduction – process - Minutes and Resolutions –

E-Filling of documents under Ministry of Corporate Affairs (MCA) 21-

Management of companies –Meetings- Types- Requirements -AGM and EGM

– Board Meeting

UNIT 13 Law of Information Technology: Introduction – Rationale behind IT act 2000

– Information technology Act 2000: Scheme of the IT Act 2000: Digital

signature: attribution; Acknowledgement and dispatch of Electronics Record –

Regulation certifying authorities.

UNIT 14 Protection of minority interest: Introduction - Methods of Winding-up - The

Right to Information Act, 2005 Right to know, Salient features of the Act,

obligation of public Authority, Designation of Public Information officer,

Request for obtaining information,

REFERENCES

1. M.S.Pandit and ShobhaPandit, Business Law, Himalaya Publishing House, Mumbai,

2010.

2. Pathak, Legal Aspects of Business, TMH, 2009.

3. N.D. Kapoor, Mercantile Law, Sultan Chand & Sons, New Delhi.

4. M.C. Shukla, Mercantile Law, S. Chand & Co., New Delhi.

5. Relevant Bare Acts.

6. Balachandran and Thothadri, business Law, TMH, 2010

33024 - MANAGEMENT INFORMATION SYSTEM

Objectives:

To learn the principles of Management Information System for organizations

To understand the uses , function of application MIS in organization

To analyze the scope of MIS for business organizations

UNIT 1 Foundations of Information System: Information system: Meaning, Role –

System concepts – Organization as a system – Components of Information

system – Various activities of IS and Types of IS

UNIT 2 Information System: Concepts of Information System and Management

information systems design and development-Implementation testing and

conversion- Evolution and element of MIS

UNIT 3 MIS : Definition – Characteristics and basic requirements of MIS – Structure

of MIS- Approaches to MIS development- Computerized MIS- Pre-requisites

of an effective MIS- Limitations of MIS.

UNIT 4 MIS and Decision support System (DSS): MIS Vs. data processing – MIS and

decision support system – MIS and information resource management – DSS

and AI – Overview of AI - DSS models and software.

UNIT 5 MIS and Operations Research- Executive information and Decision support

systems – Artificial intelligence and expert system – Merits and De Merits –

Pitfalls in MIS.

UNIT 6 MIS in Indian organizations – Recent developments in information technology

- Installation of Management Information & Control System in Indian

organization

UNIT 7 Computers and Communication: Information technology and Global

integration –On-line information services – Electronic bulletin board systems –

The internet, electronic mail, interactive video

UNIT 8 Communication Channels: Advantages disadvantages – Communication

networks – Local area networks – Wide area networks – Video conferencing-

Relevance to MIS- Usage in Business process.

UNIT 9 Functional Information systems: MIS for Research Production - MIS for

Marketing - MIS for Personnel - MIS for Finance - MIS for Inventory- MIS

for Logistics- MIS for Product Development- MIS for Market Development.

UNIT 10 Client/ Server Computing: Communication servers – Digital networks –

Electronic data interchange and its applications - Enterprise resource planning

systems (ERP Systems) – Inter-organizational information systems – Value

added networks – Networking.

UNIT 11 Electronic Commerce and Internet: E-Commerce bases – E-Commerce and

Internet – M-Commerce- Electronic Data Inter-change (EDI) - Applications of

internet and website management - Types of Social Media - uses of social

media in business organization

UNIT 12 Computer System and Resources: Computers systems: Types and Types of

computer system processing - Secondary storage media and devices – Input

and output devices – Hardware standards – Other acquisition issues.

UNIT 13 Managing Information Technology: Managing Information Resources and

technologies – IS architecture and management - Centralized, Decentralized

and Distributed - EDI, Supply chain management & Global Information

technology Management.

UNIT 14 Security and Ethical Challenges: IS controls - facility control and procedural

control - Risks to online operations - Denial of service, spoofing - Ethics for IS

professional - Societal challenges of Information technology

REFERENCES

1. James O'Brien & George Marakas, Management Information Systems, McGraw Hill,

2011.

2. Kenneth Laudon & Jane Laudon, Essentials of MIS, Prentice Hall, 2010.

3. Lisa Miller, MIS Cases: Decision Making with Application Software, Prentice Hall,

2008.

4. David M. Kroenke, Experiencing MIS, Prentice Hall, 2011.

5. Kenneth C. Laudon, MIS: Managing the Digital Firm, Prentice Hall, 2005.

6. Sadogopan S, Management Information Systems, 2001PHI.

7. Murdie and Ross, Management Information Systems, Prentice Hall.

8. Henri C. Lucas, Information Systems Concepts for Management, McGraw Hill, 1994.

9. Stephen Haag, Management Information Systems, 2008.

33025 - HUMAN RESOURCE MANAGEMENT

Objectives:

To understand the concepts and methods and techniques of Human Resource

Management

To know the Human resource management theories and real time practices

To identify the contemporary issues in human resource management

UNIT 1: Introduction to Human Resource Management: Concept, Definition,

Objectives, Nature and Scope of HRM - Functions of HRM –

Evolution of human resource management - Role and structure of

Human Resource Function in organizations- Challenges in Human

Resource Management

UNIT 2 Human Resource Management Approaches: Phases of human

resource Management- The importance of the human factor –

Competitive challenges of HRM – HRM Models – Roles and

responsibilities of HR department.

UNIT 3 Human Resource Planning: Personnel Policy - Characteristics -

Role of human resource manager – Human resource policies –

Need, Scope and Process – Job analysis – Job description – Job

specification- Succession Planning.

UNIT 4 Recruitment and Selection Process: Employment planning and fore

casting Sources of recruitment- internal Vs. External; Domestic Vs.

Global sources- Selection process Building employee commitment :

Promotion from within - Sources, Developing and Using

application forms – IT and recruiting on the internet.

UNIT 5 Employee Testing & selection : Selection process, basic testing

concepts, types of test, work samples & simulation, selection

techniques, interview, common interviewing mistakes, Designing &

conducting the effective interview, small business applications,

computer aided interview.

UNIT 6 Training and Development: Orientation & Training: Orienting the

employees, the training process, need analysis, Training

techniques, special purpose training, Training via the internet. -

Need Assessment - Training methods for Operatives and

Supervisors

UNIT 7 Executive Development: Need and Programs - Computer

applications in human resource management – Human resource

accounting and audit. On-the - job and off-the-job Development

techniques using HR to build a responsive organization

UNIT 8 Employee Compensation : Wages and Salary Administration

– Bonus – Incentives – Fringe Benefits –Flexi systems - and

Employee Benefits, Health and Social Security Measures,

UNIT 9 Employee Retention: Need and Problems of Employees – various

retention methods– Implication of job change. The control process –

Importance – Methods – Employment retention strategies for

production and services industry

UNIT 10 Appraising and Improving Performance: Performance Appraisal

Programs, Processes and Methods, Job Evaluation, Managing

Compensation, Incentives Performance appraisal: Methods -

Problem and solutions - MBO approach - The appraisal interviews -

Performance appraisal in practice.

UNIT 11 Managing careers: Career planning and development - Managing

promotions and transfers - Sweat Equity- Job evaluation systems –

Promotion – Demotions – Transfers- Labour Attrition: Causes and

Consequences

UNIT 12 Employee Welfare, Separation: Welfare and safety – Accident

prevention – Employee Grievances and their Redressal – Industrial

Relations - Statutory benefits - non-statutory (voluntary) benefits –

Insurance benefits - retirement benefits and other welfare measures

to build employee commitment

UNIT 13 Industrial relations and collective bargaining: Trade unions –

Collective bargaining - future of trade unionism - Discipline

administration - grievances handling - managing dismissals and

workers Participation in Management- Separation: Need and

Methods.

UNIT 14 Human Resource Information System- Personnel Records/ Reports-

e-Record on Employees – Personnel research and personnel audit –

Objectives – Scope and importance.

REFERENCES

1. Mathis and Jackson, Human Resource Management,South-WesternCollege,

2004.

2. Nkomo, Fottler and McAfee, Human Resource Management, South-

WesternCollege, 2007.

3. R. Wayne Mondy, Human Resource Management,Prentice Hall, 2011.

4. Venkataraman& Srivastava, Personnel Management & Human Resources

5. ArunMonappa, Industrial Relations

6. Yodder&Standohar, Personnel Management & Industrial Relations

7. Edwin B. Flippo, Personnel Management , McGraw-Hill, 1984

8. Pigors and Myers, Personnel Administration

9. R.S. Dwivedi, Manpower Management

10. Lynton &Pareek, Training and Development, Vistaar Publications, 1990.

33031 - MARKETING MANAGEMENT

Objectives:

To help the learners understand markets, consumers and marketing

principles.

To understand the buyer behaviour and influencing factors

To learn marketing plan, pricing, promotion and distribution in

global context

UNIT 1 Introduction to Marketing: Meaning and Scope of Marketing;

Marketing Philosophies; Marketing Management Process-an

overview; Modern Marketing Concept: Social marketing concept –

Approaches to the study of marketing.

UNIT 2 Marketing segmentation: Meaning – Bases for segmentation,

benefits – Systems approach - Four Ps of Product and Seven Ps

Service marketing mix and Extensions- Targeting and Positioning -

meaning and importance.

UNIT 3 Marketing Environment: Internal and External and Demographic

factors – Adopting marketing to new liberalized and globalized

economy – Digitalization – Customization and E business settings.

UNIT 4 Consumer Behaviour : Meaning and importance – Consumer

buying process – Determinants and Theories of consumer behaviour

– Psychological, sociological determinants – Theories and their

relevance to marketing-

UNIT 5 Marketing Research: Procedure. Meaning – Objectives – Process-

Demand Forecasting- Marketing Information System – Strategic

marketing plan and organization – Changing marketing practices.

UNIT 6 Product Mix Management: Product planning and development –

Meaning and process – Test marketing – Product failures – Product

line management: Practices – Implications and Strategies for current

market condition.

UNIT 7 Product life cycles: Meaning and Stages – Strategies – Managing

PLC- Product-Market Integration: Strategies – Product positioning

– Diversification – Product line simplification – Planned

obsolescence – Branding Policies and Strategies – Packing.

UNIT 8 Price Mix Management: Pricing and pricing policies – Objectives –

Procedures – Bases for and Methods of price fixing. Cases for Free

Pricing, Administered and Regulated pricing – Pricing and product

life cycle

UNIT 9 Physical Distribution Mix: Types of physical Distribution -

Importance of Physical Distribution- Distribution channel policy –

Logistics Decisions – Methods – Strategic alliance for Logistic cost

reduction.

UNIT 10 Marketing Channel system: Marketing channel decisions: Choice

considerations– Managing Conflict and Cooperation in channels –

Middlemen functions- Modern Trends in Retailing- Malls and

Online.

UNIT 11 Promotional Mix: Personal selling Vs. impersonal selling –

Personal selling – Process – Steps in selling – Management of sales

force – Recruitment and selection – Training – Compensation plans

– Evaluation of performance

UNIT 12 Integrated marketing communication Process: Advertising and sales

promotion – Online Sales promotional activities – Public

relationships – Direct marketing: Meaning, Nature, Growth and

Channels.

UNIT 13 Advertising: Importance – Objectives – Media planning and

selection – Factors influencing selection – Advertisement copy –

Layout – Evaluation of advertising – Advertising budget – Sales

promotion – Methods and practices.

UNIT 14 Competitor analyses: Identifying and analyzing the competitors –

Types of Competitors – Competitive strategies framing for leaders,

challengers, followers and nichers. Customer relationship

marketing: Customer data base, Data ware housing and data mining

REFERENCES

1. Etzel, Walker and Stanton, Fundamentals of Marketing, McGraw Hill,

2004

2. Philip Kotler & Gary Armstrong, Principles of Marketing, Prentice Hall,

2010.

3. Jerome Mccarthy, Basic Marketing, Richard D. Irwin.

4. Cundiff, Still &Govani, Fundamentals of Modern Marketing, Prentice

Hall.

5. Memoria & Joshi, Fundamental of Marketing.

6. Paul Peter and James Donnelly Jr, Marketing Management, McGraw-Hill,

2010.

7. William O. Bearden, Marketing: Principles & Perspectives, McGraw-Hill,

2006.

8. William Arens, et al, Contemporary Advertising, McGraw-Hill, 2008.

9. Perreault and McGarthy - Basic Marketing - Tata McGraw Hill, 2002\

10. Michael J Etzel, Bruce J Walker, William J Stanton and Ajay Pandit,

Marketing concepts and cases - TMH 13th Edition, New Delhi, 2007.

33032 - FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT

Objectives:

To help the students to know the basic concepts of financial

management

To understand capital structure, dividend policy and working

capital management.

To learn the various concepts of financial management along with

applications

UNIT 1 Introduction: Financial management: objectives - Concept, nature,

evaluation and significance – Finance Functions: Managerial and

operative – Role of Financial management in the organization –

Indian Financial system.

UNIT 2 Financial System: Legal and Regulatory frame work – Financial

Functions: Meaning and scope – Finance and Tax Management

Nexus- Tax Avoidance and Tax evasion- Tax incentive and

business decisions.

UNIT 3 Investment Function: Meaning and scope - Time value of Money

concepts and applications –Risk return relationship - Dividend

function – Risk return trade off – Management planning- Global

management environment

UNIT 4 Long-term Capital Resources: Equity and debt sources – Equity

share, preference shares – types of preference share - debentures –

types - sources of long-term capital.

UNIT 5 Capital Issues: Meaning, Nature, Purpose – Roles and Guidelines

of SEBI in capital issues- Bridge finance, loan syndication, Book

building – Borrowings from the term lending institutions and

International capital market- Tax considerations in financing

decision areas.

UNIT 6 Cost of Capital : Concept of cost of capital- Cost of debt, equity,

preference share capital, retaining earning - Weighted average cost:

EBIT –EPS Analysis- Tax, Capital structure and Value nexus -

Computation of overall cost of capital – Tax and cost of capital.

UNIT 7 Capital structure: Determinates - Concept and Types- Optimum

capital structure – Theories of capital structure – Net income and

net operative income approach – M.M. Approach – Traditional

theory – Their assumptions – Significance and limitations –

Management leverage operating leverage – Combined leverage.

UNIT 8 Capital budgeting: Meaning, Nature and Types of Capital

Investment- Methods of appraisal under certainty conditions: PBP,

ARR, IRR and NPV techniques - Basic and International capital

budgeting.

UNIT 9 Uncertainty and Risk models: Simulation Analysis- Sensitivity

analysis- Decision tree analysis- Certainty equivalent and risk-

adjusted return measures- Tax considerations in Investment

Decisions Cost of capital and Investment Decisions.

UNIT 10 Working Capital Management: Definitions and Objectives -

Concept and types – Determinants – Financing approaches –

Conservative approaches - Sources of working capital finance

Factors affecting working capital requirements- Working capital

financing by commercial banks – Types of assistance

UNIT 11 Inventories and receivables Management under conditions of

certainty and uncertainty – Operating cycle – Planning of funds

through the management of assets – Various techniques used.

UNIT 12 Cash and liquidity management: Credit Management and evaluation

alternative credit variables Methods and Functions- Tax

considerations in Remittances and Purchases.

UNIT 13 Dividend Theories: Valuation under Gordon and Walter theories –

Dividend irrelevance under M.M. Theory – Assumptions –

Limitations - Implications and contributions of theories in financial

decision making process.

UNIT 14 Dividend Policy: Types – Share valuation practices – Factors

affecting dividend decision – Tax considerations in dividend

decision when tax is levied at the hands of companies and

recipients.

REFERENCES

1. Brigham and Ehrhardt, Financial Management: Theory & Practice,

Thomson ONE, 2010

2. Brigham and Houston, Fundamentals of Financial Management, Thomson

ONE, 2009.

3. Van Horne: Fundamentals of Financial Management, Prentice Hall, 2008

4. Jeff Madura, International Financial Management,South-WesternCollege

Pub., 2010

5. Prasanna Chandra, Financial Management, McGraw Hill, 2008.

6. Khan and Jain, Financial Management ,Tata McGrawHill,2009

7. Pandey I M, Financial Management, Vikas Publishers,2009

8. SheebaKapil(2010), Financial Management, Pearson Education.

9. B J Camsey, EngeneF.Brigham, “Introduction to Financial Management”,

The Gryden Press

33033 - BANKING LAW AND PRACTICE

Objectives:

To know the basic concepts of Banking

To investigate the laws and practices inBanking

To understand the rights and liabilities of banker.

UNIT1 Banking – Definition – Functions of commercial banks –

Commercial banks and economic development - Nationalization

of commercial banks.

UNIT2 Indian commercial banking system – Scheduled commercial

banks- Non scheduled commercial banks- Public sector banks –

private banks and foreign banks.

UNIT3 Definition of acustomer –KYC norms -Relationship between

banker and customer- General relationship :Debtor and

Creditor relationship ,: Banker as agent – Banker as trustee-

Special relationship : mandate , power of attorney .

UNIT4 Obligations of a banker: Obligation to honor cheques- Garnishee

order – Obligation to maintain secrecy of account : Disclosure of information required by law –Disclosure permitted by banker’s

practices and usages..

UNIT5 Bankers’ Rights: Right of general lien, Set off, Appropriation and

to charge interest and incidentalcharges.

UNIT6 Customers’ accounts with the banker:Fixed deposit- Recurring deposits - NRI deposits-Innovative deposit schemes

UNIT7 Savings and Current accounts – Opening, operationand closing

of such accounts – Legal aspects of entries in the passbook

UNIT8 Management of bank funds – Factors determining cash reserves

of banks – Principles of sound lending : Safety , Liquidity ,

Profitability , Purpose of the loan and The principles of diversification of risks – Collection of creditinformation about

borrowers.

UNIT9 Different types of borrowers such as individuals, joint account

holders, limited companies, partnership firms, trustees, local

authorities and co-operative societies.

UNIT10 Different types of securities – their suitability or otherwise as

banking cover – different methods of charging them –

precautionary measures to be taken in respect of advances against

goods,

UNIT11 documents of title to goods, stock exchange securities, life

policies, real estate, FDR and bookdebts - Documentation

in respect of various types of borrowers and securities.

UNIT12 Negotiable Instruments - Definition – Essential features – Distinguishing features of cheque, bill and promissory note -

Holder and holder in duecourse

– Payment in due course.

UNIT13 Endorsement – definition – Kinds of endorsement – Crossing –

Types : General crossing , special crossing , Double crossing –

Paying banker – Liabilitis and responsibilities of a paying banker

on crossed cheques-Points to be considered before passing a

cheque forpayment –Statutory protection.

UNIT14 Collecting banker – Meaning –Collecting banker as a holder

for value – As an agent of the customer - Duties – Liability -

Statutoryprotection .

REFERENCE

1. M.L. Tannan, Banking Law and Practice in India, Thacker

&Co.Ltd.,Bombay.

2. Varshney and Sundaram, Banking Theory, Law and Practice, Sultan

Chand & Sons, NewDelhi.

3. M. Radhaswami and S.V. Vasudevan, A Textbook of Banking,

S.Chand& Company Ltd., NewDelhi.

33034 - CENTRAL BANKING AND MONETARY MANAGEMENT

Objectives:

To understand about money market

To know the basic concept of Central Banking andits Functions

To explain the monetary policy and creditcreation

UNIT1 Money Market – Meaning – Composition of the moneymarket-

Importance of money markets-Instruments of money

markets

UNIT2 Characteristics of developed and underdeveloped money market

– TheIndian moneymarket-Structure –Deficiencies of the Indian

markets

UNIT3 Central Banking – Evolution – Definition – Characteristics of a

centralbank- Difference between a central bank and

commercial bank

UNIT4 Functions of a central bank : Central bank as bank of issue,

government’s banker, agent and adviser, custodian of cash

reserves of the commercial banks, Bank of rediscount and lender

of last resort and custodian of the nation’s foreign exchange

reserves.

UNIT5 Creation of credit by commercial banks – Central bank as the

controller of credit - Quantitative weapons of credit control-

Bank Rate: Mechanism, merits and demerits

UNIT6 Open market operations- meaning – merits and demerits -

Variable cash reserve ratio – mechanism – merits and

demerits

UNIT7 Qualitative weapons of credit control: Margin requirements,

consumer credit regulation, credit rationing, control through

directives and moral suasion – Role of central bank in a

developingeconomy.

UNIT8 Monetary policy – Objectives: Exchange rate stability, Price

stability, Neutrality of money, Full employment and economic

growth – Choosing between conflicting objectives – Efficacy of

monetarypolicy.

UNIT9 The Reserve Bank of India – Evolution – Organization: -Central

Board,local boards and departments in the centraloffice

UNIT10 RBI as currency authority – RBI as banker to the government –

RBI’s supervision over commercial banks – Licensing of banks –

Regulations relating to capital, Reserves and liquid assets –

Inspection ofbanks

UNIT11 Control over methods of operation and management – Training

of banking personnel and banking education – Depositinsurance.

UNIT12 Monetary policy of the RBI – Objectives – RBI’s instruments of general credit control: Bank Rate, Reserverequirements- Open

market operations

UNIT13 RBI’s direct credit regulation – Moral suasion – Directives of

RBI Regulation of non-bankinginstitutions – Credit planning in

India.

UNIT14 Promotional functions of the RBI : RBI and rural credit – RBI and industrial finance – RBI and export credit – RBI and

exchangecontrol.

REFERENCE

1. D.M. Mithani, Money, Banking, International Trade and

PublicFinance,Himalaya Publishing House,Bombay

2. M.Radhaswami& S.V. Vasudevan, A Textbook of Banking, S.Chand,

NewDelhi, Reserve Bank of India, RBI: Functions and Working, RBIPublications.

33035 - INTERNATIONAL BANKING AND FOREIGN EXCHANGE

Objectives:

To know the basic concepts in international banking and

foreignexchange

To understand the methods of settlement in foreignexchange

To know about the role commercial banks and Exim Bank in

export and import finance.

UNIT1 Meaning of Foreign Exchange – Administration of foreign

exchange– Functions of a foreign exchangedepartment.

UNIT2 Foreign currency accounts: Definition – Scope – Uses – Onshore

andoff shore: Nostro Account - VostroAccount –Loro Account

UNIT3 Foreign Exchange Transactions: Spot and forward deals for the

purchase of sale of foreign currencies – Selection of buying and

selling rates and calculation of appropriate forwardrates

UNIT4 Causes of fluctuations in exchange rates – Effects – Liberalised

Exchange Rate Mechanism (LERMS) – Full convertibility of

currency – Unified Exchange Rate System (UERS) – Full

convertibility –SWIFT.

UNIT5 Exchange Control: Objectives – Methods – Exchange control

regulations relating to exports andimports

UNIT6 Foreign Exchange Management Act, 1999 – India’s foreign

exchange problems – India’s recent foreign trade policy.

UNIT7 Methods of International Payments: Instruments issued by

correspondent banks – Foreign traveller’scheques – Foreign

inward remittancepayment system – Methods of settling debts in

internationaltrade

UNIT8 Letter of Credit: Meaning – Features – Mechanism –Advantages–

Responsibilities and liabilities ofparties- Evaluation of Letter of

credit : To the exporter , to the importer.

UNIT9 Uniform customs and practice for documentarycredits -Types of

Letter of Credit – Payment, Acceptance and Negotiation

Credits- Revocable and Irrevocable credit, Confirmed and

Unconfirmed Credits.

UNIT10 Financing Foreign Trade: Financing exports – Packing credit

advances– Purchase and negotiation of bills – Collection of

export bills – Advance against bills undercollection

UNIT11 Export Incentives : Duty drawback, excises rebate , Duty

entitlement Pass book , Export promotion capital goods scheme.

Financing deferred payment and turnkey projects –Other services

toexporters.

UNIT12 Financing of Imports: Opening a letter of credit – Payment of

import bills – Import trustreceipt - Deferred payment imports –

Loan syndication

UNIT13 Export Credit Guarantee Corporation ofIndia-Policies to

exporters- Standard policy - Specific policies :Specific shipment

policy , supply contracts policy , export turnover policy, Buyers

exposure policy, Consignment export policy , services policies-

Guarantees to Banks

UNIT14 EXIM bank – Lending to Indian exporters : Facilities for export

capability creation- facility for joint ventures abroad – non

lending services –Lending to foreign Government/Companies –

Lending to Indian Banks.

REFERENCES

1. ChatterjeeAK, Principles of Foreign Exchange, Vol.I& II, Himalaya

Publishing House Mumbai.

2. Jeevanandam C, Foreign Exchange – Practice, Concepts and Control, Sultan


3. Andley KK &Mattoo VJ, Foreign Exchange: Principles and Practice, Sultan


33041- COMPUTER AND BANKING

Objectives:

• To know the basic concept of computers and banking

• To explain the software and hardware system

UNIT 1 Introduction to Computers: What is a computer? - Functions of

computer – Advantages and disadvantages.

UNIT 2 Brief history of computers: – Early computers - Generations of

computers – Types of Computer - Applications of computers.

UNIT 3 Data Representation: Simple computer system – Basic concepts of

data processing – Data – Information – Data Processing cycle.

UNIT 4 Number system : Decimal Number System -Binary number system

– Octal and Hexadecimal – Representation of non- numeric data.

UNIT 5 Computer Number Conversion : Decimal to other base system –

Other base system to Decimal – Other base system to non decimal

system.

UNIT 6 Hardware: Anatomy of computer – CPU –ALU-Memory and its

types– Peripheral controllers – Peripherals – Input / Output devices

– Biometric devices.

UNIT 7 Software: What is software? - Need for software –- Types of

software - Systems software – Operating systems– Application

Software and its features – Software relevant to banking.

UNIT 8 Languages and translators :Machine Language - Assembly

Language – High Level Languages – types – Compilers –

interpreters

UNIT 9 Computer Networks : What is computer Network – Characteristics

– types of network – LAN –WAN –MAN- Intranet –Internet -

Browsing – email communication.

UNIT 10 Computerization in Banks: Stand alone – Computer system – LAN

– Local processing with batch updates – Teller Terminals

UNIT 11 Net Banking: Inter branch reconciliation – Core Banking –

functions - Web based Banking - Client - Server – User

Authentication

UNIT 12 Electronic Transactions: Account Management – EDI - ATMs –

Home banking – EFT –MICR – Phone Banking – Internet Banking

– Mobile Banking – Mobile Banking Apps.

UNIT 13 Security considerations – Accidental damage – backup – firewall -

cyber security in banking – cyber crime in banking

UNIT 14 Power failures and malicious damage – Virus – Anti Virus -

WORMS – Bombs - malware attacks - Operational problems.

REFERENCES

1. Alexis Leon & Mathews Leon, Fundamentals of Information Technology,

2/e,Vikas Publishing

2. Bajwa K S, Bank Mechanisation, Skylark Publication.

3. Srivastava, Computer Applications in Banks, BTC, RBI.

4. Sanjay Soni&Vinayak Aggarwal, Computers and Banking, Sultan Chand

& Sons.

5. Sanjay Saxena A First Course in Computers (Based On Windows 8 And

Ms Office 2013) Vikas Publishing

33042 - INVESTMENT ANALYSIS AND PORTFOLIO MANAGEMENT

Objectives:

To know the basic concept of investmentanalysis

To identify the various techniques in Portfoliomanagement

To evaluate the performance of portfolio.

UNIT1 Investment: Concepts and goals –objectives - Types of

investment – Financial – Real business – Personal – Institutional

– Comparison of investments, speculation, gambling –Hedging

UNIT2 Concepts of portfolio and portfolio management – Goals – Risk

and return trade off – Financial investment avenues – Fixed

income – Varying income securities.

UNIT3 Investment Analysis: Aspects of analysis – Analysis – Return

analysis– Concepts, measures and computation of return of

individual security and portfolio

UNIT4 Risk analysis – Concepts, types, measure, computation of risk of

individual security and portfolio – Valuation analysis – Share

valuation – Bond value – Price earnings analysis.

UNIT5 Approaches to Investment Analysis: Fundamental analysis –

Concept and components – Tools of economy, industry and

companyanalysis

UNIT6 Technical analysis – Concept and tools – Assumption – Theories

–Dow theory – Primary trend –Secondary trend – Minor trend-

Support and Resistance level.

UNIT7 Technical Indicators – Volume of trade, breadth of market , odd lot trading – Moving average analysis – Oscillators –Relative

Strength Index -Chart patterns.

UNIT8 Portfolio Construction and Choice:Simple diversification –

Morkowitz model - Efficient frontier – Utility analysis - Risk-return indifferentcurves

UNIT9 Portfolio choice – Single and two factorial models – Lagrange

multiplier method.

UNIT10 Capital Asset Pricing Model: Assumptions and application –

Capital market line and security marketline- Evaluation of

securities-Market imperfection and SML

UNIT11 Efficient market hypotheses – Theory - Types –application.

UNIT12 The weakly efficient, semi strongly efficient and strongly efficient market forms – Random-Walk theory.

UNIT13 Portfolio Performance: Measures – Sharpe– Portfolio audit and

portfolio revision – Need and methods – Formulaplans.

UNIT14 Portfolio Performance: Measures – Treynor and Jenson –

Portfolio audit and portfolio revision – Need and methods –

Formula plans.

REFERENCE

1. Francis J.C,Investment.

2. Francis J.C, Management ofInvestments.

33043 - PROJECT FINANCE

Objectives:

To explain the basic concept of projectfinance

To understand about the various sources of project finance

To understand the evaluating techniques in projectfinance

UNIT1 Project meaning – Stages in a project cycle: Project

identification, formulation: Technical appraisal, commercial

appraisal , financial appraisal and economic appraisal.

UNIT2 Project Implementation- meaning –stages in implementation -

Project evaluation – types of evaluation -Role of

consultants in projectmanagement:

UNIT3 Sources of finance for a project: Public issue of shares,

debentures, public deposits, leasing, internal generation of funds,

commercial papers, global depository receipts, borrowings

frombanks.

UNIT4 FIs – Venture capital –- stages of venture capital financing-

Innovative instruments in the capitalmarket- convertible

debentures –Global depository receipts – Commercial papers.

UNIT5 Project financing – Estimating the total capital requirements –

Factors determining the fixed capital.

UNIT6 working capital – Judicious financing plan – Capitalgearing-

Matching of requirements with available financial assistance

fromvarious sources.

UNIT7 Process of lending for a project:Sanction – Disburshment and

followup of advances. Managerial appraisal- Evaluation

of managerial skills, past records, management and

working of other group companies –organization setup .

UNIT8 Appraisal of technical aspects: evaluation of appropriative

technology, availability or raw materials and utilities and

safeguards against pollution, effluentdisposal/treatment.

UNIT9 Commercial appraisal – Evaluation of commercial aspects:

Estimation of demand supply gap, distribution channels and

sellingarrangements

UNIT 10 Evaluation of financial aspects: Debt equity ratio, current ratio,

debt service coverage ratio, return on investment, security

margin, internal rate of return and breakeven analysis.

UNIT11 Economic appraisal – Economic analysis: Economies of scale,

employment generation, contribution to government revenue,

political stability, priority and evaluation of international

competitiveness.

UNIT12 Social cost benefitanalysis: Significance- social cost-social

benefits – social rate of return

UNIT13 Project monitoring –Ojectives of monitoring – methods of

monitoring –Recovery mechanism :Legal measures and non legal measures.

UNIT14 Industrial sickness: Warning signals and causes – Rehabilitation

of a sick industrial unit – Role of the board for industrial and

financialreconstruction (BIFR)

REFERENCE

1. B.B. Goel, Project Management: A Development Perspective, Deep and

Deep Publications, NewDelhi

2. A.K. Sengupta, Bank Credit to Industry, Skylark Publications, NewDelhi.

3. Prasanna Chandra, Projects Preparations, Appraisal, Budgeting and

Implementation, Tata McGraw Hill, NewDelhi.

33044 - MUTUAL FUND MANAGEMENT

Objectives:

To know the basic concept and mechanism of mutualfunds

To give information about mutual fund scheme andinstitutions

To know about the functioning of mutual fund in India.

UNIT1 Mutual Fund: Concept – Genesis – Classification of mutual fund

– Portfolioclassification: Equity fund – Debt fund- Growth fund –

Balanced fund.

UNIT2 Operational classification – Open ended fund- closed ended

fund-Advantages of investing in mutual funds- Constrains in

investing in mutual funds.

UNIT3 Role of mutual funds in the development of capital market and

the economy- Growth of Mutual funds in India-

Structure of mutual funds in India

UNIT4 Constitution and Organization of Mutual Funds: Sponsors-Roles

and responsibilities - Trustees – Duties and responsibilities of

trustees–Trust Deed

UNIT5 Custodians: Role and responsibilities – Asset Management

Company - Functions ofan AMC- working mechanism of AMC –

SEBI requirements of AMC.

UNIT6 Operational Activities of Mutual Fund: Designing of schemes-

Launching of a new scheme - marketing of schemes

UNIT7 Portfolio management – Objectives - Process - Investment

strategies

UNIT8 Regulation of Mutual Funds: Securities Exchange Board of India

SEBI (MF) Regulations –Role of Association of Mutual Funds

Industry (AMFI)- Policy developments relating to mutual funds.

UNIT9 Accounting norms – Revenue account – Balance sheet –

Disclosure norms

UNIT10 Net Asset Value (NAV) – Valuation system for NAV Pricing of units and NAV.

UNIT11 Mutual Funds in India: Schemes of Public sector mutual funds in

India- Performance of major public sector mutual funds .

UNIT12 Private sector mutual funds – Schemes of private sector mutual

in India - Performance of major private sector mutual funds.

UNIT13 The UTI: Origin – Objectives – Schemes of the UTI – US 64

imbroglio – Present status ofUTI

UNIT14 Challenges for mutual funds in India in the

liberalizedenvironment.

REFERENCES

1. Lalit K Bansal, Mutual Funds: Management andWorking.

2. Machiraju H R, Merchant Banking: Principles andPractice.

33045 - MERCHANT BANKING

Objectives:

To understand the concept of merchant bankingfinance

To explain about various financial services provided by

merchantbankers

To understand the role of SEBI in merchant bankers

UNIT1 Merchant Banking: Meaning – Evolution -Importance – Activities

of a merchant banker – Project counselling – Loan syndication –

Management of public issues – Underwriting, bankers to issue and

otherservices

UNIT2 Growth of merchant banking in India – Categories of merchant

bankers in India -merchant banking and economic growth- Role

of merchant banking in the development of capital market- SEBI

regulations for merchant bankers.

UNIT3 Stock exchanges in India- BSE –NSE -OTCEI – Regulations -

trading mechanism – members – Contract procedures – Guidelines

– Recent developments andChallenges.

UNIT4 Project related activities of a merchant banker: Identification of

project ideas- Feasibility Study – Technical feasibility -market

survey –Financial viability – Feasibility report - Problem areas of

an enterprise- Corporate counselling

UNIT5 Merchant banker – roles – significance – Advisory guidelines –

custodial services merchant banking institutions – membership -

Licensing.

UNIT6 Loan Syndication: Meaning and scope – Steps in syndication-

Guidelines – mechanism – Documentations –participants.

UNIT7 Corporate securities – Definitions –Types:Equity shares-

Preference shares –Debentures-other securities- Characteristics –

market issue progress - participants.

UNIT8 Capital Issue related activities of a merchant banker: Capital

market -Changing structure of Indian Capital Market – Primary

market –Types of issue Management of pre-issueactivities

UNIT9 Marketing of corporate securities – Steps to be taken by the

issuing company and the lead manager –Underwriting- Indian

scenario- SEBI Guidelines.

UNIT10 Management of post-issue activities –Marketing of Issues-

Pricing of issue Processing of data – Reporting to SEBI – Under

subscription – Bridge loans – Allotment of shares – Listing

ofsecurities.

UNIT11 Service oriented activities of a merchant banker: Mergers and

Amalgamations: Meaning – Purpose – Types ofmergers- Indian

scenario of mergers and amalgamation– Regulation of mergers

and amalgamation in India

UNIT12 Role of merchant bankers in mergers –PortfolioManagement:

Functionsof portfolio managers – Explanation to risk – CAPM

Approach to marketoperations.

UNIT13 Miscellaneous activities of a merchant banker: Venture

capital – Origin – Administration of venture capital fund –

Mutualfund

UNIT14 Advantages – Classification of mutual funds – Factoring –

Mechanism and types offactoring.

REFERENCES

1. Machiraju H R, Merchant Banking: Principles andPractice.

2. Dr.Verma J C, Bharat’s Manual of MerchantBanking.

3. DURATION OF THE PROGRAMME

The course shall consist of two academic years divided into four semesters.

4. Faculty and Support Staff Requirements

This programme requires the following faculty and supporting staffs


Core Faculty * 3

Faculty for Specialization* 2


*At least Assistant Professor Level (Either permanent or part time)

5. Instructional Delivery Mechanism

Each semester there will be one contact programme of 80 hours duration in

theory. The SLM (Self Learning Material) will be supplied to the students in

print form as well as in CD form. The

facetofacecontactsessionsoftheprogrammefortheorycourseswillbeheldattheheadq

uarter / learning centres. The conduct of end semester examinations, evaluation

and issuance of certificates will be done by office of the Controller of

examinations, Alagappa University, Karaikudi.

F) PROCEDURE FOR ADMISSION, CURRICULUM

TRANSACTION, AND EVALUATION

Procedure of Admission

A candidate who has passed any Bachelor Degree from a recognized University in

the Pattern of 10+2+3 shall be permitted to appear and qualify for the programme.

Curriculum Transactions:

The class room teaching would be through conventional lecture, use of OHP,

power point presentation and novel innovative teaching ideas like television and

computer aided instruction. Student seminars would be arranged to improve

their awareness and communicative skill.

Face to face contact session will be conducted as given in below table.

Course Type Face to Face

Contact

Session/semester (inHours)

5 Theory courses with 4 credits

80

Total 80

Evaluation

The examinations shall be conducted for theory to assess the knowledge

acquired during the study. There shall be two systems of examinations viz.,

internal and external examinations. In the case of theory courses, the internal

evaluation shall be conducted as Continuous Internal Assessment via. Student

assignments preparation and seminar, etc. The internal assessment shall

comprise of maximum 25 marks for each course. The end semester examination

shall be of three hours duration to each course at the end of each semester. The

end semester examinations shall comprise of maximum of 75 marks for each

course. The candidate failing in any course(s) will be permitted to appear for

each failed course(s) in the subsequentexamination.

f. 3.2. Distribution of Marks in Continuous Internal Assessments:

The following procedure shall be followed for awarding internal marks for theory courses

Component Marks

Assignments(2)

(12.5+12.5)

25

Total 25

Question paper pattern (Theory)

o The question paper carries a maximum of 75marks.

o The question paper consists of three sections namely Part-A, Part-B andPart-C.

o Part-A consists of 10 questions of 2 marks each (10 x 2 = 20 marks)

with no choice. The candidate should answer allquestions.

o Part-B consists of 5 either or choice questions. Each question

carries 5 marks (5 x 5=25 marks).

o Part-C consists of 5 questions. Each question carries 10 marks.

The candidate should Answer any three questions (10 x 3 =

30marks).

Passing minimum

There shall be no Passing Minimum forInternal.

For External Examination, Passing Minimum shall be of 50% (Fifty

Percentage) of the maximum marks (75) prescribed for thepaper.

In the aggregate (External + Internal) the passing minimum shall be of

50 Mark for each Paper

Grading shall be based on overall marks obtained (internal +external).

Candidate who does not obtain the required minimum marks for a pass in a

course shall be required to appear and pass the same at a

subsequentappearance.

Marks and Grades:

The following table gives the marks, grade points, letter, grades and

classification to indicate the performance of the candidate.



80-89 8.0-8.9 D+ Excellent


70-74 7.0-74 A+ Very Good

60-69 6.0-6.9 A Good

50-59 5.0-5.9 B Average



Ci = Credits earned for the course i in any semester

Gi = Grade Point obtained for course i in any semester.

n refers to the semester in which such courses were credited

For a semester;

Grade Point Average [GPA] = ∑iCiGi/ ∑i Ci

Grade Point Average = Sum of the multiplication of grade points by the

credits of the courses Sum of the credits of the

courses in a semester



CGPA = Sum of the multiplication of grade points by the credits of the

entire programme Sum of the credits of the courses for the

entire programme

CGPA Grad Classification of Final

Result

9.5-10.0


O+

O

First Class-

Exemplary*




D++

D+

D

First Class with

Distinction*



A++

A+

First Class

6.0 and above but below 6.5 A



B+

B

Second Class


*The candidates who have passed in the first appearance and within the

prescribed semester of the PG Programme areeligible.

Maximum duration for completion of the course

The maximum duration for the programme shall not exceed five years after the

completion of the minimum duration of the programme.

Commencement of this regulation

These regulations shall come into effect from the academic year 2018-19 for

students who are admitted to the first year of the course during the academic

year 2018-19.

Fee structure

G) REQUIREMENT OF THE LIBRARY RESOURCES: LIBRARY RESOURCES

The Central Library is one of the important central facilities of Alagappa

University. It has text book, reference books, conference proceedings, back

volumes, standards, and non-book material such as CD-ROMs and audios. The

central Library procured several e-books in different areas. The library also

subscribes to about 250 current periodicals. The Directorate of Distance

Education of Alagappa University has adequate number of copies of books

related to Management Programme.

COST ESTIMATE OF THE PROGRAMME AND THE PROVISIONS:

Sl. No. Nature of Expenditure Amount in Rs.

(Approx.) 1 Programme Development 10,00,000/-

2 Programme Delivery 20,00,000/-

3 Programme Maintenance 3,00,000/-



1 Admission Processing

Fees

300.00 -

2 Course Fees 13200.00 13200.00

3 ICT Fees 150.00 150.00

TOTAL 13650.00 13350.00

i) QUALITY ASSURANCE MECHANISM AND EXPECTED

PROGRAMME OUTCOMES

The feedback from students on teaching will be collected every semester

using standard formats.

Feedback on the curriculum will also be collected from the experiences

of the students which help teachers in fine tuning of deliverables in

theclassroom.

It helps in improving the standard of teaching as expected by thestudents.

Exit survey feedback on various parameters to improve and quality of

the programme and support services like course material, library

andinfrastructure.

It helps to Strengthen the contents of the program to meet the

requirements of the employment market and keep the curriculum as a

treasure ofknowledge.

This programme provides Opportunities for students to develop and

demonstrate knowledge and understanding, skills, qualities and

otherattributes.

****




MBA (CO-OPERATIVE MANAGEMENT)

DIRECTORATE OF DISTANCE EDUCATIONALAGAPPA UNIVERSITY


PROGRAMME PROJECT REPORT FOR

MBA CO-OPERATIVE MANAGEMNT


Business Studies have fascinated humans for two reasons, namely generating interest and

augmenting essentials of running a firm effectively. That is why their study is enchanting and

glorifying. The primary objective of this programme is to provide ample exposure to subjects

from the fields of business legacy and accountancy, equip the Students for entry level jobs in

industry and to contribute to the economic development of the country.



Mission: Achieving Excellence in all spheres of Education, with particular emphasis on

‘PEARL”- Pedagogy, Extension, Administration, Research and Learning

Vision: Affording High Quality Higher Education to the learners so that they are transformed

into intellectually competent human resources that will help in the uplift of the nation to

Educational, Social, Technological, Environmental and Economic Magnificence.

Therefore, the introduction of MBA CO-OPERATIVE MANAGEMENT programme in the

Directorate of Distance Education will contribute substantially in fulfilling the mission of

Alagappa University. Such a higher education in subject with appropriate Practical Exposer

will enrich the human resources for the uplift of the Nation to Educational, Social,

Technological, Environmental and Economic Magnificence (ESTEEM).


• Working Professionals

• Entrepreneurs• Service Personnel

• Academic Faculty• Government Officials• Researchers

• Home makers• Unemployed Graduates


To Attain Leadership in spearheading qualitative and responsible academic programs relevantto the society through cost effective off-campus distance mode of education. knowledge andunderstanding, skills, qualities and other attributes in the following areas:

• The fundamental concepts of Management

• The higher-level taxonomy and diversity of Business Studies.

• How principles of Business can be applied to problems

• Internship training in Industry

• Undertake Inter tasks and techniques.

• Inter-disciplinary knowledge like statistics, Mathematics, Computer and E-Banking.

• Using the SPSS package for the analysis of data

• It also improves the Intellectual skills of the students.

• In nutshell, these skills will improve the performance of the students parameters.

E )INSTRUCTIONAL DESIGNMBA COOPORATIVE MANAGEMENT

CourseCode

Title CIAMax.

ESEMax.

TOTMax.

C

I Semester36111 Management – Principles and Practices 25 75 100 436112 Organizational Behaviour 25 75 100 436113 Managerial Economics 25 75 100 436114 Quantitative Techniques 25 75 100 436115 Financial and Management Accounting 25 75 100 4

Total 125 375 500 20II Semester

36121 Research Methods 25 75 100 436122 Business Environment 25 75 100 436123 Business Laws 25 75 100 436124 Management Information System 25 75 100 436125 Human Resource Management 25 75 100 4

Total 125 375 500 20III Semester

36131 Marketing Management 25 75 100 436132 Financial Management 25 75 100 4

36133 Cooperation : policies and Development 25 75 100 4

36134 Cooperatives and Allied Law 25 75 100 436135 Cooperative Institutions – Credit & Non

Credit25 75 100 4

Total 125 375 500 20

IV Semester36141 Management of Cooperative Enterprises 25 75 100 436142 Dynamics of Cooperation 25 75 100 436143 Entrepreneurship Development in

Cooperative25 75 100 4

36144 Cooperative Accounting , Finance and Audit 25 75 100 4

36145 Project 25 75 100 4

Total 125 375 500 20

Grand Total 2000 80

Course Code Legend:

3 6 1 Y Z

361- M.B.A ProgrammeY -Semester NumberZ- Course Number in the Semester

CIA: Continuous Internal Assessment, ESE: End Semester Examination, TOT: Total,C: Credit Points, Max.: Maximum




Objectives:• To introduce the basic concepts of Management functions and principles• To learn the scientific decision making and modern trend in the management process• To understand the contemporary practices and issues in management

UNIT 1 Management: Definition – Nature, Scope and Functions – Evolution ofManagement – Management thought in modern trend – Patterns of themanagement analysis – Management Vs. Administration - Management andSociety: The external Environment, Social Responsibility and Ethics.

UNIT 2 Management Science and Theories : Contributions of FW Taylor, Henri Fayol,Elton Mayo, Roethilisberger, H.A.Simon and P.F Drucker - Universality ofManagement - Relevance of management to different types of organization.

UNIT 3 Planning: Nature and Purpose – Principles and planning premises –Components of planning as Vision, Mission, Objectives, Managing ByObjective (MBO) Strategies, Types and Policies -Planning and DecisionMaking: Planning process.

UNIT 4 Decision making: Meanings and Types – Decision-making Process underConditions of Certainty and Uncertainty – Rational Decision MakingStrategies, Procedures, Methods, Rules, Projects and Budgets.

UNIT 5 Organizing: Nature, Importance, Principles, purpose and Scope - Organizingfunctions of management – Classifications of organization – Principles andtheories of organization – Effective Organizing – Organizational Culture andGlobal Organizing.

UNIT 6 Organizational Structure – Departmentalization – Span of control – Line andstaff functions – Formal and Informal Groups in Organizations - Authority andresponsibility - Centralization and decentralization – Delegation of authority –Committees – Informal organization.

UNIT 7 Staffing: General Principles of Staffing- Importance, techniques, Staffauthority and Empowerment in the organization – Selection and Recruitment -Orientation - Career Development - Career stages – Training – PerformanceAppraisal.

UNIT 8 Creativity and Innovation – Motivation - Meaning – Importance – Humanfactors of Motivation – Motivation Theories: Maslow, Herzberg, Mc Gregor(X&Y), Ouchi (Z) ,Vroom, Porter-Lawler, McClelland and Adam –Physiological and psychological aspects of motivation .

UNIT 9 Directing : Meaning, Purpose, and Scope in the organization – Leadership:Meaning, Leadership styles, Leadership theories: Trait, Contingency,Situation, Path-Goal, Tactical, Transactional, Transformational and Grid.

Leaders: Type, Nature, Significance and Functions, Barriers, Politics andEthics. Leader Vs. Manager.

UNIT 10 Communications: Meaning – Types – Process – Communication in thedecision making – Global Leading - Effective communication in the levels ofmanagement. – Uses of Communication to Planning, Organizing, coordinatingand controlling.

UNIT 11 Co-ordination: Concept; Meaning, Characteristics, Importance in theorganization, Co-ordination process and principles - Techniques of Effectiveco-ordination in the organization - Understanding and managing the groupprocess.

UNIT 12 Business ethics: Relevance of values in Management; Holistic approach formanagers indecision-making; Ethical Management: Role of organizationalculture in ethics – Ethics Committee in the organization.

UNIT 13 Controlling: Objectives and Process of control Devices of control – Integratedcontrol – Special control techniques- Contemporary - Perspectives in Deviceof Controls

UNIT 14 New Perspectives in Management - Strategic alliances – Core competence –Business process reengineering – Total quality management – Six Sigma-Benchmarking- Balanced Score-card.

REFERENCES






McGraw Hill.






Objectives:• To understand the personality trades and influence on the organization.• To imbibe the necessary conceptual understanding of behaviour related people• To learn the modern trends, theories and changes in organizational Behaviour.

UNIT 1 Organizational Behaviour: History – Meaning Elements – Evolution,Challenges and Opportunities – Trends – disciplines – Approaches – Models –Management functions relevance to organizational Behaviour – GlobalEmergence of OB as a discipline.

UNIT 2 Personality – Determinants, Structure, Behaviour, Assessment, IndividualBehaviour: Personality & Attitudes- Development of personality – Nature anddimensions of attitude – Trait Theory – Organizational fit – OrganizationalCommitment

UNIT 3 Emotions – Emotional Intelligence – Implications of Emotional Intelligence onManagers – EI as Managerial tool – EI performance in the organization –Attitudes: Definitions – Meaning – Attitude relationship with behaviour –Types – Consistency

UNIT 4 Individual Behaviour and process of the organization: Learning, Emotions,Attitudes, Perception, Motivation, Ability, Job satisfaction, Personality, Stressand its Management – Problem solving and Decision making – InterpersonalCommunication - Relevance to organizational behaviour.

UNIT 5 Group Behaviour: Group Dynamics - Theories of Group Formation - Formaland Informal Groups in organization and their interaction - Group norms –Group cohesiveness – Team: Importance and Objectives - Formation of teams– Team Work- Group dynamics – Issues - Their relevance to organizationalbehaviour.

UNIT 6 Organizational Power: Organizational Power: Definition, Nature,Characteristics - Types of powers - Sources of Power - Effective use of power– Limitations of Power – Power centre in Organization.

UNIT 7 Organizational Politics: Definition – Political behaviour in organization -Factors creating political behaviour – Personality and Political Behaviour -Techniques of managing politics in organization – Impact of organizationalpolitics.

UNIT 8 Organizational Conflict Management: Stress Management: Meaning – Types –Sources and strategies resolve conflict – Consequences – Organizationalconflict: Constructive and Destructive conflicts - Conflict Process - Strategiesfor encouraging constructive conflict - Strategies for resolving destructiveconflict.

UNIT 9 Organizational Dynamics: Organizational Dynamics – OrganizationalEfficiency, Effectiveness and Excellence: Meaning and Approaches – Factorsaffecting the organizational Climate.

UNIT 10 Organizational Culture: Meaning, significance – Theories – OrganizationalClimate – Creation, Maintenance and Change of Organizational Culture –Impact of organizational culture on strategies – Issues in OrganizationalCulture.

UNIT 11 Inter personal Communication: Essentials, Networks, Communicationtechnologies – Non-Verbal communications Barriers – Strategies to overcomethe barriers. Behavioral Communication in organization - Uses to Business

UNIT 12 Organizational Change: Meaning, Nature and Causes of organizational changeOrganizational Change –Importance – Stability Vs Change – Proactive Vs.Reaction change – the change process – Resistance to change – Managingchange.

UNIT 13 Organizational Behaviour responses to Global and Cultural diversity,challenges at international level, Homogeneity and heterogeneity of Nationalcultures, Differences between countries.

UNIT 14 Organizational Development: Meaning, Nature and scope – Features of OD –OD Interventions- Role of OD – Problems and Process of OD – process ODand Process of Intervention - Challenges to OD- Learning Organizations -Organizational effectiveness Developing Gender sensitive workplace

REFERENCES





2006.




Bacon, 1993.

36113 - MANAGERIAL ECONOMICSObjectives:

• To understand the economic principles and its applications in business• To develop economics based analytic skills for business• To make the learners to strong in economical approach

UNIT 1 Economics: Introduction – Meaning, nature and scope of ManagerialEconomics – General Foundations of managerial Economics – EconomicApproach – Working of Economic system - Circular flow activities -Economics & Business Decisions - Relationship between Economic theoryand Managerial Economics.

UNIT 2 Business Decisions: Role of managerial Economics in Decision making –Decision making under Risk and Uncertainty - Concepts of OpportUNITycost, - Production possibility curve – Incremental Concepts - Cardinal andOrdinal approaches to consumer Behaviour Time Value of Money –

UNIT 3 Consumer Behaviour: Marginalism – Equilibrium and Equi-marginalism andtheir role in business decision making. – Equi-Marginal principles – Utilityanalysis – Total and Marginal Utility – Law of diminishing marginal utility –Marshallian approach and Indifference curve analysis.

UNIT 4 Demand analysis: Meaning, Functions - Determinants of demand-Law ofDemand – Demand Estimation and Forecasting - Applications of demand inanalysis - Elasticity of Demand: Types, Measures and Role in BusinessDecisions.

UNIT 5 Supply Analysis: Determinants of supply- Elasticity of Supply- Measures andSignificance - Derivations of market demand – Demand Estimation and Forecasting- Demand and Supply equilibrium – Giffen Paradox

UNIT 6 Production Functions: Managerial uses of production function - Cobb-Douglasand other production functions - Isoquants – Short run and long runproduction function – Theory of production – Empirical estimations ofproduction functions.

UNIT 7 Forms of Markets: Meaning and Characteristics - Market Equilibrium:Practical Importance, Market Equilibrium and Changes in Market Equilibrium.Pricing Functions: Market Structures - Pricing and output decisions underdifferent competitive conditions: Monopoly Monopolistic completion andOligopoly

UNIT 8 Strategic Behaviour of the firms and Game Theory - Nash Equilibrium:Implications – Prisoner’s Dilemma: Types of strategy – Price and Non pricecompetition – Relation to the firm behaviour.

UNIT 9 Cost and Return: Cost function and cost output relationship – Economics andDiseconomies of scale - Cost control and cost reduction- Cost Behaviour andBusiness Decision- Relevant costs for decision-making- Traditional andModern theory of Cost.

UNIT 10 New Product Penetrative Decision and Skimming the cream Pricing-Government control over pricing - Concept of Profit- Types and Theories ofProfit by Knight (Uncertainty), Schumpeter (Innovation), Clark (Dynamic)and Hawley (Risk) - Profit maximization – Cost volume profit analysis – Riskand Return Relationship.

UNIT 11 Profit and Investment Analysis: Meaning – Measurement of profit – Theoriesof Pricing- Profit planning and forecasting- Profit and Wealth maximization –Cost volume profit analysis – Investment analysis and Evaluation: IRR, NPVand APV techniques.

UNIT 12 Macro-economic Factors: Nature, Importance ; Economic Growth andDevelopment - Business cycle – Phases and Business Decision- Inflation -Factors causing Inflation and Deflation - Control measures – Balance ofpayment Trend and its implications in managerial decision.

UNIT 13 National Income: Introduction Meaning – Theories – Methods ofMeasurement - Sectoral and Population distributions – Per capita Income:Definition – Calculations – Uses – Limitations – GDP – GNP - Recentdevelopments in Indian Economy.

UNIT 14 Economic Regulations of Business: Introduction – Antitrust theory andRegulations – The structure – Conduct – Performance paradigm –Concentration: Overview – Measuring concentration – Regulation ofExternalities.

REFERENCES1. Dominick Salvatore, Managerial Economics in a Global Economy,OxfordUniversity

Press, 2011.








Pearson






Objectives:• To help develop analytical skills based on problem solving approach• To learn quadrature problems solving of business issues.• To acquire the knowledge in statistics and their use in business decision making.

UNIT 1 Basic Quantitative Concepts: Place of quantitative analysis in the practice ofmanagement – Problem definition: Models and their development. Variablesnotion of Mathematical models – concept of trade off – Notion of constants –concept of Interest.

UNIT 2 Basic Concept of differentiation – integration – Optimization concepts – use ofdifferentiation for optimization of business problem Optimization Statistics:Meaning and Applications of Statistics in business decision making andresearch - Collection, Tabulation and presentation of data - Measures of centraltendency: Mean, Median and Mode. Measures of dispersion

UNIT 3 Variables and function: Linear and Non-linear –Graphical representation offunctions and their applications in cost and revenue behavior. Slope and itsrelevance –Use of functional relationships to understand elasticity of demands,Relationship between costs and level of activity, Decisions on MinimizingCosts and Maximizing output/profits.

UNIT 4 Linear Programming: Introduction to the linear programming – Concepts ofoptimization- Formulation of different types of linear programming –Standardfrom of LP problems - Importance and practical implementation in Industry

UNIT 5 Simple regression and Correlation analysis: Introduction, Correlation,Correlation analysis, linear regression analysis and Co-efficient. Duality andsensitivity analysis for decision-making- Solving LP using graphical andsimplex method (only simple problems) – Interpreting the solution fordecision-making

UNIT 6 Special Algorithms of LPP: Transportation Algorithm - Balanced andUnbalanced Problem Formulation and solving methods: North West Corner,Vogel’s Approximation-MODI method- Assignment and Travelling ExecutiveAlgorithms

UNIT 7 Theory of Probability: Introduction to the Concept – Development ofprobability – Areas and Utilisation of probability theories in the Business –Sample space – terminology – Types of probability.

UNIT 8 Theoretical Probability Distributions: Introduction - Concept of events –Probability of events – Joint, conditional and marginal probabilitiesProbability distributions: Binomial, Poisson and Normal – Features andApplications – Use of Normal Tables.

UNIT 9 Operational research for Decision Making: Historical background andDevelopments – Definition – Phases in the use of Operations research –

Models – Characteristics of quantitative methods - Benefits and Limitations ofQuantitative methods.

UNIT 10 Sequencing /Scheduling Methods : Concepts – terminology – Notations –Assumption for scheduling models – Job sequencing priorities – Processingthe job and Mass production system.

UNIT 11 Simulation Techniques: Introduction to simulation as an aid to decision-making- Advantages and Disadvantages of Simulation – Applications ofsimulations models – Types: Inventory, Cash, and Project – Random Numbers.

UNIT 12 Queuing Theory: Introduction – Definition – Queue priorities Productlaunching problems using Monte Carlo simulation- Queuing Theory: M/M/1queuing model and applications.

UNIT 13 Decision Analysis: Concepts – Definition – Decision Tables Pay-off and Losstables – Expected value of pay-off – Expected value of Perfect Formation –decision making process

UNIT 14 Decision Tree Analysis: Decision making environments – Concept ofPosterior probabilities Decision Tree approach to choose optimal course ofaction Criteria for decision – Mini-max, Maxi-max, Minimizing MaximalRegret and their applications.

REFERENCES





4. Richard I Levin, & C. Atkinson Kirkpatrick, Quantitative Approaches to

Management, McGraw-Hill.






9. Dharani Venkatakrishnan, Operations Research: Principles and Problems.



Objectives:• To enable the students to learn basic accounting principles, concepts.• To practice Financial and Management accounting applications• To make the learners familiarize in managerial decision making.

UNIT 1 Accounting: Definition – Accounting for historical function and managerialfunction - Types of Accounting- Management, Management and Costaccounting – Scope for Accounting-Managerial Uses of Managementaccounting and Financial Accounting.

UNIT 2 Accounting Concepts and Conventions – Accounting standards - FinancialAccounting Definitions – Principles – Accounting standards - Double entrysystem of accounting: Accounting books – Preparation of journal and ledger,subsidiary books.

UNIT 3 Preparation of Trial Balance – Errors and rectification – Classifications ofcapital and Revenue – Fixed Assets and Depreciation accounting – Preparationof Manufacturing accounting- Preparation of Final Accounts - Accountingfrom incomplete records – Statements of affairs methods

UNIT 4 Conversion methods – Preparation of Trading, Profit & Loss Account andBalance Sheet from incomplete records – Depreciation methods - Straight linemethod, Written down value method, Sinking fund method.

UNIT 5 Financial Statement Analysis - Objectives - Reorganizing the FinancialStatement information -Techniques of Financial Statement Analysis:Comparative Statements, Common – Size statement, Trend Percentage -

UNIT 6 Management Statement Analysis: Management statements – Nature ofmanagement statements – Limitations of management statements – Analysisof interpretation -Types of analysis- Tools of analysis: Trend analysis,Common size statements and Comparative statements;

UNIT 7 Accounting Ratios: Construction of balance sheet using ratios (problems) –Financial ratios – Types: Profitability ratios – Turnover ratios – Liquidityratios – Proprietary ratios – Market earnings ratios- Uses and limitations ofratios - Dupont analysis.

UNIT 8 Fund Flow Analysis: Need and meaning – Preparation of schedule of changesin working capital and the fund flow statement – Workings forComputation of various sources and uses - Preparation of Fund FlowStatement

UNIT 9 Cash flow Analysis: Meaning and importance Managerial uses of cash flowstatement – Differences between fund flow and cash flow analysis - Uses andlimitation of fund flow statement- Preparation of cash flow statement

UNIT 10 Cost Accounting: Cost Accounting - Meaning - Distinction between FinancialAccounting and Cost Accounting - Cost Terminology: Cost, Cost Centre, CostUNIT - Elements of Cost - Cost Sheet – Problems - Overhead CostAllocations: Over and under Absorption. Job and Contract Costing,

UNIT 11 Operating Costing: Material Cost Accounting, Perpetual Inventory Control,Inventory Valuation, EOQ, ABC Analysis, Setting of Reorder Level,Maximum Level, Minimum Level, Labour Cost Accounting, Remunerationand Incentive Schemes- Reconciliation of Financial and Cost Accounting

UNIT 12 Marginal Costing: Definition – Difference between marginal costing andabsorption costing – Break- even point Analysis - Contribution, p/v Ratio,margin of safety - Decision making under marginal costing system-key factoranalysis, make or buy decisions, export decision, sales mix decision-Problems

UNIT 13 Budgeting and Budgetary Control: Concept and Need for Budgeting-Classification of budgets – Preparation of Sales, Production, Material,Purchase and Cash Budgets –Budgetary control system – Mechanism – Masterbudget.

UNIT 14 Capital Budgeting System: Importance – Methods of capital expenditureappraisal – Payback period method – ARR method – DCF methods – NPV andIRR methods – Their rationale – Capital rationing.

REFERENCES1. Arulanandam& K.S. Raman,Advanced Accounting, Himalaya Publishing House.






Publishers.


Publication.




36121 - RESEARCH METHODSObjectives:

• To Understand the basic principles of research and design• To practice the research process, tools and techniques• To facilitate managerial decision making

UNIT 1 Research Bases: Definition and applications of business research; Types ofresearch –descriptive, exploratory, correlational, explanatory, quantitative,qualitative; Steps in the research process; establishing operational definitions

UNIT 2 Research scope - Recent advancements in research. Distinction between Pure& Applied, Historical & Futuristic, Analytical & Synthetic, Descriptive &Prescriptive, Survey & Experimental and Case & Generic Researches

UNIT 3 Planning of Research: Research problem – Identification, selection andformulation of research problem – Review of literature in the field of business- Identifying objectives of the research.

UNIT 4 Economic management: Use in identifying Research Gaps and Techniques –Hypothesis – Meaning – Sources and Types of Hypothesis – HypothesisFormulation for testing – Research design – Factors affecting research design– Evaluation of research design

UNIT 5 Variables construction for Hypothesis: Identifying variables - Constructinghypotheses – functions, characteristics, types of hypotheses - Significance ofresearch in social sciences – Induction and deduction.

UNIT 6 Sampling Design: Census method and sampling method for investigation –Principle of sampling – Essentials of a good sampling – sampling frame;Methods of sampling: Probability, non-probability, mixed sampling designs;

UNIT 7 Construction of sampling for Finite and Infinite populations – Sample sizedetermination– Calculations - Factors affecting the size of the sample – Biasedsample – Sampling and non-sampling errors.

UNIT 8 Sources and Collection of Data: Sources of data – Primary and secondary data– Modes of data collection – Observation: Types and Techniques –Interview:Types and conduct – Preparation for an interview – Effective interviewtechniques – Limitations of interview

UNIT 9 Schedule: Meaning and kinds – Essentials of a good schedule – Procedure forthe formulation of a schedule – Questionnaire: Meaning and types – Format ofa good questionnaire– Schedules Vs. Questionnaires

UNIT 10 Scaling techniques: Meaning, Importance, Types of measurement scales –Nominal, Ordinal, Interval, Ratio; Methods of their construction ofQuestionnaires or Schedules – Pre-testing of Data Collection Tools- Validityand Reliability – Methods.

UNIT 11 Processing and Analysis of Data: Meaning – Importance – Process of dataanalysis – Editing – Coding – Tabulation – Diagrams – Univariate, Bivariateand Multi-variant analysis

UNIT 12 Test of Significance: Fundamentals on Test Procedure- Testing forsignificance of Mean/Proportion and difference between Means/Proportions- FTest for Means and Chi-square test Contingency Table - Parametric Test: Ttest, F Test and Z test

UNIT 13 Non-parametric Test: Concept and Types: Mann Whitney Test- Test, KruskalWallis, sign test. Multivariate analysis-factor, cluster, MDS, Discriminantanalysis - The process of interpretation of Test Results– Guidelines for makingvalid interpretation

UNIT 14 Report Writing : Role and types of reports – Contents of research report –Steps involved in drafting reports – Principles of good report writing –Grammatical Quality – Language flow- Data Support- DiagrammaticElucidation- References and Annotations – Clarity and Brevity ofexpressions- Features of a good Report- Criteria for evaluating researchreports/ research findings.

REFERENCES

1. John W Best & James V. Kahn Research in Education, Allyn and Bacon, 20092. Anderson et-al, Thesis and Assignment Writing, Wiley, New Delhi, 1989.3. William Josiah Goode and Paul K. Hatt, Methods of Social Research, McGraw

Hill, 1981.4. Wilkinson and Bhandarkar, Methods and Techniques of Social Research, 2003,

HPH.5. Earl R. BabbieRobert, ThePractice of Social Research, Cengage Learning, 2010.6. B. Burns & A. Burns, Business Research Methods and Statistics Using SPSS, Sage

Publications, 2008.7. Krishnaswami and Ranganatham, Research Methodology in social Sciences, HPH,

Mumbai8. Bryman & Bell: Business Research Methods, OUP.9. Pauline V Young, Scientific Social Surveys and Research, Prentice-Hall,

(Digitalized) 2007.10. C.R.Kothari, Research Methodology: Methods and Techniques, 2009

36122 - BUSINESS ENVIRONMENTObjectives:

• To understand the concepts and constituents of Business environment• To know the environmental issues in the business context• To analyze the changes in the global environmental relating to business

UNIT 1 Business Environment: Introduction: Concepts – Significance - Dynamicfactors of environment – Importance of scanning the environment – Macro andMicro Environment – Micro and Macro Economics to the business –Constituents of Business environment

UNIT 2 Fundamental issues captured in PESTLE– Political, Economic, Socio-cultural,Technological, Legal and Ecological environment- Opportunities and Threatsas environmental issues to address by Businesses.

UNIT 3 Political Environment: Government and Business – Political Systems, PoliticalStability and Political Maturity as conditions of business growth - Role ofGovernment in Business: Entrepreneurial, Catalytic, Competitive, Supportive,Regulative and Control functions

UNIT 4 Government and Economic planning: Industrial policies and promotionschemes – Government policy and SSI – Interface between Government andpublic sector - Guidelines to the Industries – Industrial Developmentstrategies; salient features, Role of public and private sectors, Comparativecost dynamics.

UNIT 5 Economic Environment: Phase of Economic Development and its impact-GDP Trend and distribution and Business Opportunities – capacity utilisation– Regional disparities and evaluation - Global Trade and investmentenvironment.

UNIT 6 Financial System and Business capital: Monetary and Fiscal policies -Financial Market structure – Money and Capital markets – Stock Exchangesand Its regulations – Industrial Finance - Types, Risk - Cost-Role of Banks;Industrial Financial Institutions - Role of Management Institutions

UNIT 7 Role of Central Bank- Fiscal System: Government Budget and TaxationMeasures- Fiscal Deficits and Inflation- FDI and collaboration –ForeignCapital tapping by businesses- Export-Import policy – Foreign Exchange andBusiness Development.

UNIT 8 Labour Environment: Labour Legislation – Labour and social securities –Industrial Relations – Trade Unions – Workers participation in management –Exit Policy – Quality Circles.

UNIT 9 Social and Technological Environment: Societal Structure and Features-Entrepreneurial Society and its implications for business – Social and cultural

factors and their implications for business- Technology Development Phase inthe Economy as conditioner of Business Opportunities

UNIT 10 Technology Environment: Technology Policy- Technology Trade and transfer-Technology Trends in India- Role of Information Technology – CleanTechnology. – Time lag in technology – Appropriate technology andTechnology adoption- Impact of technology on globalization.

UNIT 11 Legal and Ecological Environment: Legal Environment as the all-envelopingfactor from inception, location, incorporation, conduct, expansion and closureof businesses – IDRA and Industrial licensing – Public, Private, Joint andCooperative Sectors.

UNIT 12 Legal Aspects of Entering Primary and Secondary Capital Markets- Law onPatents- Law on Consumer Protection- Law on Environmental Protection-Need for Clean energy and Reduction of Carbon footprint.

UNIT 13 New Economic Policy Environment in India: Liberalization, Privatization andGlobalization (LPG): Efficiency Drive through Competition- Facets ofLiberalization and impact on business growth

UNIT 14 Aspects of Privatization and impact on business development– Globalizationand Enhanced Opportunities and Threats – Extended competition in Input andOutput Markets Role of WTO, IMF and World Bank in global economicdevelopment.

REFERENCES



McGraw-Hill, 2008.





House, 2008.

7. Maheswari & Gupta, Government, Business and Society.

36123 - BUSINESS LAWSObjectives:

• To understand the legal structure and provision for running a business• To learn various acts, enactments and amendments of mercantile law• To know the various aspects of Business law for legal process.

UNIT 1 Indian Contract Act 1872: Contract – Meaning – Essential elements – Natureand formation of contract: Nature, elements, Classifications of Contracts onthe basis of Validity, Formation and Performance– offer and acceptance

UNIT 2 Offer and Acceptance: Introduction – Proposal – acceptance –Communications of offer, Acceptance and Revocations – Offer and acceptanceby Post.

UNIT 3 Consideration: Definitions, Types of consideration – essentials ofConsideration – Privity of Contracts: Exceptions – Capacity: Consent –Legality of object – Quasi contract Discharge of contract - Remedies forbreach of contract – Quasi contracts.

UNIT 4 Special Contracts: Contract of Indemnity and Guarantee – Bailment andPledge – Law of Agency-Definition – Rights of Surety -Discharge of Surety –Bailment and Pledge: Introduction, Classifications, Duties and Rights of Bailerand Bailee – termination of Bailment -

UNIT 5 Formation of contract under Sale of Goods Act, 1930: Contract of sale -Conditions and Warranties - Transfer of property - Performance of thecontract: Essentials of valid tender performance, Performance reciprocalpromise- Rights of an unpaid seller.

UNIT 6 Laws on Carriage of Goods: Duties, Rights and Liabilities of CommonCarriers under: (i) The Carriers Act, 1865. (ii) The Railways Act, 1989, (iii)The Carriage of Goods by Sea Act, 1925, (iv) The Carriage by Air Act, 1972and (v) The Carriage By Road Act, 2007

UNIT 7 Negotiable Instruments Act, 1881: Negotiable Instruments: Features – Types-Parties – Material alteration – Parties to negotiable instruments – Presentationsof negotiable instrument.

UNIT 8 Insurance: Definition and sources of Law – Judicial set up in India ––Insurance as a contract -History of Insurance Legislation in India - Legalprinciples - Fundamental Principles of Life Insurance Fire Insurance andMarine Insurance.

UNIT 9 Indian Partnership Act, 1932: Meaning and test of partnership – registration offirms Life Insurance Corporation Act 1956 – General Insurance BusinessNationalization Act 1973.

UNIT 10 Partners Relations: Introduction – Eligibility to be a partner – Registration ofchange in partner – Limited Liabilities of partnership - Dissolution of firms -Characteristics – Kinds – Incorporation of Companies – Memorandum ofAssociation – Articles of Association

UNIT 11 Companies Act 1956: Nature and kinds of companies – Prospectus –Disclosure Needs - Management and Administration – Director –Appointment, Powers and Duties

UNIT 12 Formation of a Company : Introduction – process - Minutes and Resolutions –E-Filling of documents under Ministry of Corporate Affairs (MCA) 21-Management of companies –Meetings- Types- Requirements -AGM and EGM– Board Meeting

UNIT 13 Law of Information Technology: Introduction – Rationale behind IT act 2000– Information technology Act 2000: Scheme of the IT Act 2000: Digitalsignature: attribution; Acknowledgement and dispatch of Electronics Record –Regulation certifying authorities.

UNIT 14 Protection of minority interest: Introduction - Methods of Winding-up - TheRight to Information Act, 2005 Right to know, Salient features of the Act,obligation of public Authority, Designation of Public Information officer,Request for obtaining information,

REFERENCES


2010.







Objectives:• To learn the principles of Management Information System for organizations• To understand the uses , function of application MIS in organization• To analyze the scope of MIS for business organizations

UNIT 1 Foundations of Information System: Information system: Meaning, Role –System concepts – Organization as a system – Components of Informationsystem – Various activities of IS and Types of IS

UNIT 2 Information System: Concepts of Information System and Managementinformation systems design and development-Implementation testing andconversion- Evolution and element of MIS

UNIT 3 MIS : Definition – Characteristics and basic requirements of MIS – Structureof MIS- Approaches to MIS development- Computerized MIS- Pre-requisitesof an effective MIS- Limitations of MIS.

UNIT 4 MIS and Decision support System (DSS): MIS Vs. data processing – MIS anddecision support system – MIS and information resource management – DSSand AI – Overview of AI - DSS models and software.

UNIT 5 MIS and Operations Research- Executive information and Decision supportsystems – Artificial intelligence and expert system – Merits and De Merits –Pitfalls in MIS.

UNIT 6 MIS in Indian organizations – Recent developments in information technology- Installation of Management Information & Control System in Indianorganization

UNIT 7 Computers and Communication: Information technology and Globalintegration –On-line information services – Electronic bulletin board systems –The internet, electronic mail, interactive video

UNIT 8 Communication Channels: Advantages disadvantages – Communicationnetworks – Local area networks – Wide area networks – Video conferencing-Relevance to MIS- Usage in Business process.

UNIT 9 Functional Information systems: MIS for Research Production - MIS forMarketing - MIS for Personnel - MIS for Finance - MIS for Inventory- MISfor Logistics- MIS for Product Development- MIS for Market Development.

UNIT 10 Client/ Server Computing: Communication servers – Digital networks –Electronic data interchange and its applications - Enterprise resource planningsystems (ERP Systems) – Inter-organizational information systems – Valueadded networks – Networking.

UNIT 11 Electronic Commerce and Internet: E-Commerce bases – E-Commerce andInternet – M-Commerce- Electronic Data Inter-change (EDI) - Applications ofinternet and website management - Types of Social Media - uses of socialmedia in business organization

UNIT 12 Computer System and Resources: Computers systems: Types and Types ofcomputer system processing - Secondary storage media and devices – Inputand output devices – Hardware standards – Other acquisition issues.

UNIT 13 Managing Information Technology: Managing Information Resources andtechnologies – IS architecture and management - Centralized, Decentralizedand Distributed - EDI, Supply chain management & Global Informationtechnology Management.

UNIT 14 Security and Ethical Challenges: IS controls - facility control and proceduralcontrol - Risks to online operations - Denial of service, spoofing - Ethics for ISprofessional - Societal challenges of Information technology

REFERENCES


2011.



2008.








Objective:

• To understand the concepts and methods and techniques of Human ResourceManagement

• To know the Human resource management theories and real time practices• To identify the contemporary issues in human resource management

UNIT 1: Introduction to Human Resource Management: Concept, Definition,Objectives, Nature and Scope of HRM - Functions of HRM – Evolution ofhuman resource management - Role and structure of Human ResourceFunction in organizations- Challenges in Human Resource Management

UNIT 2 Human Resource Management Approaches: Phases of human resourceManagement- The importance of the human factor – Competitive challenges ofHRM – HRM Models – Roles and responsibilities of HR department.

UNIT 3 Human Resource Planning: Personnel Policy - Characteristics - Role ofhuman resource manager – Human resource policies – Need, Scope andProcess – Job analysis – Job description – Job specification- SuccessionPlanning.

UNIT 4 Recruitment and Selection Process: Employment planning and fore castingSources of recruitment- internal Vs. External; Domestic Vs. Global sources-Selection process Building employee commitment : Promotion from within -Sources, Developing and Using application forms – IT and recruiting on theinternet.

UNIT 5 Employee Testing & selection : Selection process, basic testing concepts,types of test, work samples & simulation, selection techniques, interview,common interviewing mistakes, Designing & conducting the effectiveinterview, small business applications, computer aided interview.

UNIT 6 Training and Development: Orientation & Training: Orienting the employees,the training process, need analysis, Training techniques, special purposetraining, Training via the internet. - Need Assessment - Training methodsfor Operatives and Supervisors

UNIT 7 Executive Development: Need and Programs - Computer applications inhuman resource management – Human resource accounting and audit. On-the- job and off-the-job Development techniques using HR to build a responsiveorganization

UNIT 8 Employee Compensation : Wages and Salary Administration – Bonus –Incentives – Fringe Benefits –Flexi systems - and Employee Benefits, Healthand Social Security Measures,

UNIT 9 Employee Retention: Need and Problems of Employees – various retentionmethods– Implication of job change. The control process – Importance –Methods – Employment retention strategies for production and servicesindustry

UNIT 10 Appraising and Improving Performance: Performance Appraisal Programs,Processes and Methods, Job Evaluation, Managing Compensation, IncentivesPerformance appraisal: Methods - Problem and solutions - MBO approach -The appraisal interviews - Performance appraisal in practice.

UNIT 11 Managing careers: Career planning and development - Managing promotionsand transfers - Sweat Equity- Job evaluation systems – Promotion –Demotions – Transfers- Labour Attrition: Causes and Consequences

UNIT 12 Employee Welfare, Separation: Welfare and safety – Accident prevention –Employee Grievances and their Redressal – Industrial Relations - Statutorybenefits - non-statutory (voluntary) benefits – Insurance benefits - retirementbenefits and other welfare measures to build employee commitment

UNIT 13 Industrial relations and collective bargaining: Trade unions – Collectivebargaining - future of trade unionism - Discipline administration - grievanceshandling - managing dismissals and workers Participation in Management-Separation: Need and Methods.

UNIT 14 Human Resource Information System- Personnel Records/ Reports- e-Recordon Employees – Personnel research and personnel audit – Objectives – Scopeand importance.

REFERENCES

1.Mathis and Jackson, Human Resource Management,South-WesternCollege, 2004.

2.Nkomo, Fottler and McAfee, Human Resource Management, South-WesternCollege,

2007.

3.R. Wayne Mondy, Human Resource Management,Prentice Hall, 2011.

4.Venkataraman& Srivastava, Personnel Management & Human Resources

5.ArunMonappa, Industrial Relations

6.Yodder&Standohar, Personnel Management & Industrial Relations

7.Edwin B. Flippo, Personnel Management , McGraw-Hill, 1984

8.Pigors and Myers, Personnel Administration

9.R.S. Dwivedi, Manpower Management


36131 - MARKETING MANAGEMENTObjectives:

• To help the learners understand markets, consumers and marketing principles.• To understand the buyer behaviour and influencing factors• To learn marketing plan, pricing, promotion and distribution in global context

UNIT 1 Introduction to Marketing: Meaning and Scope of Marketing; MarketingPhilosophies; Marketing Management Process-an overview; ModernMarketing Concept: Social marketing concept – Approaches to the study ofmarketing.

UNIT 2 Marketing segmentation: Meaning – Bases for segmentation, benefits –Systems approach - Four Ps of Product and Seven Ps Service marketing mixand Extensions- Targeting and Positioning - meaning and importance.

UNIT 3 Marketing Environment: Internal and External and Demographic factors –Adopting marketing to new liberalized and globalized economy –Digitalization – Customization and E business settings.

UNIT 4 Consumer Behaviour : Meaning and importance – Consumer buying process –Determinants and Theories of consumer behaviour – Psychological,sociological determinants – Theories and their relevance to marketing-

UNIT 5 Marketing Research: Procedure. Meaning – Objectives – Process- DemandForecasting- Marketing Information System – Strategic marketing plan andorganization – Changing marketing practices.

UNIT 6 Product Mix Management: Product planning and development – Meaning andprocess – Test marketing – Product failures – Product line management:Practices – Implications and Strategies for current market condition.

UNIT 7 Product life cycles: Meaning and Stages – Strategies – Managing PLC-Product-Market Integration: Strategies – Product positioning – Diversification– Product line simplification – Planned obsolescence – Branding Policies andStrategies – Packing.

UNIT 8 Price Mix Management: Pricing and pricing policies – Objectives –Procedures – Bases for and Methods of price fixing. Cases for Free Pricing,Administered and Regulated pricing – Pricing and product life cycle

UNIT 9 Physical Distribution Mix: Types of physical Distribution - Importance ofPhysical Distribution- Distribution channel policy – Logistics Decisions –Methods – Strategic alliance for Logistic cost reduction.

UNIT 10 Marketing Channel system: Marketing channel decisions: Choiceconsiderations– Managing Conflict and Cooperation in channels – Middlemenfunctions- Modern Trends in Retailing- Malls and Online.

UNIT 11 Promotional Mix: Personal selling Vs. impersonal selling – Personal selling –Process – Steps in selling – Management of sales force – Recruitment andselection – Training – Compensation plans – Evaluation of performance

UNIT 12 Integrated marketing communication Process: Advertising and sales promotion– Online Sales promotional activities – Public relationships – Directmarketing: Meaning, Nature, Growth and Channels.

UNIT 13 Advertising: Importance – Objectives – Media planning and selection –Factors influencing selection – Advertisement copy – Layout – Evaluation ofadvertising – Advertising budget – Sales promotion – Methods and practices.

UNIT 14 Competitor analyses: Identifying and analyzing the competitors – Types ofCompetitors – Competitive strategies framing for leaders, challengers,followers and nichers. Customer relationship marketing: Customer data base,Data ware housing and data mining

REFERENCES

1. Etzel, Walker and Stanton, Fundamentals of Marketing, McGraw Hill, 2004

2. Philip Kotler & Gary Armstrong, Principles of Marketing, Prentice Hall, 2010.


4. Cundiff, Still &Govani, Fundamentals of Modern Marketing, Prentice Hall.


6. Paul Peter and James Donnelly Jr, Marketing Management, McGraw-Hill, 2010.

7. William O. Bearden, Marketing: Principles & Perspectives, McGraw-Hill, 2006.



10. Michael J Etzel, Bruce J Walker, William J Stanton and Ajay Pandit, Marketingconcepts and cases - TMH 13th Edition, New Delhi, 2007.


Objectives:• To help the students to know the basic concepts of financial management• To understand capital structure, dividend policy and working capital

management.• To learn the various concepts of financial management along with applications

UNIT 1 Introduction: Financial management: objectives - Concept, nature, evaluationand significance – Finance Functions: Managerial and operative – Role ofFinancial management in the organization – Indian Financial system.

UNIT 2 Financial System: Legal and Regulatory frame work – Financial Functions:Meaning and scope – Finance and Tax Management Nexus- Tax Avoidanceand Tax evasion- Tax incentive and business decisions.

UNIT 3 Investment Function: Meaning and scope - Time value of Money concepts andapplications –Risk return relationship - Dividend function – Risk return tradeoff – Management planning- Global management environment

UNIT 4 Long-term Capital Resources: Equity and debt sources – Equity share,preference shares – types of preference share - debentures – types - sources oflong-term capital.

UNIT 5 Capital Issues: Meaning, Nature, Purpose – Roles and Guidelines of SEBI incapital issues- Bridge finance, loan syndication, Book building – Borrowingsfrom the term lending institutions and International capital market- Taxconsiderations in financing decision areas.

UNIT 6 Cost of Capital : Concept of cost of capital- Cost of debt, equity, preferenceshare capital, retaining earning - Weighted average cost: EBIT –EPSAnalysis- Tax, Capital structure and Value nexus - Computation of overallcost of capital – Tax and cost of capital.

UNIT 7 Capital structure: Determinates - Concept and Types- Optimum capitalstructure – Theories of capital structure – Net income and net operative incomeapproach – M.M. Approach – Traditional theory – Their assumptions –Significance and limitations – Management leverage operating leverage –Combined leverage.

UNIT 8 Capital budgeting: Meaning, Nature and Types of Capital Investment-Methods of appraisal under certainty conditions: PBP, ARR, IRR and NPVtechniques - Basic and International capital budgeting.

UNIT 9 Uncertainty and Risk models: Simulation Analysis- Sensitivity analysis-Decision tree analysis- Certainty equivalent and risk-adjusted return measures-

Tax considerations in Investment Decisions Cost of capital and InvestmentDecisions.

UNIT 10 Working Capital Management: Definitions and Objectives - Concept andtypes – Determinants – Financing approaches – Conservative approaches -Sources of working capital finance Factors affecting working capitalrequirements- Working capital financing by commercial banks – Types ofassistance

UNIT 11 Inventories and receivables Management under conditions of certainty anduncertainty – Operating cycle – Planning of funds through the management ofassets – Various techniques used.

UNIT 12 Cash and liquidity management: Credit Management and evaluationalternative credit variables Methods and Functions- Tax considerations inRemittances and Purchases.

UNIT 13 Dividend Theories: Valuation under Gordon and Walter theories – Dividendirrelevance under M.M. Theory – Assumptions – Limitations - Implicationsand contributions of theories in financial decision making process.

UNIT 14 Dividend Policy: Types – Share valuation practices – Factors affectingdividend decision – Tax considerations in dividend decision when tax is leviedat the hands of companies and recipients.

REFERENCES

1. Brigham and Ehrhardt, Financial Management: Theory & Practice, Thomson ONE,

2010

2. Brigham and Houston, Fundamentals of Financial Management, Thomson ONE, 2009.


4. Jeff Madura, International Financial Management,South-WesternCollege Pub., 2010




8. Sheeba Kapil(2010), Financial Management, Pearson Education.

9. B J Camsey, Engene F.Brigham, “Introduction to Financial Management”, The Gryden

Press

30

36133 - COOPERATION: POLICIES AND DEVELOPMENTObjectives

• To understand the concept of cooperative policies and development• To analysis various cooperative policies for arriving suitable decision

UNIT 1 Concept of Co-operation: Cooperative Thought Process – Pre-RochdaleThinkers:Robert Owen, Charles Fourier

UNIT 2 Post-Rochdale Thinkers: Raiffeisen, Dr.Warbasse, Fauquet, Charles Guide –Jawaharlal Nehru and Mahatma Gandhiji’s views on Cooperation.

UNIT 3 International Co-operative Alliances -Statement of Cooperative Identity, 1995.

UNIT 4 Cooperative Development Models: Voluntary Vs Compulsory Cooperation –Limited Vs Unlimited Liability

UNIT 5 Federal Vs. Unitary Vs. Integrated Model – New Generation Cooperatives –Merits and demerits of various models.

UNIT 6 Cooperative Development Abroad: Working profile of Consumers cooperatives inSweden and U.K – Cooperative Banking in Germany and Italy

UNIT 7 Milk Producer Cooperatives in Denmark – Cooperative Farming Societies inIsrael – Reasons for their success in their performance and contribution to theirnational economies.

UNIT 8 Cooperative Development in Pre-Independence India : Cooperative CreditSocieties Act-1904 – Cooperative Societies Act 1912

UNIT 9 Recommendations of various Committees and Commissions for development ofcooperatives - Sir Edward Maclagan Committee 1914

UNIT 10 Royal Commission on Agriculture 1928 – Cooperative Planning Committee 1945.

UNIT 11 Cooperative Development in India Post Independence India: Recommendations ofvarious Committees and Commissions for development of cooperatives: All IndiaRural Credit Survey Committee 1954

UNIT 12 All India Rural Credit Review Committee 1969 – CRAFICARD 1981 – Report ofTask Force on Cooperative Credit (STCCS) 2004 – Report of the High PoweredCommittee on Cooperatives 2009.

UNIT 13 Ninety Seventh Constitution Amendment 2011 on Cooperatives – Problems andChallenges faced by Cooperative Sector in India as to Membership, Capital,Recognition as Economic entity, Governance, Board & Management Interface-Linkage,

31

UNIT 14 Professionalization, Structure and Design, Political Intervention and Sickness –Need for Competitiveness, Human Resource Development, FacilitativeGovernment Support, Financial sustainability and Rehabilitation.

REFERENCES1. Dubashi P.R – Principles and Philosophy of Co-operation

2. John Winfred A. and V.Kulandaiswamy – History of Co-operation

3. Krishnaswami O.R – Fundamentals of Co-operation

4. Bedi R.D – Theory ,History & Practice of Co-operation

5. Krishnaswami O.R and Dr.V.Kulandaiswamy- Co-operative-Concept and Theory

6. V.Saradha – Theory of Co-operation

7. T.N Hajela – Co-operation (Principles , Problems and Practice).

32

36134 - CO-OPERATIVES AND ALLIED LAWS

Objectives

• To understand the concept of Cooperative and allied Laws• To understand the various provision related to allied laws

UNIT 1 Indian Cooperative Legislations: Need for Separate law for Cooperatives distinctfrom Companies Law-Cooperative Management: Nature, Authority

UNIT 2 Accountability: Importance – Responsibilities – Powers of Directors – Abuse ofPower.

UNIT 3 Role of Directors in Cooperative Management – Cooperative Credit SocietiesAct, 1904

UNIT 4 Cooperative Societies Act, 1912, Major Provisions as to Registration, Rights-Responsibilities of Members, Management, etc.

UNIT 5 TamilNadu Coop Acts: Tamilnadu Cooperatives Societies Act 1983 (Rules1988,business related to regulations:- Audit, enquiry and inspection –

UNIT 6 Supersession of board dispute and settlement-liquidation, winding up andcancellation of registered Cooperative Societies. Tamilnadu Cooperative Societies(Amendment Act 2013).

UNIT 7 Other State Coop Acts: Multi State Cooperative Societies Act 2002, ModelCooperative Bill 1991 –

UNIT 8 Andrapradesh Mutually Aided Cooperatives Societies Act 1995.

UNIT 9 General Business Legislations: Indian Contract Act 1872 - Essentials of ValidContract, Classification of Contract – Performance of Contract

UNIT 10 Discharge of Contracts – Contract of Indemnity and Guarantee – Pledge –Contract of Agency – Sale of Goods Act 1930 –

UNIT 11 Actual Sale and agreement to sale creditors and warranty – Rights of unpaidseller.

UNIT 12 Allied Acts: Consumer Protection Act - 1986: Cyber law and InformationTechnology Act 2000. Foreign Exchange Management Act 1999 and FEMARules 2000.

UNIT 13 The Constitution (97th) Amendment Act 2011

33

UNIT14 Provisions relating to registration, amendment management, audit andLiquidation of Co-operatives.

REFERENCES

1. Tamilnadu Cooperative Societies Act 1983.

2. Pillai R.S.V.Bhagavathi, Legal Aspect of Business, S-Chand &Co,New Delhi 2013.

3. SaravanavelP.Legal System in Business, Himalaya Publishing House, New Delhi,2009.

4. Balachandran. V and Thothadri. S, Legal Aspects of Business, Vijay Nicole Imprints Pvt.

Ltd., Chennai

34

36135 - CO-OPERATIVE INSTITUTIONS: CREDIT AND NON CREDIT

Objectives

• To know the basic concept of Cooperative credit and non credit• To compare the cooperative credit with other sector credit

UNIT 1 Agricultural Cooperative Credit (Short-term): Structure and composition –Cooperative Banking Structure – Features of Cooperative Credit –

UNIT 2 Primary Agricultural Cooperative Banks: Constitutions and working – Crop loanprocedure – Linking of Credit with Marketing –

UNIT 3 District and State Cooperative Banks: Constitution and Working – MobilizingDeposits – Lending Operations – Overdue Problems – Recovery management.

UNIT 4 Agricultural Cooperative Credit (Long-term): Need for Long Term Finance forAgriculture – Need for a separate Agency for providing Long Term AgriculturalFinance

UNIT5 Constitution and working of Primary and State Cooperative Agricultural andRural Development Banks – Funding Sources and Forms –UNIT- Equity andDebt forms – Debt servicing.

UNIT 6 Non- Agricultural Credit Cooperatives: Structure and Composition – Constitutionand Working of Urban Cooperative Banks

UNIT 7 Employees Cooperative Credit Societies, Cooperative Housing Societies andIndustrial Cooperative Banks – NABARD and Cooperative Banks.

UNIT 8 Types of Non Credit Cooperatives: Marketing Cooperatives: Origin andDevelopment of Cooperative Marketing in India.

UNIT 9 Primary and Apex Cooperative Marketing Societies: Constitution and working –Cooperative Processing Societies: Need and Importance – Fruits ProcessingSocieties

UNIT 10 Cooperative Sugar Factories, Spinning Mills, Oil Mills: Constitution andworking – Various forms of assistance from Government and NCDC.

UNIT 11 Cooperative Farming Societies: Types, Characteristic Features – Causes forFailure – Agro Engineering and Service Societies –

UNIT 12 Dairy Cooperatives: Place of Dairying in Indian National Economy – Working ofDairy cooperatives.

UNIT 13 Consumer Cooperatives: Need and Importance, Origin and Development Types,Structure, Working of Primary, Central and Apex Consumer Co-operatives –

35

UNIT 14 NCCF, Supermarkets, Recent Development – Problems – Link With RDC.Working of Primary and Apex Weavers Cooperatives. New GenerationCooperatives.

REFERENCES

1. Kamat G.S new of cooperatives management Himalaya Publishing House,

New Delhi 1987.

2. Kapoor D.R,Cooperative Audit Anmol publishers, New Delhi 1998.

3. KrishnaswamiO.R,Cooperative account keeping Oxford IBH Co, New Delhi 1990.

4. Government of Tamilnadu,Cooperative Audit Manual Chennai 1993.

36

36141 - MANAGEMENT OF COOPERATIVE ENTERPRISESObjectives

• To know the basic concept of Cooperative enterprises• To understand the Cooperative enterprises theories and functions

UNIT 1 Cooperative Management: Concept-Board-Executive relationship participativedemocratic control-Comparison of management of profit businesses andcooperative (non-profit) businesses

UNIT2 Convergence of Management – Practices and Strategies- Principles of cooperativeand other forms of organization.

UNIT 3 Administrative System for Cooperatives: Central state rules- Secretary toGovernment for Cooperatives -Registrar of Cooperatives.

UNIT 4 Functional Registrars of Cooperatives and their powers and duties –Administrative setup of Cooperatives under the Control of Registrar ofCooperative Societies.

UNIT 5 Functional Planning and Organization: Nature, importance and planning – Planningprocess and types – Physical, Resources and Financial Panning.

UNIT 6 Project Planning and Budgeting - Decision making – Types and Process –Decision making as to Purchase, Process, Sales, Credit and Collection –Centralization and Decentralization of decision power.

UNIT 7 Human Resource Management in Cooperatives: Manpower Forecasting – Staffingand Directing Techniques in cooperatives – Staff Motivation – Meaning –Importance - Theories.

UNIT 8 Staff Training and Development: Need and Methods – Program of Training andDevelopment – Evaluation after Training and Development

UNIT 9 Adequacy of Manpower in number and talents – Individual and OrganizationalLeadership in Coop: Significance, Types – Styles and Theories.

UNIT 10 Organization Aspects in Cooperatives: Nature of Cooperative Organization –Formal Vs Informal nature – Under - and over - staffed scenario

UNIT 11 One-person only set-up and implication for control and reporting – Rural and Urbansettings and their implications – Departmentalization – Decentralization –Delegation of authority and issues.

UNIT 12 Modern Management Techniques as Applied to Cooperation: De-bureaucratization– Operational efficiency and excellence – Cooperative democracy Vs Efficiency

UNIT 13 Key Results Area – Core Competence of Coop- Competitive Strategy for Coop-Total Quality Management – Six Sigma – Benchmarking

37

UNIT 14 7S Framework - Current scenario and government policy - Strategies for sustainabledevelopment of cooperatives in India.

REFERENCES

1. Kamat G.S. Cooperatives Management Himalaya Publishing House, New Delhi 1987.

2. Kapoor D.R, Cooperative Audit, New Delhi 1998.

3. Krishnaswami O.R, Cooperative Account Keeping Oxford IBH Co, New Delhi 1990

4. Government of Tamilnadu, Cooperative Audit Manual Chennai 1993.

38

36142 - DYNAMICS OF COOPERATION

Objectives• To know the basic concept of Dynamics of Cooperation• To understand Talent Grooming and Empowerment and values• To analysis various factors in promoting dynamics of cooperation

UNIT 1 Aspects of Institutional Dynamics in Cooperation: Concept of Dynamics-Dynamics as Speed of Action, as Vitality for Action, as Change Championship,

UNIT 2 As Navigating with Environment, as Strategic Excellence, as Propulsion forProgress and as Institutional Leadership- Contours of Institutional Dynamism:Dynamics of Vision, Mission, Goals, Strategies, Technology, Programs andControl-

UNIT 3 These Aspects of Institutional Dynamism as Applied to CooperativeOrganizations- Integration process – Developments aids.

UNIT 4 Components of Institutional Dynamics in Cooperation: Dynamics of theMcKinsey 7-S Framework comprising of Structure, System, Style, Staff, Strategy,

UNIT 5 Skills and Shared Values as applied to Cooperative Organizations- Dynamics ofGovernance in Cooperative Organizations-

UNIT 6 Dynamics of being Dynamic as applied to Cooperative Organizations –Organisational models to support dynamic cooperation.

UNIT 7 Cooperative Organizational Dynamics in Personnel: Importance of PersonnelDynamics- Factors influencing Personnel Dynamic in Cooperative Organization:Enabling Factors like Valued Leadership,

UNIT 8 Talent Grooming and Empowerment – Individual Factors like Values,Competence and Commitment to Benchmarked Contribution.

UNIT 9 Cooperative Organizational Dynamics in New Product (including Service)Offering: Infusing Creativity and Innovation in Product and Service Offerings bythe Cooperative institutions- Strategies and Execution for Creativity andInnovation infusion.

UNIT 10 Product Mix Dynamics- Strategies and Actions for New Product Introductionincluding Down-Stream and Up-Stream Development Dynamics- PlannedObsolescence.

UNIT 11 Cooperative Organizational Dynamics in Marketing Competence: Nature ofMarket Competence and Dynamics involved therein.

UNIT 12 Competitive Edge through Core Competence- Dynamics of Market Power inrespect of the Product, Price, Place, Promotion, People, Process and PhysicalEvidence of Marketing- Marketing Excellence.

39

UNIT 13 Nuances and Niches of Cooperative Organizational Dynamics: Nuances andNiches of Mingling Technology and Tradition, Balancing Equity and Efficiencyand Injecting Elements of Cooperation and Competition.

UNIT 14 Nuances and Niches of Maximizing Quality and Minimizing Cost- Application ofEthno-, Regio-, Ploy- and Geo-centric Nuances and Niches in CooperativeOrganizations.

REFERENCES

1. Zhihua Qu, Cooperative Control of Dynamical Systems 2nd Edition

2. Craig Boardman, Drew Rivers, Denis O. Gray Cooperative Research Centers and

Technical Innovation: Government Policies, Industry Strategies, and Organizational

Dynamics.

3. Kathleen King Whyte William Foote Whyte Whyte, Making Mondragon: The Growth

and Dynamics of the Worker Cooperative Complex .

40

36143 - ENTREPRENEURSHIP DEVELOPMENT IN COOPERATIVESObjectives

• To know the basic concept of Entrepreneurship Development• To understand the applications of Entrepreneurship cooperatives• To develop favorable attitude towards cooperative development

UNIT 1 Entrepreneurship: Meaning, importance, Types of entrepreneurs – Innovation:Concepts, sources and types – Innovation as the essence of entrepreneurship –

UNIT 2 Sources of innovation – Cooperative entrepreneurship: Meaning, Scope andPotentials.

UNIT 3 Entrepreneurial Environment: Significance and components of environment

UNIT 4 Internal and external environment forces – Psychological, social, cultural,political, Technological, Legal and Economic forces –

UNIT 5 Environment factors as applied to cooperative entrepreneurship- Micro and Macrofactors influences.

UNIT 6 Entrepreneurial Development: Importance – Phases in the development ofentrepreneurship – Stimulation: Entrepreneurial Awareness, Exposure, Motivationand Attitude

UNIT 7 Support: Entrepreneurial Education, Training, Assistance – Sustenance:Entrepreneurial Commitment and Vitalization – Entrepreneurial Developmentphases in cooperative sector.

UNIT 8 Programs for Developing Entrepreneurship: Schemes of Entrepreneurshipdevelopment programs by Government, Education and Other institutions –

UNIT 9 Seed Capital assistance – Capital subsidy – Backward area development schemes– Sales tax concessions – Energy concessions – Recent trends

UNIT 10 Programs for Developing Entrepreneurship – empowerment - enrichment ofrural entrepreneur in cooperative sector.

UNIT 11 Entrepreneurship Development Dynamics : Entrepreneurial Culture –Entrepreneurial Society.

UNIT12 Entrepreneurial Development needs of Women, Rural and Small Entrepreneurs incoopérative Sector.

UNIT 13 Entrepreneurial Development in Select Protect in Coopératives : Coir Products –Bricks – Dairy – Hand made paper – Oil seeds - Handicrafts – Bakery – Bee-keeping.

UNIT 14 Role of coopeartives in the select business areas - Model in coopérativedevelopments.

41

REFERENCES

1. Peter F. Drucker, Innovation are Entrepreneurship.

2. Saravanavel,EntrepreneurshipDevelopment.

3. Gupta and Srinivasan, Entrepreneurship Development.

4. N.P. Singh, Entrepreneurship Development N.P. Singh.

5. B.C. Tandon,Environment and Entrepreneurship.

6. Srivastava, A Practical Guide to Industrial Entrepreneurs.

42

36144 - COOPERATIVE ACCOUNTING, FINANCE AND AUDIT

Objectives

• To know the basic concept of Cooperative Accounting• To analysis the comparative features of CAKS DEBKS

UNIT 1 Fundamentals of Cooperative Account Keeping: Evolution of CooperativeAccount Keeping System.

UNIT 2 Difference between Cooperative Account Keeping and Double Entry System –Day book: Different Types of Day Book – posting from Day Book into Ledgers.

UNIT 3 Ledgers: General Ledger – Different types of Ledger kept by differentCooperatives - Significance of ledger in co-operatives.

UNIT 4 Reconciliation of Special Ledger with General Ledger Balance – Statement ofReceipts and Disbursement: Preparation and its use

UNIT 5 Statement of Receipts and payments: Difference- Importance – Usage - TrialBalance – Final accounts.

UNIT 6 Cooperative Finance: Sources of Finance for Cooperatives - Cost of Capital –Computation of Specific Cost.

UNIT 7 Investment of Funds and Techniques of Capital budgeting in cooperative sector-Risk – return tradeoff.

UNIT 8 Audit – Its Origin – Definition – Objects – Advantages. Nature and Scope ofAudit – Various kinds of Audit – Commencement of Audit Programme

UNIT 9 Routine Checking of Vouching and its meaning – Vouching of cash Transaction –Importance of Routine Checking.

UNIT 10 Cooperative Audit: Origin – Concept – Need and importance – Objects –Advantages – Nature and Scope of Audit – Various kinds of Audit.

UNIT 11 Differences between Commercial and Cooperative Audit – Rights, Duties andResponsibilities of Auditor – Audit Vs Inspection and Supervision – Mechanicaland Administrative Audit – Commencement of Audit: Audit Program.

UNIT 12 Routine Checking of Vouching and its meaning – Vouching of cash Transaction –Verification and Valuation – Audit of final accounts and balance sheets –Complications of audit report and schedule of defects.

UNIT 13 Audit Program for Selected Societies: Various stages of Audit in CooperativeCredit Institution – Marketing Society, Consumer Stores, Housing Society,

UNIT 14 Milk Supply Society, Industrial Cooperative, Classification on the Reserve Bankof India Standard – Preparation of final Audit Memorandum and its Enclosures.

43

REFERENCES

1. O.R. Krishnaswami, Cooperative Account Keeping, Oxford and IBH Publishing Co.Pvt.

Ltd 1992.

2. D.R. Kapoor, Hand Book of Cooperative Audit, Anmol Publications Pvt. Ltd., 1998.

3. R.G. Saxena, Principles and Practice of Auditing Himalaya Publishing House, Reprint

1999 (4th Revised Edition), 1999.

4. B.N. Tandon, A Hand Book of Practical Auditing, S. Chand And company Ltd., 2003.

5. P. Manikavasagam, A Treatise on Cooperative Account Keeping, Rainbow Publications,

1989.

44

36145 - PROJECT REPORT

The Project report may be under taken in any one of the following Cooperative Institutions.

i. Urban Cooperative Banks

ii. District Central Co-operative Banks

iii. Cooperative Spinning Mills

iv. Cooperative Sugar Mills

v. District Cooperative Milk producers Union

vi. District Cooperative Union

vii. Cooperative Consumer Whole sale stores Ltd.,

viii. Cooperative Marketing Societies Ltd.,

Nature of Project

Constitution, Working, Structure, Performance and Problems. Case study covering any specificissues, methods for analyzing the problems faced by Cooperatives.

Project Proposal

Project proposal should be prepared in consultation with guide.

Eligibility to become a project Guide

Faculty members having minimum of 5 years teaching experience/ Trained CooperativeOfficials like CSR/DR/JR having trained in relevant discipline minimum of 3 years workexperience.

Formulation:

The length of the project report may be above 100 typed pages in double line space. AttendanceCertificate from the respect Cooperative institution is must. And they have to undergo minimum 45days training in the institution.

Evaluation:

Project Report is evaluated for 75 marks and Viva-voce carries 25 Marks.

45

3.DURATION OF THE PROGRAMME

The course shall consist of two academic years divided into four semesters

4.Faculty and Support Staff Requirements


Staff Category RequiredCore Faculty * 3Faculty for Specialization* 2Clerical Assistant 1


5.Instructional Delivery Mechanism

Each semester there will be one contact programme of 80 hours duration in theory. The SLM

(Self Learning Material) will be supplied to the students in print form as well as in CD form. The

face to face contact sessions of the programme for theory courses will be held at the head quarter

/ learning centres. The conduct of end semester examinations, evaluation and issuance of

certificates will be done by office of the Controller of examinations, Alagappa University,

Karaikudi.

F) PROCEDURE FOR ADMISSION, CURRICULUM TRANSACTION, AND

EVALUATION


A candidate who has passed any Bachelor Degree from a recognized University in the Pattern of

10+2+3 shall be permitted to appear and qualify for the programme.


The class room teaching would be through conventional lecture, use of OHP, power point

presentation and novel innovative teaching ideas like television and computer aided instruction.

Student seminars would be arranged to improve their awareness and communicative skill.

46


Course Type Face to Face ContactSession/semester (in Hours)

5 Theory courses with 4 credits 80

Total 80

EvaluationThe examinations shall be conducted for theory to assess the knowledge acquired during

the study. There shall be two systems of examinations viz., internal and external examinations. In

the case of theory courses, the internal evaluation shall be conducted as Continuous Internal

Assessment via. Student assignments preparation. The internal assessment shall comprise of

maximum 25 marks for each course. The end semester examination shall be of three hours

duration to each course at the end of each semester. The end semester examinations shall

comprise of maximum of 75 marks for each course. The candidate failing in any course(s) will

be permitted to appear for each failed course(s) in the subsequent examination.

f. 3.2. Distribution of Marks in Continuous Internal Assessments:The following procedure shall be followed for awarding internal marks for theory courses

Component Marks

Assignments(2)(12.5+12.5)

25

Total 25


• The question paper carries a maximum of 75 marks.

• The question paper consists of three sections namely Part-A, Part-B and Part-C.

• Part-A consists of 10 questions of 2 marks each (10 x 2 = 20 marks) with no choice. The

candidate should answer all questions.

• Part-B consists of 5 either or choice questions. Each question carries 5 marks (5 x 5=25

marks).

47

• Part-C consists of 5 questions. Each question carries 10 marks. The candidate should

Answer any three questions (10 x 3 = 30 marks).

Passing minimum

• There shall be no Passing Minimum for Internal.• For External Examination, Passing Minimum shall be of 50% (Fifty Percentage) of the

maximum marks (75) prescribed for the paper.• In the aggregate (External + Internal) the passing minimum shall be of 50 Mark for each

Paper• Grading shall be based on overall marks obtained (internal + external).

Candidate who does not obtain the required minimum marks for a pass in a course shall berequired to appear and pass the same at a subsequent appearance.

Marks and Grades:

The following table gives the marks, grade points, letter, grades and classification to indicate theperformance of the candidate.



80-89 8.0-8.9 D+ Excellent


70-74 7.0-7.4 A+ Very Good

60-69 6.0-6.9 A Good

50-59 5.0-5.9 B Average



Ci = Credits earned for the course i in any semesterGi = Grade Point obtained for course i in any semester.n refers to the semester in which such courses were credited

48

For a semester;








CGPA Grad Classification of FinalResult

9.5-10.0


O+

O





D++

D+

D

First Class withDistinction*




A++

A+

A

First Class



B+

B

Second Class


*The candidates who have passed in the first appearance and within the prescribed semester ofthe PG Programme are eligible.

49

Maximum duration for completion of the courseThe maximum duration for the programme shall not exceed five years after the completion of theminimum duration of the programme.


These regulations shall come into effect from the academic year 2018-19 for students who areadmitted to the first year of the course during the academic year 2018-19.

Fee structure


First

Year

SecondYear

1 AdmissionProcessing Fees

300.00 -

2 Course Fees 13200.00 13200.00

5 ICT Fees 150.00 150.00

TOTAL 13650.00 13350.00

G) REQUIREMENT OF THE LIBRARY RESOURCES:

LIBRARY RESOURCES

The Central Library is one of the important central facilities of Alagappa University. It has text

book, reference books, conference proceedings, back volumes, standards, and non-book material

such as CD-ROMs and audios. The central Library procured several e-books in different areas.

The library also subscribes to about 250 current periodicals. The Directorate of Distance

Education of Alagappa University has adequate number of copies of books related to

Management Programme.

50


Sl. No. Nature of Expenditure Amount in Rs.(Approx.)

1 Programme Development 10,00,000/-2 Programme Delivery 20,00,000/-3 Programme Maintenance 3,00,000/-

i) QUALITY ASSURANCE MECHANISM AND EXPECTED PROGRAMMEOUTCOMES

• The feedback from students on teaching will be collected every semester using standardformats.

• Feedback on the curriculum will also be collected from the experiences of the studentswhich help teachers in fine tuning of deliverables in the classroom.

• It helps in improving the standard of teaching as expected by the students.• Exit survey feedback on various parameters to improve and quality of the programme and

support services like course material, library and infrastructure.• It helps to strengthen the contents of the program to meet the requirements of the

employment market and keep the curriculum as a treasure of knowledge.• This programme provides Opportunities for students to develop and demonstrate

knowledge and understanding, skills, qualities and other attributes.

****

51

52


MBA (CORPORATE MANAGEMENT)



PROGRAMME PROJECT REPORT FOR

MBA CORPORATE MANAGEMENT














Therefore, the introduction of MBA CORPORATE MANAGEMENT programme in the






• Working Professionals• Entrepreneurs

• Service Personnel• Academic Faculty• Government Officials

• Researchers• Home makers

• Unemployed Graduates












E) INSTRUCTIONAL DESIGN

MBA CORPORATE MANAGEMENT

CourseCode

Title CIAMax.

ESEMax.

TOTMax.

C





35631 Marketing Management 25 75 100 435632 Financial Management 25 75 100 4

35633 Company Law and Practice 25 75 100 4

35634 Global Business & MNCs 25 75 100 435635 Securities Laws and Financial Markets 25 75 100 4

Total 125 375 500 20

IV Semester35641 Corporate Social Responsibilities and Ethics 25 75 100 435642 Corporate Finance and Tax Management 25 75 100 435643 Corporate Governance 25 75 100 435644 Corporate Audit and Compliance Management 25 75 100 4

35645 Corporate Restructuring 25 75 100 4

Total 125 375 500 20

Grand Total 2000 80

Course Code Legend:

3 5 6 Y Z


CIA: Continuous Internal Assessment, ESE: End Semester Examination, TOT: Total,C: Credit Points, Max.: Maximum



35611 -MANAGEMENT PRINCIPLES AND PRACTICES










UNIT 9 Directing : Meaning, Purpose, and Scope in the organization – Leadership:Meaning, Leadership styles, Leadership theories: Trait, Contingency,Situation, Path-Goal, Tactical, Transactional, Transformational and Grid.Leaders: Type, Nature, Significance and Functions, Barriers, Politics andEthics. Leader Vs. Manager.






REFERENCES






McGraw Hill.





35612- ORGANIZATIONAL BEHAVIOUR


UNIT 1 Organizational Behaviour: History – Meaning Elements – Evolution,Challenges and opportunities – Trends – disciplines – Approaches – Models –Management functions relevance to organizational Behaviour – GlobalEmergence of OB as a discipline.














REFERENCES





2006.




Bacon, 1993.




UNIT 2 Business Decisions: Role of managerial Economics in Decision making –Decision making under Risk and Uncertainty - Concepts of Opportunity cost, -Production possibility curve – Incremental Concepts - Cardinal and Ordinalapproaches to consumer Behaviour Time Value of Money –














Press, 2011.








Pearson















UNIT 9 Operational research for Decision Making: Historical background andDevelopments – Definition – Phases in the use of Operations research –

Models – Characteristics of quantitative methods - Benefits and Limitations ofQuantitative methods.






REFERENCES

























UNIT 10 Cost Accounting: Cost Accounting - Meaning - Distinction between FinancialAccounting and Cost Accounting - Cost Terminology: Cost, Cost Centre, CostUnit - Elements of Cost - Cost Sheet – Problems - Overhead Cost Allocations:Over and under Absorption. Job and Contract Costing,











Publishers.


Publication.




















REFERENCES



3. William Josiah Goode and Paul K. Hatt, Methods of Social Research, McGraw

Hill, 1981.

4. Wilkinson and Bhandarkar, Methods and Techniques of Social Research, 2003,

HPH.



Publications, 2008.


Mumbai


9. Pauline V Young, Scientific Social Surveys and Research, Prentice-Hall,

(Digitalized) 2007.












UNIT 9 Social and Technological Environment: Societal Structure and Features-Entrepreneurial Society and its implications for business – Social and culturalfactors and their implications for business- Technology Development Phase inthe Economy as conditioner of Business Opportunities






REFERENCES



McGraw-Hill, 2008.





House, 2008.













UNIT 10 Partners Relations: Introduction – Eligibility to be a partner – Registration ofchange in partner – Limited Liabilities of partnership - Dissolution of firms -

Characteristics – Kinds – Incorporation of Companies – Memorandum ofAssociation – Articles of Association





REFERENCES


2010.






















REFERENCES


2011.



2008.








Objectives:

















REFERENCES



2007.









35631- MARKETING MANAGEMENTObjectives:
















REFERENCES












Objectives:• To help the students to know the basic concepts of financial management• To understand capital structure, dividend policy and working capital

management.• To learn the various concepts of financial management along with applications









UNIT 9 Uncertainty and Risk models: Simulation Analysis- Sensitivity analysis-Decision tree analysis- Certainty equivalent and risk-adjusted return measures-

Tax considerations in Investment Decisions Cost of capital and InvestmentDecisions.






REFERENCES


2010









Press

30

35633 - COMPANY LAW AND PRACTICEObjectives:

• To know the basic concept of Company law• To understand the various corporate practices in law

• To acquire knowledge of the practical and procedural aspects of the Companies

Act

• To encourage the development of students' skills in legal reasoning and analysis

through study of statutes, case law and regulatory practice relating to Company

Law.

UNIT 1 Meaning and Characteristics: Company Law Administration – Classification ofCompanies – Lifting the corporate veil. Memorandum of Association – Contentsand Alteration of Memorandum.

UNIT 2 Doctrine of Ultra Vires – Articles of Association – Contents and Alteration ofArticles –Constructive Notice of Articles and Memorandum – Doctrine of IndoorManagement

UNIT 3 Prospectus - Definition, Registration of Prospectus - Contents of prospectus;Offer for sale – Deemed prospectus – Statement in lieu of prospectus –Misrepresentation in prospectus – Liability for Misstatement in prospectus.

UNIT 4 Shares and Bond/Debentures Issues/Redemption: Share – Meaning and types–Issue of shares at premium, at discount, underwriting commission and brokerage– Allotment of shares and return of allotment.

UNIT 5 Share warrants – Forfeiture and surrender of shares – Further issue of shares andbonus issues – Redemption of redeemable preference shares – Alteration ofcapital – Reduction of capital.

UNIT 6 Mode of obtaining membership – Cessation of members - Rights and liabilities ofmembers – Annual return - Debenture: Kinds of debentures – Issue, redemptionand conversion of debentures – Register of debenture holders.

UNIT 7 Management: Director – Share qualifications – Disqualifications of a director –Vacation of office – Appointment of directors –Power, duties and liabilities ofdirectors - Removal and resignation.

31

UNIT 8 Loan to directors – Holding office or place of profit – Managing Director –Appointment – Managerial remuneration.

UNIT 9 Meetings: General Meetings of shareholders – Statutory meetings – Annualgeneral meeting – Extra-ordinary meeting and Class meeting.

UNIT 10 Meetings of the Board of Directors – Requisites of a valid meeting – Notice –Agenda – Quorum – Chairman – Minutes – Proxies – Voting – Poll andresolution.

UNIT 11 Corporate Accountability: Accounts and Audit – Quarterly Reporting, AnnualReporting and Segmental Reporting- Statutory books- Disclosure practices.

UNIT 12 Appointment, resignation, removal of auditors – Rights, duties and liabilities ofauditors – Profits and dividends – Divisible profits.

UNIT 13 Majority Powers and Minority Rights: Law relating to majority powers andminority rights – Shareholder remedies – Prevention of oppression andmismanagement

UNIT 14 Corporate collapse – Winding up – necessity, types, process of winding up – Roleof liquidators – Consequences of winding up.

REFERENCES

1. Ramaiah, Companies Act, Lexis Nexis, 2011.

2. Kapoor N D, Elements of Company Law, Sultan Chand and Sons, 2009

3. Ghosh P K & Balachandran V, Company Law and Practice, Sultan Chand, 2009.

4. ICSI Study Material on Company Law.

5. Majumadar, Company Law, Taxman Publications, New Delhi, 2008.

6. Sen Gupta B K, Company Law, Eastern Law Book House, Kolkata.

32

35634 - GLOBAL BUSINESS & MNCsObjectives:

• To understand the global business environment• To understand the International Trade Procedure and Facilitation and evaluation

• To acquire knowledge in MNC , FDI and WTO

UNIT 1 International Business Environment and Effect: International business – Anoverview – Concept of international business – Classification of internationalbusiness

UNIT 2 Factors influencing international business – Economic and policy environment –Regulation of international business – Foreign Direct Investment – ForeignPortfolio Investment – Foreign Technology Transfer.

UNIT 3 Global Economic Integration, Trade and Global Development – Global Meltdownand Coping with Contagion Effect.

UNIT 4 International Trade Procedure and Facilitation: Export-Import Procedure - offerand receipt of orders - Shipment procedure - Banking Procedure- ExportDocumentation - Framework - Standardized pre-shipment Export Documents -Commercial and Regulatory Documents - Export credit instruments andprocedures: Letters of credit and types.

UNIT 5 Documents required for export credit- Export credit insurance - Services ofExport Credit and Guarantee Corporation in export credit insurance -Specific Policy and Small Exporters Policy - Guarantees - Procedure foravailing credit insurance and necessary documents.

UNIT 6 Multinational Corporations (MNCs): Concept, strategy and organization –Foreign direct Investment (FDI) and MNCs: Concept, Theories - Need - Factorsinfluencing FDI – FDI and Technology Transfer by MNCs.

UNIT 7 Evaluation of FDI – APV and International IRR - Global Trend - Indian efforts toattract FDI and Trends.

UNT 8 MNCs and Indian Companies: Contours and consequences of competition-Arguments of Level Playing field - Forms of Foreign Collaborations - StrategicAlliance- Strategic Acquisition- Strategic Sale- Strategic Merger.

UNIT 9 Joint Ventures – Negotiating foreign collaborations- Restrictive clauses in theforeign collaboration/ joint venture – UN Code of conduct of transfer oftechnology – Indian joint ventures abroad.

33

UNIT 10 World Trade Organization and Regional Trade Blocks: Origin and Goals-Structure, functions and areas of operations –World Trade Organization andGlobal Trade, Global Investment and Global Development – WTO and Disputesettlement under WTO

UNIT 11 Anti-dumping duties – Countervailing duties – Environmental aspects ininternational trade – Trade related aspects of intellectual property rights

UNIT 12 Competition and trade in services- Regional Trade Associations – NAFTA,European Union, SAPTA and ASEAN- WTO Vs Regional Blocks.

UNIT 13 Multilateral Institutions: World Bank: Functions and Contribution to GlobalBusiness – IMF: Organization and Contribution to Global Business –International Finance Corporation and Global Private Sector Development

UNIT 14 Multilateral Investment Guarantee Agency and Global Investment – InternationalDevelopment Association and Development of Less Developed Nations-International commercial arbitration and Settlement of International CommercialDisputes – World Intellectual Property Organization and Global Innovations.

REFERENCES1. Rugman, Collinson,. Hodgetts, International Business, Prentice Hall, 2006.

2. Fred Luthans and P. Doh, International Management, McGraw Hill, 2008

3. OdedShenkar, Yadong Luo, International Business, Sage Publications, Inc, 2007.

4. Alkhafaji A.F, Competitive Global Management: Principles and Strategies.

5. Thakur D, International Business for Third World Countries.

6. Devendra Thakur, Globalization and International Business.

7. Michael E. Porter, Competitive Advantage of Nations, Free Press,

8. Trilok N Sindhwani, The Global Business Game: A Strategic Perspective.

9. Francis Cherunilam, Global Business Environment

34

35635 - SECURITIES LAWS AND FINANCIAL MARKETS

Objectives:

• To understand the financial market and market players• To gain knowledge about SEBI and NSE

UNIT 1 Financial System: Concept and Constituents of financial system- Significance andgrowth of financial markets in India – Financial reforms and present scenario –Overview of Regulatory authorities governing financial market.

UNIT 2 Sub-sets of Financial Market: Money Market- Capital Market – Foreign ExchangeMarket -Significance and Functions- Capital market vis-à-vis money market.

UNIT 3 Market players: Investors, Companies, Intermediaries and Regulators – Types ofInvestors and Services Needed – Companies as service providers and benefiters offinancial market.

UNIT 4 Intermediaries in financial market: Types of Intermediaries in financial marketand functions- Regulators: SEBI and RBI: Functions and powers –An overview ofInternational Capital Market.

UNIT 5 Capital market instruments: Equity, preference shares, debentures, sweat equityshares, non-voting shares – New instruments of capital market – Pure, hybrid andderivatives.

UNIT 6 Global Depository Receipts: American Depository Receipts, Money MarketInstruments, Treasury Bills, Commercial Bills, Certificate of Deposits – CreditRating and Evaluation of Risk – Concepts, Scope and Significance – Benefits toInvestors

UNIT 7 Regulatory framework – Credit rating agencies in India: Processes of Ratingmethodologies for various instruments – Evaluation of risk.

UNIT 8 Primary Market: Meaning significance and scope – Developments in primarymarket – IPO and SPO – Process of floatation – Road-show, Book building andGreen shoe options.

UNIT 9 Role and Functions of Intermediary agencies and institutions involved in primarymarket: Merchant Bankers, Registrars, Underwriters, Bankers to Issue.

UNIT 10 Portfolio Managers: Debenture Trustees: Role, Regulations and Code of ConductFramed By SEBI.

UNIT 11 Secondary Market: Meaning, significance, functions and scope of secondarymarket – Functions and significance of stock exchanges: Regulatory frameworkand control.

35

UNIT 12 Secondary market intermediaries: Stock brokers, sub-brokers, advisors, theirrules, regulations and code of conduct framed by SEBI, Electronic trading insecurities.

UNIT 13 Mutual Funds and Exchange Traded Funds: Nature, Types and Risk-returnaspects of Mutual Funds and Exchange Traded Funds.

UNIT 14 Performance evaluation – SEBI and RBI regulations for mutual funds andexchange traded funds

REFERENCES

1. Balakrishnan&Narta S S, Securities Market in India.

2. Machiaraju H R, Merchant Banking, New Age International, 2009.

3. Gordon & Natarajan, Financial Services, Himalaya, 2010.

4. Aggarwal & Aggarwal, Concise Concept on Securities Laws and Compliances, Rel. Pub.

2010.

5. ICSI Study Material, Securities Laws and Regulation of Financial Markets.

36

35641 – CORPORATE SOCIAL RESPONSIBILITIES AND ETHICS

Objectives :

• To know the basic concept of CSR• To understand Corporate Social Responsibility Approaches

• To understand the Indian ethos, value and holistic management

UNIT 1 Corporate Social Responsibility Concerns: Business and Society: The SymbioticRelationship- Need for Monitoring Business Responsibility to society- Abuse ofPower and Absence of Regulations

UNIT 2 Environmental Degradations and Child labour: Environmental Degradations andno care attitude of businesses- Child labour and Business insensitivity – CorporateEspionage and Corruption

UNIT 3 Tax Evasion, Market Manipulation, Window Dressing, Insider Trading, TransferPricing and Fraudulent Practices harming consumers- Moral Collapse andGovernance Deficit.

UNIT 4 Corporate Social Responsibility Need: Relationship between business and Society– Need for social Responsibility – Nature and assumptions of social responsibility– Dimensions of social Responsibility

UNIT 5 Myths and reality of Corporate Social Responsibility: Arguments for and againstSocial Responsibility of Business - Social Accountability – social responsibilitytools – Social Accounting Social Audit.

UNIT 6 Corporate Social Responsibility Approaches: Approaches to CSR – CorporateSocial Accountability - Economic issues of CSR – Legislations governing CSR -Indian Examples – Corporate Social Reporting

UNIT 7 Contribution of NGOs to CSR – Corporate Governance and Corporate Socialresponsibility – Corporate Social Accountability – CSR Voluntary Guidelines,2009- Fulfillment Levels of CSR.

UNIT 8 Business Ethics: Meaning – Objectives of ethics – Business ethics – Businessethics and profits – Nature and Ethical need for Business Ethics – Characteristicsof business ethics – Arguments for and against business ethics

UNIT 9 Business ethics as a field of study - Corporate corruption – Abuse of power bycorporate: Areas and Abetments for abuse – Ethical Decay and GovernanceDilution – Consequences.

UNIT 10 Indian Ethos for Management: Basic Principles of Management as per ancientIndian wisdom and insight – Work life in Indian philosophy

37

UNIT 11 Indian ethos for the work life – Indian values for the work place – Respect forelders – Respect for hierarchy and status – Rights and duties – Quality ofwork life in Indian philosophy and status.

UNIT 12 Rights and duties – Quality of work life in Indian philosophy – Code of conductfor corporate.

UNIT 13 Value Oriented Holistic Management : Importance of character – values –wholeness – Goodness – Courage – Self discipline – Living by inner truth –Dharma of organization / management – Value driven management

UNIT 14 Exploitation of nature – Man machine equation – Indian culture and wisdomethical / spiritual values – Management effectiveness based on values – Need ofvalue based holistic in Management in India.

REFERENCES

1. Larue Tone Hosmer and La Rue Hosmer, The Ethics in Management, Irwin, 2002

2. Naresh B Shah, Values / Ethics in Management – Relevance & Application.

3. Sherlekar, Ethics in Management, Himalaya, 2008

4. David Murray, Ethics in Management, Crest Pub.2001.

5. Marianne M. Jennings, Cases in Business Ethics, Delhi: Cengage Learning India.

6. Balachandran &Chandrasekaran, Corporate Governance & Social Responsibility,

Prentice Hall, 2010.

7. Manna S &Chakraborti S, Values and Ethics in Business and Profession, PHI, 2010.

38

35642 - CORPORATE FINANCE AND TAX MANAGEMENT

Objectives :

• To know the basic concept of Corporate Finance and Tax management• To gain knowledge on cost , capital budgeting and Tax

UNIT 1 Financial Management: Concept, nature, evaluation and significance – FinanceFunctions: Managerial and operative

UNIT 2 Investment Function: Meaning and scope – Financing Function: Meaning andscope – Dividend function – Risk return trade off – Financial planning

UNIT 3 Global financial environment- Finance and Tax Management Nexus- TaxAvoidance and Tax evasion- Tax incentive and business decisions.

UNIT 4 Long-term Capital Resources: Equity and debt sources – Equity share, preferenceshares and debentures as sources of long-term capital – Bridge finance, loansyndication, Book building

UNIT 5 Borrowings from the term lending institutions and International capital market-Tax considerations in Financing decision areas.

UNIT 6 Cost of Capital and Determinants of capital structure: Concept of cost of capital-Cost of debt, equity, preference share capital, retaining earning – Weightedaverage cost: Computation of overall cost of capital.

UNIT 7 Tax and cost of capital- Capital structure: Concept and Types- Optimum capitalstructure – Theories of capital structure –Net income and net operative incometheories – M.M. theory – Traditional theory – Their assumptions, Significanceand limitations.

UNIT 8 Financial leverage operating leverage – Combined leverage – EBIT –EPSAnalysis- Tax, Capital structure and Value nexus.

UNIT 9 Capital budgeting: Meaning, Nature and Types of Capital investment- Methods ofappraisal under certainty conditions: PBP, ARR, IRR and NPV techniques

UNIT 10 Uncertainty and Risk models: Simulation Analysis- Sensitivity analysis- Decisiontree analysis- Certainty equivalent and risk-adjusted return measures.

UNIT 11 Tax considerations in Investment decisions Cost of capital and InvestmentDecisions- Leasing Vs. Investment: Evaluation and Tax implications.

39

UNIT 12 Working Capital: Concept and types – Determinants – Financing approaches –Conservative – Aggressive and hedging approaches – Sources of working capitalfinance – Working capital financing by commercial banks.

UNIT 13 Inventory Management under conditions of certainty and uncertainty- CreditManagement and evaluation alternative credit variables- Cash and liquiditymanagement: Methods and Functions- Tax considerations in Remittances andPurchases.

UNIT 14 Dividend Theories: Valuation under Gordon and Walter theories – Dividendirrelevance under M.M. theory – Assumptions – Limitations – Dividend Policy:Different policies and practices – Factors affecting dividend decision – Taxconsiderations in dividend decision when tax is levied at the hands of companiesand recipients.

REFERENCES

1. Brigham and Ehrhardt, Financial Management: Theory & Practice, Thomson ONE, 2010



4. Jeff Madura, International Financial Management, South-Western College Pub., 2010

5. Prasanna Chandra, Financial Management, 2008.

6. Khan and Jain, Financial Management, 2009

7. Pandey I M, Financial Management, 2007.

40

35643 - CORPORATE GOVERNANCE

Objectives:

• To know the basic concept of Corporate Governance

• To understand the corporate legal environment

UNIT 1 Corporate Governance – Meaning – Nature and Evolution of CorporateGovernance - need – objectives – Corporate Governance Models – Featuresconsequences of mis-governance - need for voluntary compliance beyondregulations.

UNIT 2 Requirements to strengthen Corporate Governance – Sustainability and CorporateGovernance - Popularly espoused principles of corporate governance.

UNIT 3 Governance Deficit in Corporates: Principal-Agent Problem- Major controllinginterest and mal-governance for personal gain or corporate window-dressing

UNIT 4 Creative accounting- Corporate scandals: Types and Examples- Lessons -Sarbanes-Oxley Act in 2002 of USA- Role of Auditors under scan.

UNIT 5 Regulation: Legal environment – General- Codes and guidelines- Parties tocorporate governance: Ownership structures and elements, Family ownership andInstitutional investors

UNIT 6 Mechanisms and controls: Internal measures: Monitoring the Board, Internalchecks and audit, Limits on Executive salary and Balance of Power

UNIT 7 External corporate governance controls: Competition, Media, Government, Take-over threats, Accounting standards and Labour Unions- Systemic problems ofcorporate governance.

UNIT 8 Board of Directors: Composition of the Board – Board structure – Buildingresponsive boards - Selection of Members of the Board – Duties andResponsibilities of the Board.

UNIT 9 Functions of the Board – Management of the Board – Ethical and professionalstandards of Individual Directors- Governance and Role of different types ofDirectors – Inside Directors – Outside Directors – Nominee Directors.

UNIT 10 Extended role of Nominee directors in ensuring governance greatness-Professional Directors – Managing Director – Independent Directors – Role andfunctions

UNIT 11 Chairman of the Board and Board Efficiency: Functions and Responsibilities ofChairman of the Corporation- Various Committees on Corporate Governance –Clause 49 of Listing Agreement – Features - Mandatory and Non Mandatorydisclosures- CEO – Responsibilities

41

UNIT 12 Role of SEBI in Corporate Governance – Audit Committees – Functions-Effectives of the Board – Evaluation of the Board – Effectiveness of the Board –Parameters judging the board effectiveness – Internal control system and riskmanagement- Corporate Governance Award by ICSI- Criteria for Award.

UNIT 13 Corporate Governance Practices: Corporate social Entrepreneurship –CorporateSocial Responsibility- Corporate Transparency

UNIT 14 Corporate Governance In banking and insurance sector – Governance in PublicSector Vs Private Sector – Current Practices – Issues and Challenges.

REFERENCES

1. Gopalswamy. N, Corporate Governance, The New Paradigm, Wheeler Publishers, 2005

2. Monks, Robert. A.G., Corporate Governance, Blackwell Publishing Company, 2003.

3. Corporate Governance, ICSI Publication, Lodi Road, New Delhi.

4. Corporate Governance, Ethics and sustainable Development, ICSI Course Material.

5. Balachandran and Chandrasekaran, Corporate Governance and Social Responsibilities,

Prentice Hall of India, 2010

6. Singh S, Corporate Governance, Excel Books, 2006

7. Walter Effross, Corporate Governance: Principles & Practices, Aspen, 2009.

42

35644 - CORPORATE AUDIT AND COMPLIANCE MANAGEMENT

Objectives:

• To know the basic concept of Corporate audit

• To understand types of audit and its importance• To gain knowledge on securities and compliance management

UNIT 1 Auditing Types: Nature and scope of auditing – Auditing techniques andpractices – Generally acceptable auditing standards – Accreditation services.

UNIT 2 Internal check and Internal control- Audit Plan- Operational Audit- AnalyticalProcedures- Types of Audit: Internal and External audits- Internal check andInternal control.

UNIT 3 Financial Audit- Management Audit - Cost Audit- Statutory audit- Corporateaudit- Auditing quality needs enhancements.

UNIT 4 Compliance Management: Concept and significance – Systems approach incompliance management – Process of establishment of compliance managementsystem- Certification,

UNIT 5 Due diligence and Signing: Meaning and scope of certification – Due diligenceand signing of various documents under corporate and security laws includingsigning of declaration with respect to incorporation of companies andcommencement of Business

UNIT 6 Signing of Annual returns – Certification under buy back of securities rules -Certification of occasion of transfer of deeds

UNIT 7 Secretarial Audit – Need objectives and scope – Secretarial Audit Process-Periodicity and format,

UNIT 8 Checklist under various Corporate Laws & Share transfer audit- Secretarial Auditof Registrar and Transfer Agents (RTAs).

UNIT 9 Compliance Certificate: Concept and deed, Appraisal of secretarial compliances –Specimen compliance Certificate.

UNIT 10 Securities management and compliances: Meaning, Need and Scope – Mechanismfor self regulations.

UNIT 11 Due diligence of Pre-capital issue work: Appraisal of documents relating to issueof capital viz. prospectus, Letter of offer and other documents to be filed withsecurities and Exchange Board of India.

43

UNIT 12 Registrar of companies – Stock Exchange and other authorities – Ensuringcompliance of listing and other requirements – Insider Trading – Prevention ofFraudulent Practices.

UNIT 13 Due diligences of Post capital issue work: Approval of post capital issuecompliances including dispatch of refund order / Certificate to investors

UNIT 14 Filing compliance certificate with SEBI and other authorities – Ensuringcompliance of listing Guidelines.

REFERENCES

1. V. Sithapathy&Ramadevi R. IYER, Corporate Governance Practice & Procedure, 2006.

2. Prakash Pandya & R. Balakrishnan, Compliance Guide to Corporate Governance (with

check lists specimen / formats) , 2006

3. Navin Chandra Joshi, Corporate Management.

4. Balachandran and Ravichandran, Secretarial Securities and Management Audit, Bharat

Law House, New Delhi.

5. Jill Gilbert Welytok, Sarbanes-Oxley, Dummies, 2006.

44

35645 - CORPORATE RESTRUCTURING

Objectives:

• To know the scenario of the global corporate• To understand the procedure for merger acquisition

UNIT 1 Introduction: Meaning of corporate restructuring – Need, scope and modes ofrestructuring – Global scenario

UNIT 2 National scenario – Strategic planning – Competitive advantage and corecompetence – Strategy formulation – Routes for executing strategy

UNIT 3 Start up - mergers - Causes for Merging - Acquisitions - Takeovers, dis-investments and strategic alliances.

UNIT 4 Mergers and Amalgamations Concept - Need for M&A– Legal aspects –Importance of M&A- benefits

UNIT 5 Procedural aspects relating to commencing of meetings and presentation ofpetition including documentation.

UNIT 6 Takeovers -Meaning and concept – Types of takeovers – Legal aspects –Securities and Exchange Board of India takeover regulations

UNIT 7 Takeover Code – Procedural aspects – Economic aspects – Financial aspects –Payment of consideration – Bail out takeovers – Takeover of sick units.

UNIT 8 Demergers & Reverse mergers - Corporate Demergers / Splits and Divisions andPost Merger Re-Organization- Difference between demergers and reconstructionmodes of demerger

UNIT 9 By agreement, under scheme of arrangement, by voluntary winding up -Procedures – types of voluntary winding up Tax aspects.

UNIT 10 Tax reliefs – Indian scenario – Reverse mergers- effects on Share price- reversetakeover – merits and demerits.

UNIT 11 Post Merger Re-organization - Accomplishment of objectives – Criteria ofsuccess – Profitability – Gains to post merger valuation

UNIT 12 Post merger – meaning- integration frame work- issues - efficiency – Factors inpost merger re-organization.

UNIT 13 Financial Restructuring Buy-back of shares – Concept and necessity – Securitiesand Exchange Board of India guidelines –

UNIT 14 Government’s guidelines – Procedure and practice for buy-back of shares –Procedure- reasons for buy-back of shares.

45

REFERENCES

1. Fred Weston, Mitchell and Mulherin, Takeovers, Restructuring, and Corporate

Governance, Prentice Hall, 2003.

2. Fred Weston J, Kwang S Chmg& Susan E Hoag, Merger, Restructuring and

Corporate Control.

3. Verma J C, Corporate Mergers, Amalgamations and Takeovers, Jain book depot, 2008.

4. Machiaraju H R, Merchant Banking, New Age International, 2009.

5. ICSI Study Material, Corporate Restructuring: Law and Practice.

6. Patrick A. Gaughan, Mergers, Acquisitions, and Corporate Restructurings Wiley, 2007.

46













Karaikudi.


EVALUATION


A candidate who has passed any Bachelor Degree from a recognized University in the Pattern of






47




Total 80




Assessment via. Student assignments preparation and seminar, etc. The internal assessment shall

comprise of maximum 25 marks for each course. The end semester examination shall be of three

hours duration to each course at the end of each semester. The end semester examinations shall




Component Marks


25

Total 25




48




marks).



Passing minimum

• There shall be no Passing Minimum for Internal.

• For External Examination, Passing Minimum shall be of 50% (Fifty Percentage) of themaximum marks (75) prescribed for the paper.

• In the aggregate (External + Internal) the passing minimum shall be of 50 Mark for eachPaper

• Grading shall be based on overall marks obtained (internal + external).


Marks and Grades:




80-89 8.0-8.9 D+ Excellent


70-74 7.0-7.4 A+ Very Good

60-69 6.0-6.9 A Good

50-59 5.0-5.9 B Average


49



For a semester;









9.5-10.0


O+

O





D++

D+

D





A++

A+

A

First Class



B+

B

Second Class


50



The maximum duration for completion of MBA degree shall not exceed five years after thecompletion of the minimum duration of the programme.



Fee structure


First

Year

SecondYear


300.00 -

2 Course Fees 13200.00 13200.00

5 ICT Fees 150.00 150.00

TOTAL 13650.00 13350.00


LIBRARY RESOURCES







51








support services like course material, library and infrastructure.• It helps to Strengthen the contents of the program to meet the requirements of the



****

52

53


MBA CORPORATE SECRETARYSHIP




MBA CORPORATE SECRETARYSHIP














Therefore, the introduction of MBA CORPORATE SECRETARYSHIP programme in the




















• In nutshell, these skills will improve the performance of the student’s parameters.

E) INSTRUCTIONAL DESIGNMBA CORPORATE SECRETARYSHIP

CourseCode

Title CIAMax.

ESEMax.

TOTMax.

C





33131 Marketing Management 25 75 100 433132 Financial Management 25 75 100 433133 Labour and Industrial Laws 25 75 100 433134 Securities Laws and Financial Markets 25 75 100 433135 Indirect Taxes 25 75 100 4

Total 125 375 500 20

IV Semester33141 Company Secretarial Practice 25 75 100 433142 Corporate Restructuring: Law and Practice 25 75 100 433143 Drafting and Conveyancing 25 75 100 4

33144 Economic Legislations 25 75 100 4

33145 Secretarial and Management Audit 25 75 100 4

Total 125 375 500 20

Grand Total 2000 80

Course Code Legend:

3 3 1 Y Z


CIA: Continuous Internal Assessment, ESE: End Semester Examination, TOT: Total, C:Credit Points, Max.: Maximum













UNIT 9 Directing : Meaning, Purpose, and Scope in the organization – Leadership:Meaning, Leadership styles, Leadership theories: Trait, Contingency,Situation, Path-Goal, Tactical, Transactional, Transformational and Grid.Leaders: Type, Nature, Significance and Functions, Barriers, Politics andEthics. Leader Vs. Manager.






REFERENCES






McGraw Hill.





















REFERENCES





2006.




Bacon, 1993.


















Press, 2011.








Pearson















UNIT 9 Operational research for Decision Making: Historical background andDevelopments – Definition – Phases in the use of Operations research –Models – Characteristics of quantitative methods - Benefits and Limitations ofQuantitative methods.






REFERENCES




































Publishers.


Publication.




33121- RESEARCH METHODSObjectives:
















REFERENCES



3. William Josiah Goode and Paul K. Hatt, Methods of Social Research, McGraw

Hill, 1981.

4. Wilkinson and Bhandarkar, Methods and Techniques of Social Research, 2003,

HPH.



Publications, 2008.


Mumbai


9. Pauline V Young, Scientific Social Surveys and Research, Prentice-Hall,

(Digitalized) 2007.


















REFERENCES



McGraw-Hill, 2008.





House, 2008.



















REFERENCES


2010.






















REFERENCES


2011.



2008.








Objectives:

• To understand the concepts and methods and techniques of Human Resource Management• To know the Human resource management theories and real time practices• To identify the contemporary issues in human resource management

UNIT 1: Introduction to Human Resource Management: Concept, Definition, Objectives,Nature and Scope of HRM - Functions of HRM – Evolution of human resourcemanagement - Role and structure of Human Resource Function in organizations-Challenges in Human Resource Management


UNIT 3 Human Resource Planning: Personnel Policy - Characteristics - Role of humanresource manager – Human resource policies – Need, Scope and Process – Jobanalysis – Job description – Job specification- Succession Planning.


UNIT 5 Employee Testing & selection : Selection process, basic testing concepts, types oftest, work samples & simulation, selection techniques, interview, commoninterviewing mistakes, Designing & conducting the effective interview, smallbusiness applications, computer aided interview.

UNIT 6 Training and Development: Orientation & Training: Orienting the employees,the training process, need analysis, Training techniques, special purpose training,Training via the internet. - Need Assessment - Training methods forOperatives and Supervisors

UNIT 7 Executive Development: Need and Programs - Computer applications in humanresource management – Human resource accounting and audit. On-the - job andoff-the-job Development techniques using HR to build a responsive organization

UNIT 8 Employee Compensation : Wages and Salary Administration – Bonus –Incentives – Fringe Benefits –Flexi systems - and Employee Benefits, Health andSocial Security Measures,

UNIT 9 Employee Retention: Need and Problems of Employees – various retentionmethods– Implication of job change. The control process – Importance – Methods– Employment retention strategies for production and services industry

UNIT 10 Appraising and Improving Performance: Performance Appraisal Programs,Processes and Methods, Job Evaluation, Managing Compensation, IncentivesPerformance appraisal: Methods - Problem and solutions - MBO approach - Theappraisal interviews - Performance appraisal in practice.

UNIT 11 Managing careers: Career planning and development - Managing promotions andtransfers - Sweat Equity- Job evaluation systems – Promotion – Demotions –Transfers- Labour Attrition: Causes and Consequences



UNIT 14 Human Resource Information System- Personnel Records/ Reports- e-Record onEmployees – Personnel research and personnel audit – Objectives – Scope andimportance.

REFERENCES


2.Nkomo, Fottler and McAfee, Human Resource Management, South-WesternCollege, 2007.









33131- MARKETING MANAGEMENTObjectives:


UNIT 1 Introduction to Marketing: Meaning and Scope of Marketing; MarketingPhilosophies; Marketing Management Process-an overview; Modern MarketingConcept: Social marketing concept – Approaches to the study of marketing.

UNIT 2 Marketing segmentation: Meaning – Bases for segmentation, benefits – Systemsapproach - Four Ps of Product and Seven Ps Service marketing mix andExtensions- Targeting and Positioning - meaning and importance.

UNIT 3 Marketing Environment: Internal and External and Demographic factors –Adopting marketing to new liberalized and globalized economy – Digitalization –Customization and E business settings.

UNIT 4 Consumer Behaviour : Meaning and importance – Consumer buying process –Determinants and Theories of consumer behaviour – Psychological, sociologicaldeterminants – Theories and their relevance to marketing-


UNIT 6 Product Mix Management: Product planning and development – Meaning andprocess – Test marketing – Product failures – Product line management: Practices– Implications and Strategies for current market condition.

UNIT 7 Product life cycles: Meaning and Stages – Strategies – Managing PLC- Product-Market Integration: Strategies – Product positioning – Diversification – Productline simplification – Planned obsolescence – Branding Policies and Strategies –Packing.

UNIT 8 Price Mix Management: Pricing and pricing policies – Objectives – Procedures –Bases for and Methods of price fixing. Cases for Free Pricing, Administered andRegulated pricing – Pricing and product life cycle


UNIT 10 Marketing Channel system: Marketing channel decisions: Choice considerations–Managing Conflict and Cooperation in channels – Middlemen functions- ModernTrends in Retailing- Malls and Online.


UNIT 12 Integrated marketing communication Process: Advertising and sales promotion –Online Sales promotional activities – Public relationships – Direct marketing:Meaning, Nature, Growth and Channels.

UNIT 13 Advertising: Importance – Objectives – Media planning and selection – Factorsinfluencing selection – Advertisement copy – Layout – Evaluation of advertising– Advertising budget – Sales promotion – Methods and practices.

UNIT 14 Competitor analyses: Identifying and analyzing the competitors – Types ofCompetitors – Competitive strategies framing for leaders, challengers, followersand nichers. Customer relationship marketing: Customer data base, Data warehousing and data mining

REFERENCES










10. Michael J Etzel, Bruce J Walker, William J Stanton and Ajay Pandit, Marketing conceptsand cases - TMH 13th Edition, New Delhi, 2007.


Objectives:• To help the students to know the basic concepts of financial management• To understand capital structure, dividend policy and working capital management.• To learn the various concepts of financial management along with applications

UNIT 1 Introduction: Financial management: objectives - Concept, nature, evaluation andsignificance – Finance Functions: Managerial and operative – Role of Financialmanagement in the organization – Indian Financial system.

UNIT 2 Financial System: Legal and Regulatory frame work – Financial Functions:Meaning and scope – Finance and Tax Management Nexus- Tax Avoidance andTax evasion- Tax incentive and business decisions.

UNIT 3 Investment Function: Meaning and scope - Time value of Money concepts andapplications –Risk return relationship - Dividend function – Risk return trade off –Management planning- Global management environment

UNIT 4 Long-term Capital Resources: Equity and debt sources – Equity share, preferenceshares – types of preference share - debentures – types - sources of long-termcapital.

UNIT 5 Capital Issues: Meaning, Nature, Purpose – Roles and Guidelines of SEBI incapital issues- Bridge finance, loan syndication, Book building – Borrowings fromthe term lending institutions and International capital market- Tax considerationsin financing decision areas.

UNIT 6 Cost of Capital : Concept of cost of capital- Cost of debt, equity, preference sharecapital, retaining earning - Weighted average cost: EBIT –EPS Analysis- Tax,Capital structure and Value nexus - Computation of overall cost of capital – Taxand cost of capital.

UNIT 7 Capital structure: Determinates - Concept and Types- Optimum capital structure –Theories of capital structure – Net income and net operative income approach –M.M. Approach – Traditional theory – Their assumptions – Significance andlimitations – Management leverage operating leverage – Combined leverage.

UNIT 8 Capital budgeting: Meaning, Nature and Types of Capital Investment- Methods ofappraisal under certainty conditions: PBP, ARR, IRR and NPV techniques - Basicand International capital budgeting.

UNIT 9 Uncertainty and Risk models: Simulation Analysis- Sensitivity analysis- Decisiontree analysis- Certainty equivalent and risk-adjusted return measures- Taxconsiderations in Investment Decisions Cost of capital and Investment Decisions.

UNIT 10 Working Capital Management: Definitions and Objectives - Concept and types –Determinants – Financing approaches – Conservative approaches - Sources ofworking capital finance Factors affecting working capital requirements- Workingcapital financing by commercial banks – Types of assistance


UNIT 12 Cash and liquidity management: Credit Management and evaluation alternativecredit variables Methods and Functions- Tax considerations in Remittances andPurchases.

UNIT 13 Dividend Theories: Valuation under Gordon and Walter theories – Dividendirrelevance under M.M. Theory – Assumptions – Limitations - Implications andcontributions of theories in financial decision making process.

UNIT 14 Dividend Policy: Types – Share valuation practices – Factors affecting dividenddecision – Tax considerations in dividend decision when tax is levied at the handsof companies and recipients.

REFERENCES

1. Brigham and Ehrhardt, Financial Management: Theory & Practice, Thomson ONE, 2010








9. B J Camsey, Engene F.Brigham, “Introduction to Financial Management”, The Gryden Press

33133 - LABOUR AND INDUSTRIAL LAWSObjectives:

• To Identify of corporate environment and uncertain conditions• To know Existence of Independent Management units

UNIT 1 Factories Act, 1948: Provisions relating to health, safety, welfare, working hours,leave etc. of workers approval

UNIT 2 Licensing and registration of factories – Manager and occupier – Theirobligations under the Act – Powers of the authorities under the Act – Penaltyprovisions.

UNIT 3 Workmen’s Compensation Act, 1923Employer’s liability for compensation – Amount of compensation method ofcalculating wages; review; distribution of compensation – Notice and claims –

UNIT 4 Statements regarding facts, accidents – Medical examination – Remedies ofemployer against stranger – Returns as to compensation – Commission forworkmen’s compensation.

UNIT 5: Industrial Dispute Act, 1947Industrial disputes – Authorities of settlement of industrial disputes – Referenceof industrial disputes – Procedures; power and duties of authorities – settlementand strikes – Lock-outs – Lay-off

UNIT 6 Retrenchment – Transfer and Closure – Unfair labour practices – Miscellaneousprovision offences by companies – Conditions of service to remain unchangedunder certain circumstances, etc

UNIT 7 Employee’s State Insurance Act, 1948Registration of Factories and Establishments – The Employee’s State InsuranceCorporation – Standing Committee and Medical Benefit Council – Provisionsrelating to contributions

UNIT 8 Inspectors – Their functions and disputes and claims – Offences and penalties –Miscellaneous provisions.

UNIT 9 Employee’s Provident Fund and Miscellaneous Provisions Act,1952: EmployeeProvident Fund and other schemes – Determination and recovery of money duefrom employer

UNIT 10 Appointment of Inspectors and their duties – Provisions relating to transfer ofaccounts and liability in case of transfer of establishment – Exemption under theAct – Court’s power under the Act.

UNIT 11 Payment of Gratuity Act, 1972: Payment of Gratuity – Exemption – Nomination –Determination and recovery of the amount of gratuity.Payment of Wages Act, 1936: Object – Definitions – Rules for payment of wages– Deductions from wages – Maintenance of registers and records.

UNIT 12 Trade Union Act, 1926: Registration of Trade Unions – Rights and liabilities oftrade unions – Procedure – Penalties.

UNIT 13 Payment of Bonus Act, 1965: Computation of available surplus calculation ofdirect tax payable by the employer – Eligibility for bonus and payment of bonus –Deduction from bonus payable

UNIT 14 Adjustment of customary or interim bonus payable – Set on and set off allocablesurplus – Presumption about accuracy of balance sheet and profit and lossaccount.

REFERENCE BOOKS :

1. Kapoor N D, Industrial Law.

2. Shukla M C, Mercantile Law.

3. Kalra and Batra, Industrial Law.

33134 - SECURITIES LAWS AND FINANCIAL MARKETS

Objectives:

• To know securities laws and financial market• To understand the features and other factor financial markets

UNIT 1: An Overview of Financial System-Constituents of financial system, significance,development and growth of financial and capital markets in India – Financialreforms and present scenario

UNIT 2 Regulatory authorities governing financial and capital market

UNIT 3 An introduction- meaning and significance of capital market – Capital market vis-à-vis money market.

UNIT 4 Market players – Investors and companies – Securities laws/regulatory frameworkgoverning Indian capital market – SEBI – Role and powers

UNIT 5 Role and functions of depository – Depository participants – An overview ofinternational capital market.

UNIT 6 Financial Instruments-Capital market instruments – Equity, preference shares,debentures, sweat equity shares, non-voting shares – New instruments of capitalmarket

UNIT 7 Pure, hybrid and derivatives, global depository receipts, American depositoryreceipts, money market instruments, treasury bills, commercial bills, certificate ofdeposits – Credit Rating and Evaluation of Risk

UNIT 8 Concepts, scope and significance – Benefits to investors – regulatory framework –Credit rating agencies in India; their processes

UNIT 9 Rating methodologies for various instruments – Evaluation of risk.

UNIT 10 Primary Market-Meaning significance and scope – Developments in primarymarket – Various agencies and institutions involved in primary market

UNIT 11 Role of intermediaries – Merchant bankers, registrars, underwriters, bankers toissue, portfolio managers – Debenture -Trustees – Their rules, regulations andcode of conduct framed by SEBI.

UNIT 12 Secondary Market-Meaning, significance, functions and scope of secondarymarket – Functions and significance of stock exchanges; their regulatoryframework and control

UNIT 13 Secondary market intermediaries – Stock brokers, sub-brokers, advisors, theirrules, regulations and code of conduct framed by SEBI, Electronic trading insecurities.

UNIT 14 Mutual Funds-Introduction – Definition – Types – Risks involved – performanceevaluation – SEBI and RBI regulations for mutual funds.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Balakrishnan&Narta S S, Securities Market in India.2. Machiraju H R, Merchant Banking.3. Gordon & Natarajan, Financial Services.4. ICSI Study Material, Securities Laws and Regulation of Financial Markets.

33135 - INDIRECT TAXESObjectives:

• To Identify the concept of Indirect taxes and other risk• To analysis the application of various provision relating to Indirect Tax

UNIT1 : Central Excise Laws-Special features of indirect tax levies - Contribution toGovernment revenues – role of indirect taxation - Merits and demerits of indirecttaxation

UNIT 2 Reforms in indirect taxation – Meaning of Central Excise - Nature of levy ofexcise duty - Bases of excise duty - Kinds of excise duty

UNIT 3 Administrative set up of Excise department - Central Excise Tariff Act, 1985 -Manufacture and manufacturer - Excisable goods.

UNIT 4 Valuation of excisable goods - Essentials - Excise duty based on MRP -Registration - Procedure for registration

UNIT 5 Amendments to certificate of registration – Clearance of excisable goods – Types– records.

UNIT 6 Value Added Tax – objectives – VAT in India – Advantages – CENVAT –objectives and scope – Method of availing CENVAT benefit – advantages

UNIT 7 MODVAT and CENVAT -Difference– – Service Tax – levy and collection –applicability

UNIT 8 Service tax for management services and Professional services – Tax Planning inExcise.

UNIT 9 Service Tax: Levy and collection – Applicability – Service tax for management

services and professional services – Tax planning in excise and service tax.

UNIT 10 The Customs Laws-Objectives – Scope – Levy and collection of customs duty -Types of customs duty - Prohibition of importation and exportation of goods –

UNIT 11 Special business for detection and prevention of illegal import and export. -Valuation of goods under Customs Act - Warehousing of goods- Customs dutydrawback - Tax planning in customs.

UNIT 12 Sales Tax Laws Objectives and Scope – Levy and collection of CST - Inter-Statesale and Intra-State sale - Sale in the course of export/ import

UNIT 13 Penultimate sale - Registration of dealers - Registration procedure - Taxableturnover - Rate of tax - Goods of special importance

UNIT 14 various forms used in CST Act - Tax planning under CST

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Jain R K, Central Excise Manual, Central Publications, New Delhi.

2. Bhatnagar SP, Customs Law and Procedure, Centax Publications, New Delhi.

3. Donakia, Central Sales Tax, Bharat Law Book House, New Delhi.

4. Balachandran V, Indirect Taxation, Sultan Chand & Sons, New Delhi.

5. DateyV S, Indirect Taxes, Taxmann Publications, New Delhi.

6. Arvid P Dattar, Central Excise Law and Practice, WadwaPubl, New Delhi.

7. Ragunathan, Central Excise Law and Procedures, CentaxPubl, New Delhi.

33141 - COMPANY SECRETARIAL PRACTICEObjectives:

• To know the concept of Corporate Secretaryship practices• To understand the company secretaryship practices issues , challenges

UNIT1 Incorporations And Conversion Of Companies - Procedure for incorporation ofPrivate / Public Ltd. Companies - Commencement of business

UNIT 2 Issue of certificate of incorporation and Commencement of business - Specimenresolutions.

.UNIT3 Share Capital, Transfer and Transmission - Procedure for allotment of shares -

Issue of share certificates and share warrants

UNIT 4 Procedures relating to transfer of shares and transmission –Forfeiture ofshares - Checklists and specimen resolutions.

UNIT 5 Company Management - Procedures for the appointment - Re-appointment -Removal of directors including managing and

UNIT 6 Whole-time directors, managers, company auditors and sole selling agents -Specimen resolutions.

UNIT 7 Company Meetings - Calling and conducting meetings of Board, its committees,shareholders and others

UNIT 8 Post meeting formalities including writing of minutes - Specimen notices andresolutions

UNIT 9 Directors responsibility statement and compliance certificate.

UNIT 10 Accounts and Audit - Preparation of Balance Sheet – Profit and Loss Account

UNIT 11 Income and Expenditure statement – Auditor’s report – Director’s report

UNIT 12 Maintenance of books of accounts – Statutory registers and returns.

UNIT 13 Winding up - Procedures for various modes of winding up – Members andcreditors voluntary winding up

UNIT 14 Compulsory winding up by Court – Specimen resolutions.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Tandon B.N, A Manual on Secretarial Practice.2. Shanbhogue K.V, Company Law Procedures.3. Ghosh P.K &Balachandran.V, Company Secretarial Practice.4. Pattenshetti& Reddy P.R, Company Secretarial Practice.

33142 - CORPORATE RESTRUCTURING: LAW & PRACTICE

Objectives:

• To know the concept of corporate restructuring law & practice• To analysis of corporate restructuring: law & practice

UNIT 1 Introduction - Meaning of corporate restructuring - Need, scope and modes ofrestructuring - Global scenario

UNIT 2 National scenario – Strategic planning - Competitive advantage and corecompetence - Strategy formulation

UNIT 3 Routes for executing strategy - Start up, mergers, acquisitions, takeovers,disinvestments and strategic alliances.

UNIT 4 Mergers And Amalgamations-Concept need and reasons - Legal aspects -Procedural aspects relating to commencing of meetings and presentation ofpetition is including documentation.

UNIT5 Takeovers- Meaning and concept - Types of takeovers - Legal aspects - Securitiesand Exchange Board of India takeover regulations

UNIT 6 Takeover Code - Procedural aspects - Economic aspects - Financial aspects

UNIT 7 Payment of consideration - Bail out takeovers - Takeover of sick units.

UNIT 8 Corporate Demergers/ Splits and Divisions and Post Merger Re-Organisation -Difference between demergers and reconstruction modes of demerger

UNIT 9 By agreement, under scheme of arrangement, by voluntary winding up

UNIT 10 Tax aspects - Tax reliefs - Indian scenario - Reverse mergers.

UNIT 11 Post Merger - Re-organisation - Accomplishment of objectives - Criteria ofsuccess - Profitability - Gains to post merger valuation

UNIT 12 Measuring post-merger efficiency - Factors in post-merger re-organisation.

UNIT 13 Financial Restructuring - Buy-back of shares - Concept and necessity- Securitiesand Exchange Board of India guidelines

UNIT 14 Government's guidelines - Procedure and practice for buy-back of shares.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Fred Weston J, Kwang S Chmg& Susan E Hoag, Merger, Restructuring and CorporateControl.

2. Verma J C, Corporate Mergers, Amalgamations and Takeovers.

3. Machiraju H R, Merchant Banking.

4. BrojendraNath Banerjee, Company Takeover.

5. ICSI Study Material, Corporate Restructuring: Law and Practice.

33143 - DRAFTING AND CONVEYANCING

Objectives:

• To know the concept of Corporate Drafting• To understand in corporate conveyancing

UNIT 1 General Principles of Drafting: Rules for drafting - Use of appropriate words andexpressions - Aids to clarity and accuracy - Legal implications and requirements

UNIT 2 General Principles of Conveyancing: Meaning - Basic requirements of deeds oftransfers - Description of deed, practices, recitals testatum

UNIT 3 Consideration of operative words - Exceptions and reservations - Habendum -Testimonium - Signature and attestation - Endorsement and supplement deeds.

UNIT 4 Drafting of Orders and Contracts

UNIT 5 Drafting Orders: Appointment orders - Suspension orders - Order of dismissal anddischarge - Charge sheets - Apprenticeship agreements.

UNIT 6 Drafting of Contracts: Agreements to sell/ purchase - Dealership contracts -Building contracts - Agency contracts - Collaboration agreements - Arbitrationagreements

UNIT 7 Deeds of Mortgages, Charges and Pledges

UNIT 8 Different types of mortgage deeds - Deeds of further charge in mortgagedproperty - Mortgage by deposit of title deeds - Deeds of floating charges - Deedsof appointment of receiver - Other charges - Memorandum of pledge of movables.

UNIT 9 Deed of Assignment Business debts - Shares in a company - Policies ininsurance

UNIT 10 Patents, trademarks, copyrights - Business and goodwill and other rights andinterests - Deed of exchange and gift deeds.

UNIT 11 Drafting of other Documents, Petitions and Applications

UNIT 12 Drafting of applications and petitions to public financial institutions, appellateauthorities under taxation and other corporate legislations.

UNIT 13 Deeds of Power of Attorney

UNIT 14 Revocable - Irrevocable - General and Particular letters of authority – Appeals,writ petitions, special leave petition - Revision and review applications, affidavits.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Bahl&Nagamaiya, Business Communication.

2. Sharma R C & Krishna Mohan, Business Correspondence and Report Writing.

3. ICSI Study Material, secretarial Practice relating to Economic Laws.

33144 - ECONOMIC LEGISLATIONSObjectives:

• To know the concept of Economic Legislations• To analysis as tasks of economic Legislations

UNIT1 Industries (Development and Regulation) Act- Objects and definitions - Anoverview of current industrial policy; regulatory mechanism

UNIT 2 Registration and licensing of industrial undertakings, government agencies,exemption from licensing provisions - Substantial expansion - Investigation -Offences and penalties - Miscellaneous provisions

UNIT 3 Small scale and ancillary units - Policy and procedure for setting up SSI - Anoverview of infrastructure

UNIT 4 Fiscal and other support schemes far SSI – Setting up units in FTZ and 100%EOUS - Policy and procedure.

UNIT 5 Competition Law - Definitions – Anti-Competitive agreements – Prohibition ofabuse of dominant position – Combinations – Competition Commission of India

UNIT 6 Inquiry into certain agreements and dominant position – Inquiry into combinationby commission – Procedure of inquiry on complaints u/s 19 – Power to grantinterim relief power to award compensation

UNIT 7 Execution of orders of commission – Appeal – Duties of Director – Generalpenalties – Competition advocacy.

UNIT 8 Foreign Exchange Management Regulation Act -Objectives and definitions underFEMA - Dealings in foreign exchange - Holding of foreign exchange etc.

UNIT 9 Current account transactions, capital account transactions - Export of goods andservices realization and repatriation of foreign exchange

UNIT 10 Exemptions authorised person - Penalties and enforcement - Compounding ofoffences - Directorate of enforcement - Appellate Tribunal etc.

UNIT 11 Pollution Control Water: Water and Environment (Protection) Law - VariousBoards and their functions and powers; duties of occupier of specified industries toensure adherence to standards; offences by companies.

UNIT 12 Air Pollution: Concept of sustainable development, Government policy regarding

environment - Salient features of the Air (Prevention and Control of; Pollution) Law.

UNIT 13 Environmental Protection Legal and regulatory framework - procedures forobtaining various environment clearances - Role and functions of EnvironmentTribunal / Authority - Appearance before Environment Tribunal / Authority -Environment Audit.

UNIT 14 Consumer Protection Act -Genesis of the law - Objects and definitions - Rights ofconsumers under the Consumer Protection Act - Nature and scope of remedies –Consumer Protection - Appearance before Consumer Dispute Redressal Forums.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Gushan& Kapoor, Economic and Other Legislations.

2. Taxmann Publication, Corporate Laws.

3. ICSI Study Material on Economic Laws.

4. Bare Acts.

33145 - SECRETARIAL AND MANAGEMENT AUDIT

Objectives:

• To Know the basic concept of Secretarial and Management Audit• To understand the functioning and features of managerial audit

UNIT 1 Company Secretary in Practice: Various recognitions and areas of practice –Advisory services rendered – Challenges before the profession

UNIT 2 Professional standards and code of conduct – Exploring new horizons.

UNIT 3 Secretarial Audit: Need, objectives and scope – Periodicity and format forsecretarial audit report

UNIT 4 Appointment, duties and powers of secretarial auditor – Check-list/ Worksheet forsecretarial audit under various corporate laws and covenants of loan agreementsentered into with financial institutions.

UNIT 5 Search / Status Reports: Preparation of search and status reports from Registrarof Companies records for banks and financial institutions

UNIT 6 Scope and importance – Verification of documents relating to charges –Requirements of various financial institutions and other corporate lenders

UNIT 7 Secretarial standards – Compliance certificate.

UNIT 8 Securities Audit: Meaning, need and scope – Ensuring proper compliance ofprovisions relating to issue and transfer of securities

UNIT 9 Preventing fraudulent and unfair trade practices including Securities andExchange Board of India regulations framed thereon – Protecting the interest ofinvestors.

UNIT 10 Systems Audit: Nature – Significance and scope of systems audit – Stepsinvolved in conducting systems audit.

UNIT 11 Management Audit: Meaning, nature and scope – Principles and fundamentals ofmanagement audit

UNIT 12 Appraisal of management methods of performance – Organisational needs formanagement audit.

UNIT 13 Cost Audit: Nature, objectives and scope – Cost audit distinguished fromfinancial audit and management audit

UNIT 14 Cost audit as an aid to management, shareholders and other external agencies andpublic – Cost audit report.

REFERENCE BOOKS :

1. Shanbhogue K V, Filing of Forms and Returns and Application under Company Law, Law

Publishing House, Allahabad.

2. Datta C R, Company Directors, Eastern Law Home, Calcutta.

3. Dr. Balachandran V and Ravichandran K S, Secretarial and Management Audit, Bharat Law

House, New Delhi.

4. Vashist and Saxena, Cost and Management Audit.

5. RamanathanAR, Management Audit.

6. ICSI Publications, Secretarial and Management Audit.













Karaikudi.


EVALUATION

Procedure of AdmissionA candidate who has passed any Bachelor Degree from a recognized University in the Pattern of









Total 80










Component Marks


25

Total 25







marks).



Passing minimum






Marks and Grades:




80-89 8.0-8.9 D+ Excellent


70-74 7.0-7.4 A+ Very Good

60-69 6.0-6.9 A Good

50-59 5.0-5.9 B Average




For a semester;









9.5-10.0


O+

O





D++

D+

D





A++

A+

A

First Class



B+

B

Second Class




The maximum duration for completion of MBA degree shall not exceed five years after thecompletion of the minimum duration of the programme.



Fee structure



1 Admission Processing Fees 300.00 -

2 Course Fees 13200.00 13200.00

3 ICT Fees 150.00 150.00

TOTAL 13650.00 13350.00


LIBRARY RESOURCES

















****




MBA (EDUCATION MANAGEMENT)




MBA EDUCATION MANAGEMENT














Therefore, the introduction of MBA EDUCATION MANAGEMENT programme in the





















E) INSTRUCTIONAL DESIGNMBA EDUCATION MANAGEMENT

CourseCode

Title CIAMax.

ESEMax.

TOTMax.

C




Total 125 375 500 20

III Semester33931 Marketing Management 25 75 100 433932 Financial Management 25 75 100 4

33933 Laws Relating to Education 25 75 100 4

33934 Curriculum Designing 25 75 100 4

33935 Education Infrastructure 25 75 100 4

Total 125 375 500 20

IV Semester33941 Education Institution Management 25 75 100 433942 Institutional Linkage for Education

Management25 75 100 4

33943 Marketing of Education Services 25 75 100 4

33944 Quality in Education 25 75 100 4

33945 Contemporary issues in Education 25 75 100 4

Total 125 375 500 20

GRAND TOTAL 2000 80

Course Code Legend:

3 3 9 Y Z


CIA: Continuous Internal Assessment, ESE: End Semester Examination, TOT: Total, C:Credit Points, Max.: Maximum













UNIT 9 Directing : Meaning, Purpose, and Scope in the organization – Leadership:Meaning, Leadership styles, Leadership theories: Trait, Contingency,Situation, Path-Goal, Tactical, Transactional, Transformational and Grid.

Leaders: Type, Nature, Significance and Functions, Barriers, Politics andEthics. Leader Vs. Manager.






REFERENCES






McGraw Hill.





33912 - ORGANISATIONAL BEHAVIOUR
















REFERENCES





2006.




Bacon, 1993.


















Press, 2011.








Pearson





33914- QUANTITATIVE TECHNIQUES










UNIT 9 Operational research for Decision Making: Historical background andDevelopments – Definition – Phases in the use of Operations research –Models – Characteristics of quantitative methods - Benefits and Limitations ofQuantitative methods.






REFERENCES





4. Richard I Levin, & C. Atkinson Kirkpatrick, Quantitative Approaches to Management,

McGraw-Hill.






























Publishers.


Publication.




















REFERENCES



3. William Josiah Goode and Paul K. Hatt, Methods of Social Research, McGraw Hill,

1981.

4. Wilkinson and Bhandarkar, Methods and Techniques of Social Research, 2003, HPH.



Publications, 2008.


Mumbai


9. Pauline V Young, Scientific Social Surveys and Research, Prentice-Hall, (Digitalized)

2007.


















REFERENCES



McGraw-Hill, 2008.





House, 2008.



















REFERENCES


2010.






















REFERENCES


2011.



2008.








Objective:

















REFERENCES



2007.









33931 - MARKETING MANAGEMENTObjectives:
















REFERENCES












Objectives:• To help the students to know the basic concepts of financial management• To understand capital structure, dividend policy and working capital management.• To learn the various concepts of financial management along with applications









UNIT 9 Uncertainty and Risk models: Simulation Analysis- Sensitivity analysis-Decision tree analysis- Certainty equivalent and risk-adjusted return measures-Tax considerations in Investment Decisions Cost of capital and InvestmentDecisions.






REFERENCES


2010









Press

33933 - LAWS RELATING TO EDUCATIONObjectives:

• To know the concept trust and its types Define trust and its types• To understand the rules related to submission of accounts, renewal, ensure and

cancellation of societies under societies registration act.• To make use of consumer redressal agencies.

UNIT 1 INDIAN TRUST ACT, 1882: Definitions - types of trusts – registration oftrusts

UNIT 2 TRUST : characteristics of trusts – renewal of trusts – duties and liabilities oftrustees – vacating the office of trust.

UNIT 3 Cancellation of trusts - Rights and liabilities of beneficiaries -– taxexemptions.

UNIT 4 SOCIETIES REGISTRATION ACT, 1860: Definitions – registration ofsocieties – submission of accounts – renewal – closure – cancellation ofsocieties – offences and penalties.

UNIT 5 PRIVATE COLLEGES (REGULATION) ACT, 1976: Objectives –definitions – establishment of Private colleges

UNIT 6 payment of grants Management – obligations of managing committee

UNIT 7 Government control of private colleges – accounts, audit, inspection andreturns – offences and penalties.

UNIT 8 CONSUMER PROTECTION ACT, 1986: Definitions – consumer protectioncouncils – structure, constitution, objects and jurisdiction

UNIT 9 consumer redressal agencies – procedure for complaints – enforcement oforders of the council.

UNIT 10 EMPLOYEES’ PROVIDENT FUND & MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONSACT, 1952: Objects – application – definitions – EPF schemes – contribution

UNIT 11 determination and recovery – obligations of employers – offences andpenalties.

UNIT 12 NEGOTIABLE INSTRUMENTS ACT, 1881: Definitions – characteristics ofnegotiable instruments

UNIT 13 NEGOTIABLE INSTRUMENTS ACT, 1881: Definitions – characteristicsofparties to an instrument

UNIT 14 Types of instruments – Negotiation – types- crossing – types – payment ofcrossed cheques – endorsement – features – types and effect.

REFERENCE :1. Bare Act Business Laws – one should know , Nabhi Publications N.D. Kapoor ,

Commercial & Industrial Law

33934 - CURRICULUM DESIGNING

Objectives:• To know the meaning of Curriculum designing• To Make use of different methods of instruction viz. lecture, demonstration,

seminars, symposia, brainstorming, ease analysis and team teaching• To appreciate the use of interest and Computer for effective curriculum

transaction

UNIT 1 Curriculum – meaning - philosophical, sociological, and psychological basesof curriculum

UNIT 2 Principles of curriculum designing - curriculum as an instrument of nationaldevelopment

UNIT 3 Factors influencing curriculum construction such as national political,economic, cultural, social and intellectual aspects

UNIT 4 Systems approach to curriculum construction – curriculum as an output in thesystem.

UNIT 5 Curriculum planning – development of programmes, syllabi and textbooks,characteristics of a good curriculum and a good textbook

UNIT 6 Overcoming present drawbacks in curriculum construction.

UNIT7 Curriculum implementation – curriculum as an input in the system –curriculum transaction strategies at higher education level

UNIT 8 Traditional and non-traditional strategies – group and individual methods ofinstruction

UNIT 9 Lecture, demonstrations, seminars, symposia, workshops, brainstorming, caseanalysis and team teaching.

UNIT 10 Components effective curriculum transaction- Resources for curriculumtransaction

UNIT 11 Instructional materials, library and electronic devices, audio-visual devices,the chalkboard, overhead projector, liquid crystal display projector, laboratoryand field experience – using internet and computesr for effective curriculumtransaction.

UNIT 12 Curriculum evaluation – meaning of evaluation – objectives and methods ofevaluation-measurement and evaluation in education

UNIT 13 Formative and summative evaluation tools of evaluation such as achievementtest-psychological scales such as attitude scales, interest inventories,

UNIT 14 Personality test-curriculum revision-need -principles to be adopted -curriculum designing and redesigning as continuous process.

REFERENCES :

1. Jenkins David and Shipman D. Martin, Curriculum-Introduction, Open Books

Publication Ltd. 1976.

2. Joyce S. Choate, Lamoine J. Miller et al., Assessing and Programming Basic

Curriculum Skills, Allyn and Bacon Inc. 1986.

3. Kaba, R.M. and Rishi Ram Singh, Curriculum Construction and youth Development,

sterling publishers, New Delhi, 1987.

4. Mc Neil, J.D. Curriculum: A comprehensive Evaluation, Little Brown and Co. 1985.

5. NCTE, National Curriculum for Primary and Secondary Education. A

framework,New Delhi, 1986.

6. Srivtsava, A.P. Teaching and Learning in 21st century, Indian Books Centre New

Delhi, 1987.

33935 - EDUCATION INFRASTRUCTUREObjectives:

• To know the concept of education infrastructure.• To appreciate the role of modern communication technologies in education• To Analysis the role of electrical and water supply as education infrastructure

.

UNIT 1 Education Infrastructure :Meaning – Significance – Components

UNIT 2 Macro – Micro Infrastructure – Its impact on academic / institutionaldevelopment

UNIT 3 Educational Infrastructure – Present scenario.

UNIT 4 Funding for Infrastructure: Existing methods – Sources – Drawbacks –Additional sources – Alternative funding pattern.

UNIT 5 Buildings- Importance of buildings as education infrastructure

UNIT 6 Types of Buildings – Laboratories – Class rooms – Seminar Hall –Auditoriums – Sports complex – Indoor

UNIT 7 Outdoor Gymnasium – Swimming Pool

UNIT 8 Their maintenance - Roads – Types of roads – Maintenance

UNIT 9 Electrical and Water supply – Importance of Electrical and Water Supply asEducation Infrastructure - External Electrification – Internal Electrification

UNIT 10 Electrical and Water supply External water supply – Internal water supply-Drinking water – Purification - Distributions – Maintenance

UNIT 11 Telecommunications – Modern communication Technologies such as Internet– Internet – Edusat – Satelllite linkages

UNIT 12 Establishment of Multimedia Labs – Maintenance.

UNIT 13 Macro infrastructure – National Highways – Airports – Ports –Its relevanceand impact on Education

UNIT 14 Development - Suggestive Model for Higher Education Complex.

REFERENCES:

1. Ansari , M.M. Trends in Educational Expenditure among the Central and

StateUniversities : An Analysis of Sources, Methods and Patterns of Resource

Allocation,New Delhi, AIU, 1990

2. Azad, J.L., A critical Study of the Financing of Higher Education in India, The

Higher Learnig in India, Delhi, Vikas , 1974 : 51-77.

3. Barr, N, Alternative funding resources for higher education, Economic Journal, 103

(May): 718 – 728, 1993.

4. Ghosh, D.K., University System in India, Delhi, Rahul Publication, 1983.

5. Lumsden, Keith G., Efficiency in Universities : The LaPaz Papers, Amsterdam,

Elsevier, 1974.

33941- EDUCATION INSTITUTION MANAGEMENTObjectives:

• To acquire the knowledge of education institution management• To make use of strategies for change management• To appreciate the role of communication management in educational institution

UNIT 1 Issues in Institution Management: Goal setting – Institution nurturing –Manpower grooming- Alliance with society

UNIT 2 Planned development – Learning institution and environmental adaptation.

UNIT 3 Institutional Climate and Culture: Facts of institutional climate and culture

UNIT 4 Factors influencing institutional climate and culture in our Educationinstitution – Impact of these on institutional performance

UNIT 5 Power and politics and their management.

UNIT 6 Change Management: Need for Change - Strategies for change management

UNIT 7 Dealing with resistance to change- Planned obsolescence and change

UNIT 8 Process and tools of change and development .

UNIT 9 Institutional Development: Organisation Development Intervention Strategies

UNIT 10 Institutional Effectiveness: Nature and criteria – Management implications–Management of crisis – Management of growth.

UNIT 11 Communication Management in Education institutions – Forms, Systems andother aspects– Online and Offline communication management.

UNIT 12 Activity Management: Managing student admissions – Planning, executionand control of the same – Managing conflicts with students and amongstudents and among staff-members.

UNIT 13 Management of Examinations: Preparation for planning carrying out andcontrol of conducting examination – Difficulties involved

UNIT 14 Use of systematic appointments – Managing valuation of students’ works -Managing result publication and dispatch of mark statement – Convocation.

Reference Books:

1. Robbins, Organisation Behaviour2. Fred Luthans , Organisation Behaviour3. AIU, University News (Various Issues)4. Rajavel, N., Management of Higher Educational Institutions

33942 - INSTITUTIONAL LINKAGE FOR EDUCATION MANAGEMENT

Objectives:• To enumerate the agencies of higher education• To analysis the administrative structure of higher education• To appreciate the role of funding agencies like UGC, DST, MCI, ICMR etc.

UNIT 1 Higher Education in India: Higher education system – National Policy onhigher education – Agencies of higher education

UNIT 2 Institutions in the higher education system – Administrative structure of highereducation – Types of higher educational institutions.

UNIT 3 Institutional Linkage-I : University Grants Commission (UGC): Objectives –Functions – Schemes

UNIT 4 Department of Science and Technology (DST): Objectives – Functions –Projects and programmes – Schemes for funding

UNIT 5 National Assessment and Accreditation Council (NAAC) – Objectives –Functions – Assessment and accreditation procedures – Quality indicators.

UNIT 6 Institutional Linkage-II :All India Council for Technical Education (AICTE):Objectives – Functions – Policies and programmes

UNIT 7 National Council for Teacher Education (NCTE): Objectives – Functions –Organisation structure – Regional Committees – Constitutions, functions –Procedure for recognition of teacher education institutes.

UNIT 8 Institutional Linkage-III :Medical Council of India (MCI): Constitution –Objectives – Functions – Procedure for registration – Regulations relating toprofessional conduct – Indian Council of Medical Research (ICMR):Objectives – Functions – Indian Nursing Council: Constitution – Objectives –Powers – Registration – Dental Council of India (DCI): Organisation structure– Registration – Pharmacy Council of India (PCI): Objectives – Functions –Regulations – Registration.

UNIT 9 Institutional Linkage-IV :Rehabilitation Council of India (RCI): Programmesof RCI – Rehabilitation training programmes – Inspection and recognition ofinstitutions

UNIT 10 Indian Council of Social Science Research (ICSSR): Functions – Sponsoredprogrammes – Financial assistance – Research project programmes

UNIT 11 Indian Council of Agricultural Research (ICAR): Functions – Thrust areas –Council of Scientific and Industrial Research (CSIR): Objectives – Functions– Structure.

UNIT 12 Institutional Linkage-V :Sports Authority of India (SAI): Objectives –Programmes – Incentives for promotion of sports – Bar Council of India(BCI): Functions – Powers unctions of State Bar Council.

UNIT 13 Institutional Linkage-VI :UNESCO: Organisation structure – Functions –Commonwealth of Learning (COL): Purpose and functions – Governance –Services offered –

UNIT 14 IGNOU: Objectives – Features – Functions – Thrust areas – DistanceEducation Council (DEC): Objectives – Powers and functions – Assessmentand accreditation.

REFERENCE :

1. Bare Acts, Policy Notes on Establishment of each Institution.

2. Annual Reports of Relevant Institutions.

3. University News , Relevant Websites.

39

33943 - MARKETING OF EDUCATION SERVICES

Objectives:• To state the meaning of service marketing.• To explain the life cycle concept in education ventures.• To analysis the importance of Students supports services.

UNIT 1 Services Marketing: Concept – Significance – Salient features – ServiceMission

UNIT 2 The behaviour profile of the learners – Segmenting learners market

UNIT 3 Services Mix: Product, Price, Place, Promotion, People, Process, PhysicalEvidence.

UNIT 4 Product Mix: Education product planning and development – Innovativeeducation – Modification – Diversification and dropping

UNIT 5 Life Cycle concept in education ventures.

UNIT 6 Price Mix: Fee structure in Education – Objectives and methods – Regulatoryaspects

UNIT 7 Place Mix: Service delivery – Methods of distribution – Franchising – Off-Campus arrangement – Logistics management

UNIT 8 Role of IT in dealing with barrier of distance.

UNIT 9 Promotion and Communication Mix: Education promotional strategies –Advertisement and publicity – Sales promotion

UNIT 10 Personal selling – Word of mouth.

UNIT 11 People in Education Service – Internal marketing – Processes

UNIT 12 Student support services – Physical evidence in education service.

UNIT 13 Service quality – Service quality dimensions – Developing service quality –Quality assurance in education – Bench marking

UNIT 14 Learner relationship marketing – Quality assurance in teaching –Internationalization and Globalization of education marketing – IntellectualProperty Rights in education service.

40

REFERENCE:

1. Jha S.M, “Services Marketing”, Himalaya Publishing, Mumbai, 1998.

2. Adrian Payne, “The Essence of Services Marketing”, PHI, New Delhi, 2000.

3. Helen Woodruffe, “Services Marketing”, Macmillan, Dehli, 1995.

41

33944 - QUALITY IN EDUCATIONObjectives:

• To state the importance of quality in higher education• To analysis the need for quality in higher education• To develop strategies for matching global Standards

UNIT 1 Quality in Higher Education: Quality related terminologies: Quality – Qualitycontrol – Quality assessment

UNIT 2 Quality assurance – Need for quality in higher education – Factors influencingquality

UNIT 3 Accountability: Impact of accountability and accreditation on stake-holdersand society.

UNIT 4 Performance Indicators and Benchmarking in Higher Education: PerformanceIndicators: Concept – Types – Uses – Performance Indicators of NAAC

UNIT 5 Benchmarking: Meaning – Types – Benefits – Methodologies and procedures.

UNIT 6 Quality Assessment and Accreditation: Meaning – Types – Accreditationprocedure – Accreditation by NAAC: Existing practices – Newmethodologies and initiatives of NAAC accreditation – Re-accreditationprocess

UNIT 7 National Board of Accreditation (NBA): Preamble – Need – Advantages –Process of Accreditation – Criteria and weightages.

UNIT 8 Total Quality Management in Education: Definition – Elements –Management plans – Approaches to TQM – TQM Process

UNIT 9 Academic Audit: Objectives – Advantages – Limitations – Accreditation andAcademic Audit.

UNIT 10 Quality in Global Perspective: Global standards – Strategies for matchingglobal standards – International practices of accreditation

42

UNIT 11 ISO 9000 Certification for Educational Institutions: Methodology forImplementation of ISO 9000

UNIT 12 ISO 9000 Benefits – Limitations – Accreditation Vs ISO 9000 Certification.

UNIT 13 New Quality Perspectives in Higher Education: Capacity Building Model –Modification of Accreditation System

UNIT 14 Industry Academia Partnership for quality education and research.

REFERENCE

1. Armond V. Feigerbaum, Total Quality Control, McGraw Hill.

2. Ron Collard, Total Quality, Jaico, Delhi.

3. John Bark, Essence of TQM, Prentice Hall, Delhi.

4. Willborn& Cheng, Global Management of Quality Assurance Systems, McGraw Hill.

5. Townsend &Gebhardt, Commit to Quality, John Wiley & Sons.

43

33945 - CONTEMPORARY ISSUES IN EDUCATION

Objectives:• To state the meaning of multiplicity of course.• To appreciate the role of change management• To explain in his or her own words the concept of SWOC.

UNIT 1 Multiplicity of Courses: Tradition and off-shoot specialization courses – Distanceand e-learning courses, full-time, part-time and own-time courses,Interdisciplinary

UNIT 2 Hybrid and Interface courses: Issues and significance.

UNIT 3 Growth Dimensions: Growth in institutions at all levels – Growth in studentstrength

UNIT 4 Heterogeneity of student population – Quantity vs Quality issues.

UNIT 5 Autonomy and Accountability: Issues relating to autonomy, accountability andaccreditation of individual, departmental and institutional levels

UNIT 6 Impact on stake-holders and the societal system – Autonomy as an instrument oftransformational leadership – Leadership in education management

UNIT7 Change Management: Issues – Innovators – Adopters – Legends.

UNIT 8 Resources and Facilities: Govt. Funding: Size, trend and need for higher support– Private capital in educational investment

UNIT 9 Community resources: Financial, intellectual, infrastructural and motivationalresources: Harnessing and commitment thereof.

UNIT 10 Quality Management: Need for excellence in standard of education

UNIT 11 Matching global standards: Challenges and strategies – Top-down and bottom-upapproaches – SWOT analysis of every constituent – ISO standards.

44

UNIT 12 Relations Management: Internal and external relations – Campus tranquilitymanagement – Stakeholders participation in management – Extracurricularactivities for institution and social bonding extension services and outreachprogrammes for societal development initiatives.

UNIT 13 Systems Orientation: Education as an integral part of every individual, familyand society – Open Vs closed systems approach – Concepts of management,digital management, virtual management

UNIT 14 System issues: Bench marking, MOUs, Franchising, Downsizing, Emotionalintelligence and Tecno-ethics.

REFERENCE :

1. Hanna DE and Associates, Higher Education in the era of Digital Competition – Choices and

challenges, Modison, WI, Atwood Publishing, 2000.

2. Catherine M and David M, Educational Issues in the Learning Age, London.

3. Ann FL and Associates, Leading Academic Change: Essential Roles for Departmental

Chairs, San Fransisco, Jossey-Bass Publishers, 2000.

45

3.DURATION OF THE PROGRAMME

The course shall consist of two academic years divided into four semesters

4.Faculty and Support Staff Requirements




5.Instructional Delivery Mechanism






Karaikudi.


EVALUATION

Procedure of AdmissionA candidate who has passed any Bachelor Degree from a recognized University in the Pattern of






46




Total 80










Component Marks


25

Total 25

Question paper pattern (Theory)• The question paper carries a maximum of 75 marks.




47


marks).



Passing minimum






Marks and Grades:




80-89 8.0-8.9 D+ Excellent


70-74 7.0-7.4 A+ Very Good

60-69 6.0-6.9 A Good

50-59 5.0-5.9 B Average




48

For a semester;









9.5-10.0


O+

O





D++

D+

D





A++

A+

A

First Class



B+

B

Second Class



49


The maximum duration for the programme shall not exceed five years after the completion ofthe minimum duration of the programme.



Fee structure


First

Year

SecondYear


300.00 -

2 Course Fees 13200.00 13200.00

5 ICT Fees 150.00 150.00

TOTAL 13650.00 13350.00


LIBRARY RESOURCES







50











****

51

525252